EIA Report MSPL Sandur Ballari 1

MES/EIA/Sec-2(b)&3(a) /22-23
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

&
ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN
Iron Ore Beneficiation Plant & Pellet

Plant
Plant & Tailing Area : 127.61 Ha.
Somalapur & Kalingeri – villages
of
Sandur-Taluk, Ballari - District,
Karnataka State
PROPONENT
M/s. MSPL LIMITED
Hosapete, Ballari District
April -2022
EIA Consultants
BENEFICIATION PLANT
PELLETIZATION PLANT
MINERAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
(Accredited by QCI-NABET ORG000756) ARDRA CONSULTING SERVICES PVT
Lab Recognised by MoEF LTD
25/XXV, Club Road, BELLARY-583103, (Accredited by QCI-NABET ORG000683)
Karnataka, Tel/Fax 08392-267421, A/79, Sahidnagar, Bhubaneswar-751007
Mob: 0919448367421, Tel.No. 0674-2546346, Mob: 09937910105
Email : mes_msraju@yahoo.co.uk Email: ardraconsulting09@gmail.com
DETAILS TO BE FURNISHED FOR TOR COMPLIANCE OF IOBP&PP
Sl.N ToR Condition Compliance in EIA & EMP
o
Observations from Committee
1 Action plan to limit the dust emission from all the stacks Refer chapter- 4 & para 4.3
below 30 mg/Nm3 shall be furnished. Pg. No. 99-104
2 Action plan for fugitive emission control in the plant premises Complied
shall be provided
3 The seasonal nallah passing through the project site shall Refer Drawing
not be disturbed. MES/DWG/GB/2-15
Landscaping shall be done on both embankments, with green
belt covering 10 m land on both sides of the nallah
4 Action plan for green belt development covering 33% of the Refer Chapter-10 , Para 10.3.6.1 &
project area all along the periphery of the project site with Pg No.167
a density of 2500 trees per hectare shall be submitted.
This shall include 30-meter-wide green belt development
within the project area towards Yashwant Nagar village
5 Action plan for 100 % solid waste utilization shall be Refer Chapter-4 , para 4.7
submitted. Pg.No.108
6 Action plan for rain water harvesting shall be submitted. Complied
7 Action plan for the stock piles with impervious floor, The stock pile will be lined with
provision of garland drains and catch pits to trap run off impervious material to prevent
material shall be submitted. percolation of leachate to the
ground.
Construction of retention walls and
rain water drainage will be made
around the tailing dump to arrest
the silt wash off and collect rain
water runoff. The run-off water will
be collected in a series of settling
tanks and the settled water will be
used for dust suppression and
plantation.
Refer Chapter-4 , para 4.7
& Pg No.108
8 PP shall submit an action plan for gradually phasing out of Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.3 &
2491KLD ground water usage in a time frame of three years Pg.No.9
from the date of issue of EC for the proposed project
9 Action plan for treatment, storage and utilization of tailings Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.6.2.8 &
shall be submitted. Pg.No.19
Generic ToR in respect of Industry sector
11 Executive Summary Enclosed
12 Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation Complied
13 Information about the project proponent Refer Chapter-1, Para 1.2.2 &
Pg.No.3
14 Importance and benefits of the project Refer Chapter-1, Para 1.3.3 &
Pg.No.5
15 Cost of project and time of completion Refer Chapter -2, Para.2.5
Pg.No.11
16 Products with capacities for the proposed project Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.6 &
Pg.No.11
17 If expansion project, details of existing products with NA
capacities and whether adequate land is available for
expansion, reference of earlier EC if any
18 List of raw materials required and their source along with Refer Chapter-2, Table.No.2.2 &
mode of transportation 2.3 & Pg.No.12
19 Other chemicals and materials required with quantities Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.6.1 &
and storage capacities Pg.No.11
20 Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.3 &
and their management Pg.No.9
21 Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status
of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.7 &
(regular and contract) Pg.No 23 to 25
22 The project proponent shall furnish the requisite documents Under Process .
from the competent authority in support of drawl of ground
water and surface water and supply of electricity
23 Process description along with major equipment and Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.6.2.2 &
machineries, process flow sheet (Quantitative) from raw Pg.No 13 to 15
material to products to be provided
24 Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems. Refer Chapter-7, Para 7.3.2 &
Pg.No.135 to 137
25 Expansion/modernization proposals:
a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Not applicable
Amendments there to obtained for the project from
MoEF&CC/SEIAA shall be attached as an Annexure. A
certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the Regional
Office of the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate
Change as per circular dated 301h May, 2012 on the
status of compliance of conditions stipulated in all the
existing environmental clearances including Amendments
shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of
Consent to Operate for the ongoing /existing operation of the
project from SPCB/PCC shall be attached with the EIA-EMP
report
b In case the existing project has not obtained environmental Not applicable
clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of
the EIA Notification 1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006
shall be provided. Copies of Consent to Establish/No
Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units
operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of
FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted.
Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents
from the SPCB shall be submitted
Site Details
26 Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, Refer Chapter-1, Para 1.3.2 &
District and State, Justification for selecting the site, Pg.No. 4
whether other sites were considered.
A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10 km and Refer DWG
site location on 1 :50,000/1 :25,000 scale on an A3/ A2 No.MES/DWG/PLP/22-02
sheet. (Including all eco-sensitive areas and environmentally MES/DWG/KP/22-03
sensitive places)
27 Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site. Plant area: Lat N 15° 01'26.00" to
N 15o 01’ 57.3”and Long E 76° 29'
47.10" to E 76o 30’ 12.0” and
tailing dump yard : N 140
59’10.02” to 140 58’25.18” & E
76° 29' 21.96" to E 76° 30' 22.28"
28 Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site. Refer MES/DWG/HRSM/22-04
29 Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed MES/DWG/PLP/22-02
unit indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area,
utilities etc. If located within an Industrial
area/Estate/Complex, layout oflndustrial Area indicating
location ofunit within the Industrial area/Estate
30 Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) Refer Chapter-1 , Photo 1.0 & 1.1
plant site. If existing, show photographs of Pg.No.5
plantation/greenbelt, in particular.
31 .Land use break-up of total land of the project site Refer Chapter-1, Table. 1.0 & 1.1
(identified and acquired), government/private - Pg.No.4
agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements,
etc shall be included. (Not required for industrial area)
32 A list of major industries with name and type within study Refer Chapter -2, Table.No.2.0.
area (10 km radius) shall be incorporated. Land use details Pg.No.10
of the study area
33 Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the Refer Chapter -3, Para.3.4.5
study area shall be included Pg.No. 30 to 31
34 Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study Refer Chapter -3, Para.3.4.4
area. If the siteis within 10 km radius of any major river, Pg.No.28
peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood
occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the
past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site
and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be
provided. (Mega green field projects)
35 Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not Refer Chapter -2, Para.2.3.1
complete, stage of the acquisition process and expected time Pg.No.9 to 10
of complete possession of the land.
36 R&R details in respect of land in line with state Not applciable
Government policy
Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):
37 Permission and approval for the use of forest land Stage -1 Process for DHPC
(forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the Enclosed Annexure-3
State Forest Department. (If applicable).
38 Land use map based on High resolution satellite imagery Refer drawing
(GPS) of the proposed site delineating the forestland MES/DWG/LU/22-13
(in case of projects involving forest land more than 40
ha).
39 Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I Enclosed Annexure-3
forestry clearance along with latest status shall be
submitted
40 The projects to be located within 10 km of the Not Applicable
National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,
Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project
proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by
Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-a-vis
the project location and the recommendations or
comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon
41 Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Wild life conservation plan under
Chief Wildlife Warden of the State Government for process
conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the
study area.
42 Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Not applicable
Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee
of the National Board for Wildlife
Environmental Status
43 Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the Refer Chapter -3, Para.3.5.1.2
project site and site-specific micro-meteorological data Pg.No.
using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed
and direction and rainfall.
44 AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, Refer Chapter -2, Para.3.5.3.1 ,
PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO and other parameters relevant to Table.3.8
the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall Pg.No.35 to 38
be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the
pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and
sensitive receptors including reserved forests
45 Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all Refer Annexure- 4
stations as per frequency given in the NAQQM
Notification of Nov. 2009 along with - min., max.,
average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters
from data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an
annexure to the EIA Report.
46 Surface water quality of nearby River (60m upstream Refer Annexure-4
and downstream) and other surface drains at eight
locations as per CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.
47 Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of Not applicable
river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC.
48 Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations Refer Annexure-4
shall be included.
49 Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study Refer Annexure-4
area.
50 Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines Refer Annexure-4
51 Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of Refer Chapter -3, Para.3.9
vehicles for transportation of materials, additional traffic due Pg.No.94
to proposed project, parking arrangement etc
52 Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and Wildlife conversation plan is
aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with special prepared
reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If
Schedule-I fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife
Conservation Plan shall be prepared and furnished.
53 Socio-economic status of the study area. Refer Chapter -3, Para.3.8
Pg.No.75 to 93
Impact Assessment and Environment Management Plan
54 Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from Refer Chapter -4, Para.4.3.4
the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological Pg.No.102-105
features. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the
AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs of the specific
terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts
of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources
of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the
area shall be well assessed. Details of the model used and the
input data used for modelling shall also be provided. The air
quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing
the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive
receptors, if any
55 Water Quality modelling- in case, if the effluent is proposed NA
to be discharged in to the local drain, then Water Quality
Modelling study should be conducted for the drain water
taking into consideration the upstream and downstream
quality of water of the drain
56 Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products Refer Chapter -4, Para.4.12
on the surrounding environment shall be assessed and Pg.No
provided. In this regard, options for transport of raw materials
and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or
rail-cum road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall
be examined
57 A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant Refer Chapter -4, Para.4.5.2
operations, extent recycled and reused for different purposes Pg.No.106
shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment.
Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the
prescribed standards of discharge under E (P) Rules.
58 Details of stack emission and action plan for control of Refer Chapter -2, Para.2.6.2.6
emissions to meet standards. Pg.No.19
59 Measures for fugitive emission control Refer Chapter -4, Para.4.3
Pg.No.99 to 105
60 Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, Refer Chapter -2, Para.2.2.6.8
utilization and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding Pg.No .22
utilization of solid and hazardous waste shall also be MOU will be reached with
included. EMP shall include the concept of waste- regsitered contractor with KSPCB
minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy for handling the harardous waste
conservation, and natural resource conservation. genearted
61 Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Refer Chapter -2, Para.2.2.6.8
Notification, 2009. Adetailed plan of action shall be Pg.No
provided.
62 Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % Refer Chapter -10, Table.10.4,
area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Pg.No.167
Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning Drawing No. MES/DWG/GB/22-15
schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be
around the project boundary and a scheme for greening
of the roads used for the project shall also be
incorporated
63 Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant The total available surface run-off
site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof from the area is about 3,57,377
tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water m3/annum is planned to be
and also to use for the various activities at the project site collected in the rain water
to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement collection tank envisaged at BP
from other sources &PP and tailing disposal area as per
hydorgeological studies conducted
64 Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for Refer Chapter -10, Table.10.5
environmental pollution control measures shall be Pg.No.173
included
65 Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring Refer Chapter -6, Para.6.1.2
shall be submitted Pg.No.128-129
66 Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Refer Chapter -7, Para.7.3.3
Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan Pg.No.141-149
including Risk Assessment and damage control.
Disaster management plan should be linked with District
Disaster Management Plan
Occupational health
67 Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What Refer Chapter -7, Para.7.3.2.9
are the exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and Pg.No.140
whether they are within Permissible Exposure level
(PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the
company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that
health of the workers can be preserved,
68 Details of exposure specific health status evaluation Refer Chapter -7, Para.7.6
of worker. If the workers' health is being evaluated Pg.No.151 to 153
by pre-designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry,
Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour
vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre-
placement and periodical examinations give the details
of the same. Details regarding last month analysed data
of abovementioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of
exposure and department wise.
69 Annual report of health status of workers with special Refer Chapter -7, Para.7.6.5
reference to Occupational Health and Safety. Pg.No.153
70 Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational Refer Chapter -7, Para.7.6.6
health & safety of all contract and casual workers Pg.No.153
Corporate Environment Policy
71 Does the company have a well laid down Environment Refer Chapter -10, para 10.1
Policy approved by its Board of Directors? Ifso, it may Pg.No.159
be detailed in the EIA report
72 Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard Not Applicable
operating process I procedures to bring into focus any
infringement I deviation I violation of the environmental
or forest norms I conditions? If so, it may be detailed in
the EIA
73 What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of Refer Chapter -10, Para.10.6
the company to deal with the environmental issues and Pg.No.171-176
for ensuring compliance with the environmental
clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.
74 Does the company have system of reporting of non- Yes. The company is ISO certified
compliances / violations of environmental norms to the
Board of Directors of the company and I or shareholders or
stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall
be detailed in the EIA report
75 Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, Refer Chapter -10, Para.10.5
fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the Labour force Pg.No.170
during construction as well as to the casual workers
including truck drivers during operation phase
76 To address the Public Hearing issues, provisions Not applicable
contained under Ministry's Office Memorandum vide
F.No. 22-65/2017-lA.lII dated 30/09/2020 shall be
complied.
77 Any litigation pending against the project and/or any Not applicable
direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the
project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has
the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections
of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and
compliance/A TR to the notice(s) and present status of the
case
78 A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of Enclosed
above ToRs
79 The ToRs prescribed shall be valid for a period of three --
years for submission of the EIA & EMP reports along
with Public Hearing Proceedings (wherever stipulated).
The following generalpoints shall be noted:
80 All documents shall be properly indexed, page numbered Complied
81 Period/date of data collection shall be clearly indicated Refer Chapter -3, Para.3.5.1
Table.no.3.4
Pg.No.33 to 34
82 Authenticated English translation of all material in Refer Annexure-4
regional languages shall be provided.
83 The letter/application for environmental clearance shall NA
quote the MOEF&CC file No. and also attach a copy of
the letter
84 The copy of the letter received from the Ministry shall be NA
also attached as an annexure to the final EIA-EMP Report
85 The index of the final EIA-EMP report must indicate the NA
specific chapter and page no. of the ElA-EMP Report
86 While preparing the EIA report, the instructions for the Complied
proponents and instructions for the consultants issued by
MOEF&CC vide O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-IA.ll (I)
dated 4th August, 2009, which are available on the website
of this Ministry shall also be followed.
87 The consultants involved in the preparation of EIA- NABET Certificates of consultants

EMP report after accreditation with Quality Council of are enclosed
India (QCl)/National Accreditation Board of Education
and Training (NABET) would need to include a certificate
in this regard in the EIA-EMP reports prepared by them
and data provided by other organization/Laboratories
including their status of approvals etc. Name of the
Consultant and the Accreditation details shall be posted
on the ElA-EMP Report as well as on the cover of the Hard
Copy of the Presentation material for EC presentation
88 ToRs' prescribed by the Expert Appraisal Committee EIA & EMP prepared as per the
(Industry) shall be considered for preparation of EIA- Generoc structure of EIA
EMP report for the project in addition to all the relevant notiifcation 2006
information as per the 'Generic Structure of EIA' given in
Appendix III and IIIA in the EIA Notification, 2006.
Where the documents provided are in a language other
than English, an English translation shall be provided.
The draft EIA-EMP report shall be submitted to the
State Pollution Control Board of the concerned State for
conduct of Public Hearing. The SPCB shall conduct the
Public Hearing/public consultation, district-wise, as per
the provisions of EIA notification, 2006. The Public
Hearing shall be chaired by an Officer not below the rank of
Additional District Magistrate. The issues raised in the
Public Hearing and during the consultation process and
the commitments made by the project proponent on the same
shall be included separately in EIA-EMP Report in a
separate chapter and summarized in a tabular chart with
financial budget (capital and revenue) along with time-
schedule of implementation for complying with the
commitments made. The final EIA report shall be
submitted to the Ministry for obtaining environmental
clearance.
Additional TOR points for Pellet Plant
89 Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with the status of NIOM – EC copy to be attached
environmental clearance of iron ore and coal mines Annexure-6
90 Quantum of production of coal and iron ore from coal & Refer Chapter-2, Para 2.6.2
iron ore mines and the projects they cater to. Mode of Pg.No
transportation to the plant and its impact
91 Recent land-use map based on satellite imagery. High- Refer MES/DWG/LU/22-13
resolution satellite image data having Im-Sm spatial enclosed
resolution like quickbird, Ikonos, JRS P-6 pan sharpened
etc. for the 10 Km radius area from proposed site. The
same shall be used for land used/land• cover mapping of
the area.
92 PM (PM10 and PM2.s) present in the ambient air must be Refer Chapter -4, Para.4.3.4
analysed for source analysis - natural dust/RS PM Pg.No.102-105
generated from plant operations (trace elements) of PM10
to be carried over.
93 All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to Refer Chapter -4, Para.4.7
avoid leaching of materials to ground water Pg.No.108
94 Plan for the implementation of the recommendations Not applicable
made for the steel plants in the CREP guidelines
95 Plan for slag utilization Not applicable
96 Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke oven, blast Not applicable
furnace)
97 System of coke quenching adopted with justification Not applicable
98 Trace metals Mercury, arsenic and fluoride emissions in It will be done at the time of
the raw material procurment of raw material
99 Trace metals in waste material especially slag Not applicable
100 Trace metals in water Refer Annexure -4
Additional BP Points
101 Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its Refer Chapter -2, Fig 2.1 & 2.2
processes and operations, along with material and energy Pg.No.14 & 16
inputs & outputs (material and energy balance).
102 Details regarding pollution control measures to be adopted in Refer Chapter -4,
the mineral handling area, loading and unloading areas Pg.No.96-124
including all transfer points shall be submitted
103 The Project proponent shall submit action plan for Iron ore beneficiation shall be done
conditioning of the ore with water to mitigate fugitive dust through wet processing
emission, without affecting flow of ore in the ore processing
and handling areas.
104 Treatment details regarding effluent generated from the ore None
beneficiation plant and the mode of transportation of tailing
slurry shall be submitted
105 Separate chapter on design of the tailing/slime pond by After filter press, the tailings will
considering the rainfall in the area, proximity of the be stacked in tailing dump. The
tailing/slime pond to the nearby water bodies and safety etc., area will be lined with impervious
shall be submitted material to prevent percolation of
leachate to the ground.
storm water drainage will be made
the silt wash off and collect storm
plantation in the plant area.
106 Action plan for regular monitoring of ground water level and As per the recomandiation of
quality in and around the project area of beneficiation plant Hydrogeological report the
and tailing/slime pond shall be submitted by establishing a piezometers shall be established
network of existing wells and constructing new piezometers
107 Details regarding establishment of garland drain around the After filter press, the tailings will
tailing/slime pond and the quantity of decanted water to be be stacked in tailing dump. The
re-circulated from the tailing/slime pond shall be submitted area will be lined with impervious
along with complete water balance. material to prevent percolation of
leachate to the ground.
storm water drainage will be made
the silt wash off and collect storm
plantation in the plant area.
108 Technology to be adopted for maximum recovery of ore in Chapter -2 , Para- 2.6.2.2
order to reduce slurry discharge and to increase the life of the Pg.No.13
tailing/slime pond shall be submitted.
CONTENTS
Chapter No Description Page No.

1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.0 Introduction 2
1.1 Purpose of the Report 2
1.2 Identification of Project Proponent & Project 3
1.3. Brief Description of Nature, Size And Location of The Project 4
1.4 Scope of the Study 6
2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Type & Project Description 8
2.2 Need for the project 8
2.3 Location of the map 9
2.4 Size or Magnitude of Operation 10
2.5 Proposed Schedule for Approval and Implementation 11
2.6 Technology & Process Description 11
Availability of water its source, energy/ power requirement/ man power and
2.7 23
source should be given
3.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
3.1 Study Area 27
3.2 Study Period 27
3.3 Environmental Components 27
3.4 Methodology 28
3.5 Base line Data & Base Maps –Environmental Components 33
3.6 Land Environment 52
3.7 Ecology and Biodiversity Baseline Data 53
3.8 Social Environment 75
3.9 Traffic Density 94
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION
4.0
MEASURES
4.1 Environmental Impacts 96
4.2 Impacts of poject 97
4.3 Impact of Air environment 99
4.4 Impact On Water environment 105
4.5 Proposed Mitigative Measure 105
4.6 Impact of soil environment 107
4.7 Solid Waste management 108
Land use & Impact due to rehabilitation of a completed project & Mitigative
4.8 108
Measures
4.9 Impact on Biological Environment 109
4.10 Impact on Society/Public 110
4.11 Green belt development & conservation plan 113
4.12 Wild life Conservation plan 117
4.13 Impact on Local Transport infrastructure 123
5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)
5.1 Alternative Technologies 126
5.2 Alternative Sites 126
6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME
6.0 General 128
6.1 Technical Aspects 128
7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES
7.1 Public Consultation 134
7.2 Rehabilitation & Resettlement plan 134
Chapter No Description Page No.
7.3 Risk Assessment 134
7.4 Care & maintenance during temporary discontinue 150
7.5 Social Impact Assessment 151
7.6 Occupational Health & Safety 151
8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS
8.1 Socio – Economic Development 155
ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFITS ANALYSIS IF RECOMMENDED AT THE
9.0
SCOPING STAGE
Not applicable
10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
10.1 Objective 159
10.2 Environmental Management Plan construction phase 160
10.3 Environmental Management Plan operation phase 162
10.4 Corporate Environment policy 169
10.5 Infrastructure facilities 170
10.6 Reporting of non-conformance & Management review 171
11.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
LIST OF ANNEXURES
Annexure
Sl.No Particulars
No.
1 TOR Letters issued by MoEF&CC 1 & 1A
2 List of Survey Nos of Plant area and Kalingeri area 2
3 Forest Clearance Application Letter 3
4 Seasonal Environmental Baseline Data 4
5 Water Requirement application to Karnataka Niravari Nigama Ltd 5
6 NIOM EC letter 6
List of Figures
Sl.No Particulars Fig No
1 Iron Ore Processing Flow chart 2.1
2 Pellet Plant flow diagram 2.2
3 Material balance of Iron ore processing & Pelletization 2.2A
4 Rainfall Diagram 3.1
5 Windrose Diagram 3.2 A to B
6 Overview of core area and buffer area map 3.3
7 Schematic Diagram showing 10 km radius of buffer zone 3.4
divided in 4 Quartile
8 Schematic representation of quadrats of trees, shurbs, herbs 3.5
and grasses
9 Iunc Red List Categories and Criteria 3.6
10 Study area quartile I,II,II,IV 3.7
11 Sex Ration in Survey 2021 3.8
12 Percentage distribution of Broad Caste Groups Survey 2021 3.9
13 Percentage distribution of Broad Caste Groups Survey 2021 3.10
14 Percentage Literacy, Survey 2021 3.11
15 Labour-force Participation Percentage, Survey 2021 3.12
16 Isopleth for PM10 Distribution 4.1
17 Isopleth for PM2.5 Distribution 4.2
18 Isopleth for SO2 Distribution 4.3
19 Isopleth for NOx Distribution 4.4
20 Schematic representation of planting sapling/seeds based on 4.5
the its growth characteristics canopy growth and lifespan
21 The water Balance for the 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant 4.6
List of Drawings
Sl.No Particulars Drawing No
1 Location Map MES/DWG/LM/22-01
2 Plant Layout Plan MES/DWG/PLP/22-02
3 Map showing acquired area of Plant MES/DWG/PLP/22-02A
4 Map showing acquired area of tailing MES/DWG/PLP/22-02B
5 Key Plan MES/DWG/KP/22-03
6 High resolution Satellite Imagery of mine MES/DWG/HRSM/22-04
7 Drainage Map MES/DWG/DM/22-05
8 Geomorphology MES/DWG/GM/22-06
9 Soil Map MES/DWG/SM/22-07
10 Location of Air monitoring stations MES/DWG/AM/22-08
11 Location of Noise monitoring stations MES/DWG/NM/22-09
12 Location of Water sampling stations MES/DWG/WS/22-10
13 Location of Soil sampling stations MES/DWG/SS/22-11
14 Digital Elevation Map MES/DWG/DEM/22-12
15 Land Use & Land Cover Map MES/DWG/LU/22-13
16 Noramalised Difference Vegetation Index MES/DWG/NDVI/22-14
Map (NDVI)
17 Greenbelt plan MES/DWG/NDVI/22-15
Environmental Impact Assessment & Environment Management Of Iron
Ore Beneficiation Plant & Pellet Plant
Chapter-1
INTRODUCTION
Mineral Engineering Services & Ardra Consultancy Doc.No: MES/EIA/Sec-2(b)&3(a) /22-23 Page | 1
1. Introduction
1.1 Purpose of the Report
The growth of steel industry significantly contributes towards economic progress of the country.
However, any steel industry progress brings along with it a number of environmental problems.
Many of these problems can be avoided, if adequate environmental control considerations are
thought of during conceptual stage of the project. Once the industry is set up, it becomes very
costly to install pollution control equipment and implement other environmental control
measures, if the same are not considered in the conceptual stage.
Any industry exerts both positive and negative environmental impacts. Negative impacts cause
environmental degradation. It is the responsibility of Planners, Scientists and Environmentalists to
document these impacts separately so that these can be identified, quantified and attempts may be
made to minimize negative impacts and maximize the positive impacts for better development
with least environmental degradation.
MSPL Limited – Baldota Group is a veteran name in Mining, Processing of Minerals by using
advanced techniques of mineral beneficiation and has its operations in the state of Karnataka and
having vast customer base in South Region & across India. Baldota Group flagship company
MSPL in Karnataka has acquired captive Iron Ore Mine through E-auction at Sandur. Keeping in
view the better utilization of iron ore minerals available in Karnataka, Baldota group is actively
taking MSPL to new expansion mode with an objective to be a leading iron ore processing &
pellet manufacturer in Karnataka in close vicinity of mining zone.
The proposed project forms a green field iron ore processing & Pellet plant which will also yield
many socio - economic benefits by way of employment generation, opportunities for setting up of
ancillary units besides other service facilities benefiting the local population in the area.
The proposed project is a Green Field Project and there are no earlier existing industrial structures
or machineries installed, except a small building. Now, the Proponent had applied for
Environmental Clearance (EC) from MoEF&CC, New Delhi. In line with the provisions of
Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification 2006 (incl. its amendments from time to
time), the MoEF&CC had issued the Standard Terms of Reference (ToR) along with additional
Terms of Reference, for carrying-out EIA Studies and preparation of an EIA/EMP Report, for
onward submission to the EAC, for appraisal for issue of Environmental Clearance. Copies of the
ToR issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi, is enclosed as Annexure 1
To carry-out the EIA Studies and to prepare the EIA/ EMP (Environment Management Plan)
Reports, M/s MSPL Limited have engaged consultants viz. M/s. Mineral Engineering Services &
Ardra Consultancy Services. This EIA report contains information as per TOR and has been
prepared as per generic structure given in Appendix III of EIA notification 2006 by MOEF & CC,
Govt. of India.
1.2 Identification of project & project proponent

1.2.1 Project
MSPL Limited – Baldota Group is a veteran name in Mining, Processing of Minerals by using
advanced techniques of mineral beneficiation and has its operations in the state of Karnataka and
having vast customer base in South Region & across India. Baldota Group flagship company
MSPL in Karnataka has acquired captive Iron Ore Mine through E-auction at Sandur. Keeping in
view the better utilization of iron ore minerals available in Karnataka, Baldota group is actively
taking MSPL to new expansion model with an objective to be a leading iron ore processing &
pellet manufacturer in Karnataka in close vicinity of mining zone.
This setting up of the proposed plant is in line with the increased demand for quality Iron Ore and
Pellets in the domestic as well as in the world market.
The proposed project forms a green field iron ore processing & Pellet plant which will also yield
many socio - economic benefits by way of employment generation, opportunities for setting up of
ancillary units besides other service facilities benefiting the local population in the area .
1.2.2 Project Proponent & address

5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 Ha,
Integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha at Village Somalapura, Sandur
Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka of MSPL Limited. An additional area of 101.17 Ha is being
proposed for acquisition in Kalingeri village for tailing storage and other activities in future.
The project proponent is MSPL Limited
Registered office
Baldota Bhavan”
117, Maharshi Karve Road,
Mumbai 400020.
Maharashtra. India.
Tel.: (+91) (22) 22030989
Fax: (+9) (22) 24133766
Address for correspondence
Site Office
MSPL Limited, Baldota Enclave, Abheraj Baldota Road, Hosapete- 583203
Ph: +91 – 08394-232003,005
Fax : +91 – 08394-232333
Email: meda.venkataiah@mspllimited.com/ email@mspllimited.com
1.3 Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance to the country
region
1.3.1 Plant area
The project MSPL Limited Iron Ore Processing, Beneficiation & Pelletization plant, Integrated
with Downhill Pipe Conveyor is located in Village Somlapur, Sandur Taluk, Ballari District, and
Karnataka state. The project is located at the GPS co-ordinates of Latitude N 15° 01' 26.0" to
N 15o 01’ 57.3”and Longitutde E 76° 29' 47.10" to E 76o 30’ 12.0”.
According to this survey the Plant over an area of 26.44 Ha, Integrated with Downhill Pipe
Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha at Village Somalapura, and 101.17 Ha at Kalingeri village of
Sandur Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka of MSPL Limited
The Plant sketch, & map showing land acquired for plant & tailing is enclosed under
MES/DWG/PLP/22-02, MES/DWG/LDP/22-02A & MES/DWG/LDT/22-02B
1.3.2 Location of the project

The Plant is located at a distance of 9.5 km from Sandur town. It has approach road of about 1.2
km from Sandur- Kudligi on National Highway No. 40. The nearest railway station is
Toranagallu, which is on the Ballari - Hubli Broad Gauge line of Southwestern Railway located at
a distance of 35 km from the plant. Location map, Key plan & High Resolution satellite image of
Sandur taluk is furnished under MES/DWG/LM/22-01, MES/DWG/KP/22-03 &
MES/DWG/HRSM/22-04.
Table.No.1.0 Landuse breakup for Plnat area at somalapura village is as below.
Sl. NO Description of Unit Area in Ha
1 Iron Ore Processing 2.78
2 Pellet plant 1.88
3 Green zone 8.72
4 Water Storage 0.85
5 Raw material Yard 4.56
6 Office Space & Ancillary 5.95
7 Slime (tailing reject) storage & Management in Plant 1.70
Total Land 26.44
Iron ore processing Plant: Tailing cake will be generated after filter press from the proposed Iron ore
Processing Unit. MSPL is stocking the filter cake from tailings in an identified area of 20.33 Ha of
Kalingeri village at a distance of 6 Kms from the site shall be used for tailing disposal. The total land in
village Kalingeri, under the project is 101.17 Ha. Landuse breakup is given below.
Table.No.1.1 Landuse breakup for Plnat area at Kalingeri village
SI.No Description Area in Ha
1 Tailing dumping /stacking & Installation of filtration/dewatering unit. 20.33
2 Buildings, water complex & reservoir system. 8.09
3 Internal roads & drainage system. 7.58
4 Future expansion for ancillary facilities 31.78
5 Green belt development. 33.38
Total 101.17
Photo.1.0 Plant Area Photo 1.1 Tailing disposal area

1.3.3 Importance of the project to the country and or region.
Steel is essential to our society. The quantum of steel consumption is considered as an index of
industrial prosperity. For the production of steel, the basic raw material required is iron ore and
the state of Karnataka has the abundant quantity of iron ore fines, which almost contribute to 60-
70% of the total iron ore reserves of the state.
Good quality iron ore (more than 63% Fe Content) is being mined, for the past 20-25 years and
the availability of this, is becoming scarce. To make effective utilization of the lower grade iron
ores (i.e. with less than 60% Fe Content), which is abundantly available, it is necessary to process
the same from lower grade to higher grade, by using suitable and proven techniques.
Beneficiation is one such process, which converts the lower grade ore into a higher grade, thereby
increasing its market value and reducing the net quantity of waste to be disposed (into the
environment).
Establishment of Mineral (Iron Ore) Beneficiation Plants, will not only reduce the unwanted
waste dumps accumulated in Bellary-Hospet-Sandur Region, but also helps in creating value
addition to these waste dumps, in addition to generating some employment (direct and indirect) to the
locals in the region. Also, it generates some revenue to the Government, in the form of Royalty, GST
etc., and makes the good quality of ore available, to the steel plants in the region.
1.3.4 Statutory Clearances
All the documents/approvals/permissions including Forest Clearances, Ground water Clearance and
EIA-EMP shall be compatible with one another in terms of the area, production levels, waste
generation and its management, technology etc.
1.3.4.1 Forestry Clearance

Down Hill Pipe Conveyor of about 16.58 ha includes forest land of 13.98 Ha, hence Forest Clearance
is applied for 13.98 Ha and is at Stage-I Clearance - Annexure-3
1.3.4.2 Other Clearances

There are no National Parks and Sanctuaries, (existing as well as proposed) within 10 km of the Plant
area.
1.4 Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping carried out (As per Terms of Reference)
The present EIA and EMP report for M/s MSPL has been prepared based on the Terms of
Reference (TOR) issued by MoEF, New Delhi. Copy of the ToR is enclosed as Annexure-1. The
study covers zone of 10 km radius area with the proposed plant site as the center. The scope of
study broadly includes:
 To conduct literature review to collect data relevant to the study area;
 To undertake environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline environmental
status of the study area;
 To identify various existing pollution loads due to proposed industrial activities in the
ambient levels;
 To predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed iron ore/
beneficiation plant project;
 To evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area
by using scientifically developed and widely accepted Environmental Impact Assessment
Methodologies;
 To prepare an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for
improving the environmental quality and environmentally sustainable development;
 To identify critical environmental attributes that required to be monitored; and
 To prepare Disaster Management Plan (DMP)
Chapter-2
Project Description
2. Project Description
2.1 Type of project
Most of the steel production processes need iron ore with an iron content of 61-62% minimum.
The grade of the abundantly available ore in Bellary-Sandur-Hospet area, in the recent days
generally varies from 52% to 55%. Hence, the ore fines need to be upgraded. Also, the abundant
quantity +35 Fe Ore is available. The iron ore fines from Bellary- Sandur- Hospet region are
primarily from hematite deposit and contain mostly silica and alumina as prime gangue minerals.
The objective of the proposed project is to upgrade these low grades ores to 61-63.5% Fe by
suitable beneficiation technique. The concentrate product can be used for pellet making, for
further utilization in steel plants.
2.2 Need for the project
India's current steel producing capacity of is ~140 mtpa and the figure is anticipated to rise to 300
mtpa by 2030-31.India’s finished steel consumption grew at a CAGR of 5.2% during FY16-FY20
to reach 100 MT. India’s crude steel and finished steel production increased to 108.5 MT and
101.03 MT in FY20P, respectively. Between April 2020 and February 2021, India’s cumulative
production of finished steel at 85.60 MT. In April 2021, India’s finished steel consumption stood
at 6.78 MT. For the period April 2020 and February 2021, India’s cumulative production of crude
steel stood at 92.78 MT. Export and import of finished steel stood at 8.24 MT and 6.69 MT,
respectively, in FY20P.
According to the association, whose members represent 85% of the global steel production,
globally steel demand will grow by 5.8% in 2021 to reach 1,874 MT, after declining by 0.2% in
2020. In 2022, global steel demand will see further growth of 2.7% to reach 1,924.6 MT. China,
which recorded 9.1% growth in consumption in 2020, is expected to see 3% and 1% growth
respectively in 2021 and 2022.Thus there is a lot of demand for pellets for meeting the
requirements of steel production.
Demand-Supply Gap.
Domestic pellet prices were down 6% mom but still 175% yoy higher at INR16, 200MT in mid-
June 2021. Elevated price realizations have benefitted pellet producers who would earn healthy
margins over 1QFY22, especially those who are backward integrated with iron ore mines.
Furthermore, the gap between high grade and low-grade iron ore is likely to widen with the curb
on the use of low-grade ore in China, and increase in the utilization of high-grade ore such as
pellets thereby increasing the opportunity for pellet exporters. The strong international prices
continue to benefit domestic pellet exporters.
International pellet price was up 6% mom and 135% yoy to USD230/MT in mid-June 2021.
While Indian pellet exports have gradually reduced from the highs of May 2020 when exports
were at 2.01MT, it was still high at 1.34MT in May 2021.
The government has a fixed objective of increasing rural consumption of steel from the current
19.6 kg/per capita to 38 kg/per capita by 2030-31. As per Indian Steel Association (ISA), steel
demand will grow by 7.2% in 2019-20 and 2020-21.
Imports vs. Indigenous production.
India has emerged as the fourth largest miner and the third largest exporter of iron ore. India has
currently estimated iron ore resource of about 31000 Million tonnes. The Iron Ore & Steel
Derivatives Association (hereafter referred as IOSDA) expects India to strengthen its position as a
major ore producer. However, it foresees moderation in iron ore exports from India going
forward. With several steel projects coming on stream in the next one year, IOSDA anticipates a
steep increase in internal demand for iron ore. It also opines that India needs to invest in
infrastructure in order to develop the industry from a long-term perspective.
2.3 Location maps showing general location, specific location, and project boundary & project
site layout
2.3.1 Location
The project MSPL Limited Iron Ore Processing & Pelletization plant, Integrated with Downhill
Pipe Conveyor is located in Village Somlapur, Sandur Taluk, Ballari District, and Karnataka
state. The project is located at the GPS co-ordinates of Latitude N 15° 01'26.00" to N 15 o 01’
57.3”and Longitutde E 76° 29' 47.10" to E 76o 30’ 12.0” and the tailing dump yard at the GPS co-
ordinates of N 140 59’10.02” to 140 58’25.18” & E 76° 29' 21.96" to E 76° 30' 22.28"
The details of Survey no of the plant area and Tailing disposal area is given Annexure.No.2
The chosen site is close to the iron ore mines. It is at a distance 9.5 Km from Sandur Town and is
about 1.2 km from the State Highway road connecting Sandur - Kudligi towns. The site is
approachable by an all-weather road, capable of handling the required traffic. There are no
environmental sensitive places, like estuaries, defense installations, Airports, national/ state
highways, rivers, religious/ historic places, archaeological monuments, national parks, wildlife
sanctuaries, etc., within the proposed project site.
The proposed project site has been chosen, considering the following aspects:
 The proposed project site NA converted land for industrial purpose.
 Raw material i.e. low grade iron ore is available at capitive mines and also available at
competitive price around the proposed project site.
 Close proximity to the iron ore mines (5-8Km from the proposed industry).
 Availability of sufficient land to cater to all needs of the beneficiation plant.
 Availability of skilled man power
 Good connectivity to Kudligi-Sandur-Bellary road, for easy movement of raw materials,
products etc.
 YTG railway sliding is located nearer to the project site.
The chosen site is bounded with the features, as under:

North: Bellary-Sandur-Kudligi SH Road
East: Road leading to iron ore mines
South: Private Land
West: Private Land and Narihalla stream
The accessibility of the project site is as follows:
Nearest State Highway: Bellary–Sandur-Kudligi SH Road (1.2 km)
Nearest Habitation Yeshwanth Nagar (1.0 km)
Nearest major Railway Station: Toranagallu (35.0 km)
Max./ Min Temperature : 44oC/ 18oC
Relative Humidity (Max/ Min): 86% / 41%
Annual Rainfall: 840mm (Avg. 10 years)
Topography: Gradually Sloping from North to South
Table-2.0: Environmental Sensitivity
Sl. Description Name Aerial Distance
No. (in km)
1 National Park None -
2 Sanctuary / Tiger Reserve/ Kumaraswamy betta R. F. 0.68 km E
Elephant / any other Reserve Ramngarh R. F. 2.3 km N
Forest Somalapur R. F. 0.47 km SW
Tumbbaragudi R. F. 7.0 km S E
3 Biosphere Reserve None -
4 Habitat for Migratory Birds None -
5 Archaeological Sites Kumaraswamy Temple 6.8 km SEE
6 Water Bodies Narihalla Stream 0.32 km W
Ankamanuhallu Kere 3.7 km SE
Bandri Kere 6.4 km SW
7 Defence Installation None --
8 Near by Industries BKG M Sand &Aggregates 7.0 km
Zest Ferro Benification P 6.0 km
Ltd
9 Nearest airport JSW Airport 25 km

10 Nearest Railway Station Yeshwanthnagar 1.0 km
11 Nearest Highway Sandur-Kudligi SH road 1.2 km
2.4 Size or magnitude of operation
The proposal of the project is for 5.00MTPA for Iron Ore Processing and 3.0 MTPA for
Pelletization, Integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor. The 5 mtpa feed to processing plant
comprises of 1.5 mtpa beneficiation plant. The plant will be operated for 325 working days/yr.
The feed size for pellet plant will be -200# around 80-85% passing. The average product grade of
will be around 63.5% Fe.
2.5 Schedules for Approval & Project Implementation

Table.No.2.1
Sr.
Activity Timeline
No
Baseline Data Collection & Environment Impact
1 Oct-21 to Dec-21
Assessment (EIA) Study
2 Preparation of Draft EIA Report March-22
Submission of EIA Report to Karnataka Pollution
3 April-22
Control Board (KSPCB)
4 Public Hearing / Public Consultation May-22
Submission of Final EIA Report incorporating Public
5 June-22
Hearing/Consultation proceedings
6 Appraisal by Expert Appraisal Committee Sept -22
7 Grant of Environmental Clearance by MoEF&CC Oct-22
It is estaimated that construction of plant shall be completed before 3 years of commencement
of construction
The project cost for the proposed 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over
an area of 26.44 Ha, Integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha is estimated about
Rs 1136 Cr for plant including 160 Cr for down-hill conveyor.
The total estimated capital investments and the broad break up is summarized here under
TABLE NO.2.1A: COST BREAK UP FOR PROJECT
Sl. CAPEX Description Total
1a Land & Building Development 55 Cr
1b Statutory Lease & Infra charges 110 Cr
1c Upfront Fees (5 yr. Amortization) 71 Cr
1d Plant & Machinery 860 Cr
1e Furniture & Office Enabling 4 Cr
1 Total Pellet Plant & IOBP 1100 Cr
1 Total foe DHPC & Mining Eqp 160 Cr
2 Interest During Construction 56 Cr
3 Total CAPEX Deployment for the project 1316 Cr
2.6 Technology & Process Description

2.6.1 Raw Materials:
The major raw material required for the operation of the proposed mineral beneficiation plant, i.e.
low grade iron ore is available from the captive iron ore mine of M/s. MSPL i.e., Narasimha Iron
Ore Mine. The typical size characteristics of the sub grade iron ores available, in Bellary- Sandur-
Hospet Region, are given below:
Based on above flow sheets, the plant feed parameters for different units of the Iron Ore
Processing units considering the 325 annual operating days shall be as follows.
TABLE 2.2: IRON ORE PROCESSING PLANT - FEED PARAMETERS

Iron Ore
Sl. Parameter
processing Unit
A Feed
Total feed to the proposed plant (-10 mm) 5 MTPA
B Product
Concentrate from Process 4.1MTPA
C Reject
Tailing (Reject) 0.9 MTPA
Based on experience of utilization of Indian iron ore fines in the existing Indian pellet plants, the
expected major mechanical and metallurgical, properties of finished pellets are placed below.
TABLE NO 2.3 : PELLET MECHANICAL & METALLURGICAL PROPERTIES
Sl. Item Value
1 Size 8- 16 mm & +16 mm 95 % & 5 %
2 MPS of pellet 10.5 to 12.5 mm
3 Cold Crushing Strength 200 to 220 Kg / pellet
4 ASTM Tumbler index (+6.35 mm) 95 to 98 %
5 Abrasion Index (-0.5 mm) 2 to 5%
2.6.2 Main Plant Facilities:

The main plant facilities proposed to be established in the project include raw material receipt and
storage, weigh-bridge, crushing of the ore in the crusher(s) followed by screening, washing of
iron ore fines in a wet scrubber & wet screening, followed by grinding in a ball mill, hydro-
cyclones, Spiral Classifiers, thickeners, filter press and storage of concentrate/ tailings. To utilize
the tailings, it is proposed to convert them into bricks or will be sold to cement plants, in the
region.
2.6.2.1 DownHill Pipe Conveyor
MSPL Limited has been declared successful bidder in the auction conducted for Narasimha Iron
Ore Mines (erstwhile ML No 2148), subsequently Environmental Clearance for the mine lease
obtained by the previous lessee has been transferred in favour of M/s MSPL Limited for a
production capacity of 5.00 MTPA.
Iron Ore produced at mines head will be transported to plant located at Somlapur Village, Sandur
Taluk through the Down Hill Pipe Conveyor system. The proposed Downhill Conveyor system is
a single flight pipe conveyor utilizing a 1,200 mm wide steel cord belt formed into a 305 mm
nominal inside pipe diameter operating at a speed of 3.5 m/s with a designed capacity of 1500
TPH. The basic design of the conveyor is prepared by M/s Conveyor Dynamics Inc, USA. The
system is environment friendly and will avoid burning of fossil fuel.The downhill conveyor
alignment is both vertically and horizontally curved with an overall length of 4.3 Km and an
overall decline of 300 meters with a maximum inclination of 21° as it travels down the steep hill
from the mine towards plant.
The Downhill Conveyor is powered by two (2) 700 kW, 4 pole motors with variable frequency
drives for starting and stopping control with regenerative operation capability. One drive is
located near the head and the other is located at the tail station to reduce the overall tension
variations.
Proposed route alignment for DHPC
A self-powered maintenance trolley would provide ease of access for roller replacement all along
the conveyor. The upstream loading of material onto the Downhill Conveyor will be controlled by
a feeder / feeder conveyor to ensure the design capacity is not exceeded. The discharge pulley has
been located approximately 20 meters above the existing ground level to accommodate the
required height of a diverter chute to divert excess material.
Any conveyor utility to reach to proposed plant must be through the forest area hence the best
alignment for the conveyor belt from captive mine to the proposed plant location passing through
the forest is selected based on the extensive survey which will affect negligible area and diversion
proposal for the 13.98 Ha forest land has been submitted under Forest Conservation Act, 1980 by
the company.
2.6.2.2 Iron Ore Processing Plant
Iron Ore processing unit shall receive the iron ore fines from MSPL captive mines through a
downhill conveyor as well as additional nearby mines & subjected to dry & wet processing.
Iron Ore Processing Design Parameters - Input & Output:
I. The feed for the proposed plant shall be sourced from the MSPL captive mines and
other adjacent mines working in the region. The feed size shall be -10 mm.
II. Iron ore feed thus received will be subjected to screening, grinding and beneficiation
and the final product will be a feed to the pellet plant.
III. Processing equipment will consist of grinding mills, Magnetic separators, Reverse
Flotation etc.
IV. For thickening and water recovery purposes concentrate thickener shall be provided.
V. Tailings shall be pumped through a pipeline to Kalingeri Plot area for storage after
filteration and the water recovered shall pumped back to the plant for the reuse.
VI. Upgraded IOF concentrate slurry shall be pumped to the receiving slurry storage tank
of pellet plant.
VII. The operating regime of Iron Ore Processing unit shall be 325 days per year.
FIG.2.1 IRON ORE PROCESSING BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM
Proposed Quality
Based on the feed quality and proposed flow sheet the quality of the feed and product is shown in
the material balance flow sheet.
Proposed Water Quantity

Process water requirement and recovery from the Iron Ore Processing unit, the total water
requirement, recovery and make up water requirement of proposed Iron Ore Processing unit is
shown below.
TABLE 2.4: IRON ORE PROCESSING PLANT - WATER REQUIREMENT
Parameter Make-up (KLD)

Total 2491
The reject of the Iron Ore Processing unit shall be dumped at the proposed area allocated for
dumping at 75 % solid. The moisture % in the tails filter cake shall be about 25 % w/w. The iron
ore concentrate at ~65 % solid shall be pumped to the proposed filtration unit and about ~25 %
water is reclaimed from filtration and pumped back to the Iron Ore Processing unit for reutilizing
in the process circuit.
2.6.2.3 Pellet Plant
The pellet plant has been envisaged within the same premises to produce Iron ore pellets by
utilizing the iron ore concentrate. The finished pellets shall be sold in the domestic/international
market
Induration system (Straight/Grate Kiln Process) process has been envisaged considering the
operating experience of major existing pellet plants in India with Hematite as input iron ore feed.
The major technology units are as follows
Proportioning and Additives system and mixing unit
Feed & Handling: Coke breeze/coal, limestone, dolomite & bentonite.
Balling unit
Induration system (Straight/Grate Kiln Process)
Pellet screening
Fuel handling and utilizing system
Belt conveyors, junction houses, inter-connecting & galleries.
Apart from the above major units, all auxiliary facilities like water supply system, compressed
air, fuel, ventilation & air-conditioning, process & plant dedusting, repair shop, non-factory
buildings, electrics, instrumentation, automation and telecommunication facilities etc. have
also been envisaged. Adequate hoisting facilities have been provided in all the units for ease of
maintenance and operation.
The process of Iron Ore Pelletization involves following steps:
Formation of green balls (rolling of moistened ground ore mixed with additives)
Drying, pre-heating, heating and cooling of green balls in Induration system (Straight/Grate Kiln
Process).
Cooled Indurated balls called pellets. Pellet plant process flow diagram is shown in Fig No. 2.2
FIG 2.2. PELLET PLANT PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
Pellet Design Parameters - Input & Output

The tentative chemical composition of raw materials for pellet production is as follows.
TABLE NO 2.5 : QUALITY OF RAW MATERIAL FEED TO PELLET
Sl. Raw Material Fe2O3 SiO2 Al2O3 CaO MgO LOI Other Other
1 Iron Ore Fines 63.5
FSI 32
Max.
2 Bentonite 50 20 2 - 14 & PWA
15%
650
3 Lime stone - - 4 45 3 41 - -
4 Dolomite - 7 4 28 16 42 - -
GCV
Cao MgO LOI S% FC % Ash % VM
Kcal/Kg
Max.
5 Coke Breeze / Coal - - - <0.5 85 4% 7400
8%
Pellet Process Description
Proportioning and additives feeding system and mixing unit. There will be allocated bins (for
filter cake and for limestone, bentonite & ESP dust) in proportioning building. Belt weigh,
feeders below filter cake bins and loss-in-weigh feeders below other bins are provided for
drawing requisite quantity of materials on one common conveyor leading to high intensity
mixer of rated capacity . Required quantity of water is added to the mixer for thorough mixing.
The mixed material from mixer is taken to balling building by a conveyor located on the ground
below mixer.
Feeding & Handling
From storage yards, coke breeze, limestone, dolomite, if required, are transported through ground
hoppers to the respective storage bins in the coarse additives grinding unit. The pre-requisite
quantity of raw materials will be extracted from respective bins through vibro-feeders and fed to
two vertical roller mills through conveyors for grinding. From grinding unit, ground additives
shall be stored in ground additives storage bins in the Mixing Building.
Balling unit
Green pellets formation will be carried out in discs. Green pellets from discs will be screened
through roller screen and required good sized green pellets shall collected on belt and transported
to indurating unit through swing belt and wide belt system.
2.6.2.4 Induration system
The Induration system (Straight/Grate Kiln Process), the screened green balls from the balling
discs shall be fed to travelling grate consisting of a horizontal furnace divided in zones through
which a grate moves slowly through each zone, exposing the pellet bed to a progressive increase
in temperature. The temperature is controlled in each zone to maintain the appropriate firing
curve. After pre-heating in TG the pellets will move into the pre heating zone. where the pre-
heated pellets will further exposed to more temperature uniformly and final hot pellet will move
into the cooling zone.
In this cooling zone, the cold air is passed through the bed of hot pellets and taken away the heat
from hot pellets. The hot air will be utilized in TG & RK to improve the energy efficiency in the
process. The final cooled pellets shall be discharged on a conveyor belt and sent for screening.
Pellet Screening
The cooled Pellets shall be carried to pellet screening unit by belt conveyor and fed to
screen with designed aperture. Required product grade pellet shall be then conveyed either to
pellet stock pile or to the product storage for onward transportation via railway wagon / dumpers.
The undersize pellet fines will be conveyed to one stock pile near screening unit for further reuse
insystem.
Fig. No.2.3 MATERIAL BALANCE FLOW SHEET IRON ORE PROCESSING & PELLET
PLANT
2.6.2.4 Fuel handling and Utlizing system

The heat requirement for the induration system shall be achieved through the Pulverized Coal
Injection (PCI) system and Fuel pumping and burner unit system.
2.6.2.5 Belt conveyors, junction houses & inter-connecting galleries:
Various belt conveyors, interconnecting structural galleries and junction houses shall be
envisaged as per the technological layout of pellet plant.
2.6.2.6 Stack Inventory
Stack Inventory details.
Flue Max
Stack Dia
Stack Height, gas Velocity Flue Gas Qty
Stack Attached To Qty
No m Temp. Bottom Top in Stack m3/sec
C (m) (m) m/s
1 Pellet Plant ESP 1 100 120 10.5 5 14.2 1260000 Nm3/h
Lime Stone & Coal
2 1 30 50 3.5 2 18 60000 Nm3/h
Grinding Bag Filter
Bentonite Grinding Bag
3 1 30 50 3.5 2 18 50000 Nm3/h
Filter
Raw Material Storage
4 1 30 Ambient 3.5 2.5 18 80000 Nm3/h
Bins Dedusting
Machine Discharge
5 Scruber / PCI mill for 1 30 50 3.5 2 18 210000 Nm3/h
Kiln (If applicable)
Plant Dedusting Bag
6 1 40 50 3.5 2 18 130000 Nm3/h
filter
2.6.2.8 Raw material required along with estimated quantity, likely source, marketing area of
final product/s, Mode of transport of raw Material and Finished Product.
The MSPL mines will be one of the sources of raw material to the proposed plant. The product of
-10 mm fines from the mines shall be transported through down hill pipeline conveyor (DHPC).
Road to the proposed site. Iron Ore processing unit has been envisaged to produce – 200 mesh
around 80-85% passing.
Reject of the Iron Ore Processing unit shall be transported in slurry form through pipeline and
filtered and the tailing filtered cake stockpiled for further use.
Development of the process flow sheet is based on, the operating experience of the MSPL
Group in the similar type of iron ore feed material and inputs from Principal Technology
Provider.
Proposed Quality
Based on the proposed flow sheet the quality of the feed and product shall be taken up
Iron ore fines /Concentrate
The iron ore concentrate product (-200 mesh) upto 80-85 % of Iron Ore Processing unit shall be
the prime source.
Additives
Limestone, dolomite, if required, bentonite and coke breeze shall be brought through trucks and
unloaded in their dedicated covered storage yards. Limestone/dolomite and coke breeze shall be
reclaimed through pay loaders from the covered storage yard and conveyed to respective bins,
mixed material grinding building through ground hopper (two numbers), conveyors and Junction
Houses. One vibro-feeder shall be provided below each ground hopper.
Finished Pellet
Finished pellet shall be received and stacked in open yard
Limestone
Limestone quarries located in near-by areas like lokapur will be potential source.
Coke Breeze / Coal
Coke breeze sourced from the nearest place of proposed site with the following proximity
analysis (Dry basis) shall be used.
 Ash :8%
 Volatile matter : 4%
 Fixed carbon : 85 %
Dolomite
Dolomite quarries of Lokapur region has specs as given below:
 Cao 28 % - 30 %
 MgO 16 % - 21 %
 Si02 7 % (Max)
Fuel for Firing
 LSHS will be used for firing in Induration system (Straight/Grate Kiln Process) and the
driers or hot gas generators. Also provision of associated gas / natural gas /coal gas for
firing is envisaged in the future, when the same is available in the region.
 PCI coal (imported) shall be used in rotary kiln (Ash:<10%, VM: 18% - 22%, FC:70%
Min)
Material Handling Facilities
Raw material handling system shall be envisaged to receive raw materials by means of conveyor
& road, transportation of the same to the processing plants through belt conveyor system
& transportation of products through road / wagon.
Quality of Raw Material & Finished Pellets
The tentative chemical composition of raw materials for pellet production is as follows.
TABLE NO 2.6 : QUALITY OF RAW MATERIAL FEED TO PELLET

SiO2 Al2O3 CaO MgO LOI Other Other
Sl. Raw Material Fe(%)
(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
1 Iron Ore Fines 63.5
FSI 32
Max. &
3 Bentonite 50 20 2 - 14
15% PWA
650
3 Lime stone - - 4 45 3 41 - -
4 Dolomite - 7 4 28 16 42 - -
GCV
Cao MgO LOI S% FC % Ash % VM
Kcal/Kg
Coke Breeze / Max.
5 - - - <0.5 85 4% 7400
Coal 8%
Based on the raw material analyses, the calculated chemical composition of pellet is furnished
below.
TABLE NO 2.7: CONSTITUENTS & QUALITY OF PELLET
Constituents Value (%)
Fe 63.5%
SiO2 5% to 8%
Al2O3 1.5 to 2.5%
CaO 0.6 to 0.8%
MgO 0.2 to 0.3%
Basicity 0.1 to 0.14
Quality of feed unit
Based on experience of utilization of Indian iron ore fines in the existing Indian pellet plants, the
expected major mechanical and metallurgical, properties of finished pellets are placed below.
TABLE NO 2.8 : PELLET MECHANICAL & METALLURGICAL PROPERTIES
Sl. Item Value

1 Size 8- 16 mm & +16 mm 95 % & 5 %
2 MPS of pellet 10.5 to 12.5 mm
3 Cold Crushing Strength 200 to 220 Kg / pellet
4 ASTM Tumbler index (+6.35 mm) 95 to 98 %
5 Abrasion Index (-0.5 mm) 2 to 5%
Specific Consumption of Raw Materials and Services expected quality of Iron Ore Processing
unit. The specific consumption of raw materials, fuel, power, water and other services estimated
for the proposed pellet plant is furnished below.
TABLE NO.2.9: PELLET PLANT - RAW MATERIAL

Qty per Annum Source of Raw materials Distance to the
Sl. Raw Material
in MTPA Plant in Km
3.36 MTPA NIOM Captive & Other Through DHPC
1 Iron ore fines
Mines & By road.
2 Bentonite 36000 TPA Gujarat 2000 Km
24000 TPA Imported from Australia / -
3 Coke breeze
Russia
4 Limestone 24000 TPA Lokapur, Karnataka 350km
5 Dolomite 24000 TPA Lokapur, Karnataka 150 km
TABLE NO.2.10 : PELLET PLANT & IRON ORE PROCESSING UNIT - SERVICE
CONSUMPTIONS / TON OF PELLET
Sl. Raw Material Per ton
1 Make up Water 0.28 M3
2 Electric Power 78 KWH
2.2.6.8 Resource optimization/ recycling and reuse envisaged in the project, if any, should be
briefly outlined.
Iron Ore Utilization

The Beneficiation Plant is designed to upgrade the available low grade iron ore fines.
Tailing Utilization
Tailings will be stored at Kalingeri village about 6 Kms from within the project site. It is
proposed to dispose the tailings to the nearby Cement Industries, Brick, Tiles, Paver
Manufactures, the water recovered is recirculated in the plant.
Waste generated
The type of waste that would be generated due to operation and maintenance of the Beneficiation
Plant include 1. Tailings, 2. Hazardous waste 3. Fly ash generated in the pellet plant shall be
utilized back in the process.
Tailing generated from Beneficiation Plant
The tailing solids generated from the Beneficiation Plant will be about 100-150 tonnes/hr
depending on the quality of Iron ore.
Tailing Management
Tailings will be stored at Kalingeri. It is proposed to dispose the tailings to the nearby Cement
Industries, Brick, Tiles, Paver Manufactures, The water recovered is recirculate in the plant.
Hazardous Wastes
Used oil and grease wastes will be generated at a maximum of about 25 KL per annum from
Pump area, Workshop, DG room, etc., The generated used oil will be stored in leak proof
containers under covered shed followed by its disposal to the Authorized Recycler.
The waste/residue containing oil will be disposed to the Authorized Recycler by KSPCB.
Water Utilization
A comprehensive water supply scheme for supplying water to various units of Iron ore
processing unit, pellet plant complex and other service facilities have been envisaged. The total
fresh water requirement from the source for the proposed plant complex has been estimated as
2491 KLD and which will be met by existing borewells in the area and Rain water harvesting
pond and also envisaged to be sourced from Tungabhadra Dam (TB Dam). The permission for
water drawing from Tungabadra River is under process by the Department of Karanatka Niravari
Nigam Limited ( Govt of Karanataka) . A letter has been issued accordingly by them which is
enclosed vide Annexure No-5. The application is in process until then as per the ToR condition
the Project Proponent will be utilizing water from existing bore wells. First two years the
extraction will be about 480 KLD during construction process and third year during operation it
will be 2491 KLD. The hydrogeological study for the ground water extraction is carried out.
2.7 Availability of water its source, energy/ power requirement and source should be given.
2.7.1 Water Requirement
A comprehensive water supply scheme for supplying water to various units of Iron ore processing
unit, pellet plant complex and other service facilities has been envisaged. The total freshwater
requirement from the source for the proposed plant complex has been estimated as 103.79 m3/hr.
TABLE 2.11 WATER REQUIREMENT BREAK-UP FOR OPERATION
Make up requirement
Sl. Description
m3/ hr
1 Iron Ore Processing Plant 45.21
2 Pellet Plant 44.33
3 Drinking water & Utility 14.25
Total Water Requirement 103.79
The total water requirement will be 2491 KLD which is applied to Karnataka Niravari Nigam Ltd
for withdrawl from Tungabhadra dam.
TABLE 2.12 WATER REQUIREMENT BREAK-UP During construction period
Make up
Sl. Description
requirement KLD
1 For Construction activities 360
2 Dust Suppression & Green belt 90
3 Drinking water & Domestic 30
Total Water Requirement 480
The total water requirement will be 480 KLD which will be drawn from bore wells.
Table.No. 2.13 Water use during construction & operation phase of first three years
Phase Requirement Phasing of water source
1st Year 360 KLD Construction activity Existing Ground Water
120 KLD Domestic use, Green belt & Existing Ground Water
Dust suppression
480 KLD - Total
2nd Year 360 KLD Construction activity Existing Ground Water
120 KLD Domestic use, Green belt & Existing Ground Water
Dust suppression
480 KLD - Total
3rd Year 1085 KLD Iron Ore Processing Plant Existing bore wells
1063 KLD Pellet Plant Existing bore wells
342 KLD - Domestic use, Green belt & Existing bore wells
Dust suppression
2491 KLD-Total
2.7.2 Power Requirment

The power requirement of ~40 MW for the proposed plant has been envisaged to be made
available from Kudligi 220 KV grid substation of State Electricity Board of Karnataka. This
project is also envisaged / being Planned to use solar power 100 MW & or Wind Power 60 MW
at an investment of 350 Cr &/or 410 Cr Appx, This will make the project to a Green
Manufacturing unit.
2.7.3 Fuel Requirement
PCI coal (imported) shall be used in rotary kiln (Ash:<10%, VM: 18% - 22%, FC:70% Min)
Furnace Oil: GCV-10000 ~10300 Kcal/ KG, Density -0.96 gm/ml, Ash 0.1 Max, Sulphur 2.8%
Max., Water 1% Max.
Raw Material CaO MgO LOI Other Other
Coke Breeze / Coal <0.5 85 Max. 4% 7400
8%
The requirement of Furance oil per day 60,000Kg/ Day

2.7.4 Manpower Requirement
The organizational structure that would be required for the Plant operations has been given due
consideration. The manpower requirement has been planned keeping in view the following:
• Smooth & efficient running of the plant with optimum manpower.
• Capacity utilization with optimum energy consumption.
• Effective coordination
• Rational distribution of responsibilities
The organizational development would be started from the project phase itself those
involved with the project would also be trained for Operations.
It is estimated that the total employment generation due to the proposed project will be 752 in
numbers.
A summary of the manpower requirement for the proposed project is as given below:
Table No. 2.14 Manpower Requirement during operation
Sl. Category Total
1 Senior Executive 6
2 Executives 20
3 Discipline Managers 40
4 Associate Staff 60
5 Supervisors 60
6 Skilled manning 130
7 Semiskilled Manning 130
8 Unskilled Manning 306
Total Direct
752
employment
Indirect employment 900
Total 1652
Employment during construction process shall be 1500 direct and indirect
Chapter-3
Description of the
Environment
3. Description of the Environment

3.1 Study Area
The seasonal environmental baseline data generated during OCT’21 to Dec’21 is presented under
Annexure No.4
The study area of 10 km radius (from the boundary of plant and tailing area) has been considered
for assessing the baseline environmental status. Plant & tailing Area is the Core Zone and the 10
km radius area around the Plant Area is the Buffer Zone. The study area of 10 km radius of the
Plant & Tailing area falls in Survey of India-D43 E8, D43 E12, D43 K5 & D43 K9
3.2 STUDY PERIOD
The base line data have been collected for various environmental components from Oct’21 to
Dec’21 which is the post monsoon season.
3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS:
Considering the Environmental setting of the project, project activities and their interaction, and
environmental regulations & standards, the following Environmental Attributes have been
included in the EIA Study, as a part of baseline data.
 Site Specific Micrometeorological Data (hourly readings from core zone) on wind speed
& direction (wind roses), temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure. There was no rainfall
during monitoring period.
 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring at 12 Stations on 24-hourly basis, continuously for 2
days in a week for 4 weeks in a month during the season for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, for
Heavy Metals analysis in Particulates, SO2, NO2, CO, Ozone, Benzene and Benzo(a)pyrene
 Noise Level Measurements at 12 stations for Leq, Lday and Lnight values once in the
season
 Water Quality Monitoring by grab sampling once in a season
 Surface Waters (8 locations)
 Ground Waters (9 Locations)
 Soil Quality Monitoring at 11 locations once in the study period for
 Textural & Physical Parameters
 Nutrients
 Land use pattern based on Satellite Imagery
 Biotic Attributes or
 Flora-Core & Buffer Zones
 Fauna-Core & Buffer Zones
 Socio-Economic Profile, based on 2011-Census and Survey 2021 for
 Total Population, Household Size , Age
 Gender Composition
 S.C & S.T
 Literacy Level
 Occupational Structure
3.4 METHODOLOGY
The methodologies followed are detailed below.
3.4.1 MICROMETEOROLOGY
As a part of the study, the micrometeorology and microclimatic parameters have been recorded
by installing a Weather Monitoring Station. The data on wind Speed, wind direction, ambient
temperature, relative humidity, have been recorded at hourly intervals along with rainfall during
the monitoring period.
3.4.2 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
The study area represents the Industrial, Residential, Rural and Other Areas. Calibrated Fine
Particulate Samplers have been used for monitoring of PM2.5. Calibrated Respirable Dust
Samplers have been used for monitoring of PM10. Gaseous samples have been collected by
integrated gas sampling assembly.
Table 3.1 : Parameters for Air Monitoring
Monitored parameters & duration Method used
PM10, PM2.5 Gravimetric Sampling using Respirable Dust Sampler
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) Modified West & Gaeke Method
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) Jacob & Hoechhiesher Method
Lead AAS /ICP Method after sampling on EPM 2000 or
equivalent filter Paper
Ammonia Indo Phenol blue method
Air Quality
Benzene Adsorption & desorption followed by GC analysis
Data Nickel AAS /ICP Method after sampling on EPM 2000 or
Arsenic AAS /ICP Method after sampling on EPM 2000 or
Benzo(a)pyrene Solvent extraction followed by HPLC/GC analysis
24 hourly monitoring twice a week for 4 weeks per month for each season of 3 months
CO Non dispersive Infrared (NDIR) , Spectroscopy
Air Quality
Ozone Chemical method
Data
Hourly Monitoring: twice a week for 4 weeks per month for one season of 3 months
3.4.3 NOISE LEVELS
Noise levels have been monitored at all selected locations during day time as well as night time in
a day. The sound level meters are used in accordance with IS: 9979 and IEC 651 standards for
noise survey. The basic unit of measurement is A-weighted sound level, the most widely used
scale. The measurements are taken in the fast mode and are sampled to yield statistical
information such as Leq (equivalent noise level).
3.4.4 DRAINAGE PATTERN
The district falls in Krishna basin. The Tungabhadra perennial river forms major drainage system
in Bellary district. Tungabhadra enters the district at Kuruvatti village in Hadagali taluk and
forms the boundary for nearly 300 kms and drains from south western part, than flows north east
to east west and drains out of the district. The drainage in the district is dendritic to sub-dendritic
in nature. Dense drainage is noticed in the eastern and western part of the district and sparse
drainage is noticed in the central part.
The drainage analysis in Hagari, Garanihalla, Chinnahagari and Vedavathy river/stream indicates
that the length of the streams ranged 96 to 172 sq.kms., The drainage area ranged from 3522 to
7329 sq.kms, falls in 5th and 6th order stream, drainage density ranged from 0.72 to 1.70 L/AU
km/km2 and average slope ranged from 1.65 to 1.78 DL/AU.
No major rivers pass through the Plant area, the terrain is hilly, sloping towards west and east.
There are no major nallahs, streams of buffer area. The highest and lowest elevation in the Plant
area 644m to 600m AMSL and settling pond area elevation is 696 to 644m AMSL. The total
study area elevation of 10km radius is between RL 1103 and 525 m AMSL respectively.
The drainage pattern of buffer zone area is dendritic to sub-dendritic in nature. The two seasonal
nallahs from plant area and Kalingeri area from flow from eastern to western side of the area
towards Narihalla dam. The surface and ground waters have been collected during the survey
period i.e., post monsoon season 2021 and analysed for physico-chemical and bacteriological
parameters. Samples for chemical analysis have been collected as per IS: 2488. Sterilized bottles
have been used for collection of water samples for bacteriological analysis.The drainage map is
shown vide MES/DWG/DP/22-05
Table 3.2 : Standard/Method followed for Analysis of Water Parameters
Sl.No. Parameter Unit Reference
1 Taste & Odour As perceived IS:3025 (5)
2 pH IS:3025 (11)
3 Colour Hazen units IS:3025(4)
4 Turbidity NTU IS:3025 (10)
5 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l IS:3025 (16)
6 Total Hardness mg/l IS:3025(21)
7 Iron (as Fe) mg/l IS:3025 (53)
8 Chlorides (as CI) mg/l IS:3025(32)
9 Residual Chlorine mg/l IS:3025(26)
10 Calcium (as Ca) mg/l IS:3025(40)
11 Magnesium (as Mg) mg/l IS:3025(46)
12 Alkalinity (as CaCO3 ) mg/l IS:3025(23)
13 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l IS:3025(38)
14 Sulphale (as SO4) mg/l IS:3025(24)
15 Fluoride (as F) mg/l IS:3025 (60)
16 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l IS:3025(34)
17 Cyanide (as CN) mg/l IS:3025(27)
18 Pesticides mg/l APHA 22nd ED
19 Phenols (as C6H5OH) mg/l IS:3025(43)
20 Manganese (as Mn) mg/l IS:3025 (59)
21 Chromium (as Cr) mg/l IS:3025 (52)
22 Copper (as Cu) mg/l IS:3025(42)
23 Selenium (as Se) mg/l IS:3025 (56)
24 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l IS:3025 (41)
25 Arsenic (as As) mg/l IS:3025(37)
26 Boron (as B) mg/l IS:3025(57)
27 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l IS:3025(48)
28 Lead (as Pb) mg/l IS:3025(47)
29 Zinc (as Zn) mg/l IS:3025(49)
30 Percent sodium mg/l APHA 22nd ED
31 BOD3 days @ 27 °c mg/l IS:3025(44)
32 COD mg/l IS:3025 (58)
33 Oil & Grease mg/l IS:3025(39)
34 Total Coliform per 100 ml -- IS:15185:2016
35 E.Coli per 100 ml -- IS:15185:2016
3.4.5 Geology
The area is part of the Karnataka cratonic nuclei that exposes the oldest rocks of Archaean age
(4000 to 2.500 Ma (million years)). The Greenstone belts or schist belts that are metamorphosed
under varying grade occur as linear enclaves within grey gneissic complex. These enclaves
represent volcano-sedimentary sequences that were formed in shallow seas that were existed
during the Precambrian. They are linear belts elongated in N-S and NNW-SSE directions and
have been classified into three groups as 1) Ancient Supracrustals, 2) Auriferous Schist Belts and
3) Younger Schist Belts based on the differences in age, metamorphism and mineralisation. The
Ancient Supracrustals are the oldest (>3000 Ma) and are metamorphosed under high grade
ranging from amphibolite to granulite facies. Occurrences of these schist belts are found in the
southern part of the state. Sargur, Krishnarajpet, Holenarasipur, Hadnur, Nuggihalli, Kalyadi,
Nagamangala, Ghattihosalli, Kunigal, Gundulupet and Gurguntabelts. The mineralisations include
Chromium, titanium, vanadium and tungsten. The Auriferous Schist belts have formed during the
time interval 3000 to 2500 Ma and hosts the valuable gold deposits. They include the Kolar and
Hutti-Maski, Pennar-Hagari, Mangalur, Hungud-Kushtagi and Raichur-Deodurg schist belts.
They are confined to the eastern part of the state separated from the Younger schist belts by the
Closepet granite which forms a linear intrusion.
The younger schist belts also known as Dharwar type schist belts host bulk of the iron ore
deposits and include the Shimoga, Bhababudan, Kudremukh, Chitradurga and Sandur schist belts.
While volcanic rocks predominate in the other group of schist belts, bulk of the younger schist
belt are composed of metamorphosed sedimentary rocks that were deposited in shallow basins.
The volcano-sedimentary sequence is deposited over the tonalitic-trondhjemitic gneisses that
intruded the terrain after the formation of the Ancient Supracrustals and Auriferous Greenstone
belts. The tonalitic – trondhjemitic gneisses hence form the basement for the Younger Greenstone
Belts. Intrusion of granites called as Closepet granite is an important event in the evolution of the
Dharwar craton and forms a linear intrusion extending in N-S direction for nearly 500 km with an
average width of 20 km almost parallel to the alignment of the greenstone belts located in the
region. The age of the granite is inferred by radiometric dating methods as 2,528 ± 5 Ma.
The Sandur Schist Belt:
The Sandur schist belt is located in the eastern margin of the area and it contains valuable iron
and manganese deposits and has transformed the region into an industrial belt. The Sandur schist
belt is the smallest of the Younger Greenstone belts covering an area of 960 sq. km.
Its structure is highly disturbed by the regional tectonics and the intrusion of the Closepet granite
and has been squeezed out into two parts. The eastern part known as Copper Mountain Range
volumetrically is dominated by mafic volcanic material and on the other hand the western part
Sandur Belt contains metasedimentary rocks in abundance .
The Meta sedimentary rocks include basal conglomerates, quartzites, manganiferous graywake,
phyllite and numerous bands of banded magnetite and haematite quartzites. The basin is known
for its richness in both iron and manganese ores.
The important deposits of iron ore in Sandur Belt are located in Donimalai, Devadari,
Kumaraswamy and Ramadurg ranges with proved reserves of over 500 million tonnes with more
than 62% Fe.
The area investigated comprise the rocks of the Sandur Schish belt forming the linear hill ranges
located in the eastern part of the area. The region west of the hill ranges form the basement
gneisses and the younger granites belonging to the Closepet granite intrusion are found forming
isolated hillocks and boulder outcrops in the southern part of the area
3.4.5.1 GEOMORPHOLOGY
Most of the area is characterised by denudational plateaus; pediment, pediplain and flood plain
form the other important geomorphological features which dominate the eastern parts of the
district. The residual and structurally controlled hill forms linear NNW-SSE trending ridges
occurring intermittently.The structural hills form asymmetric ridges are marked with conspicuous
trellis and parallel type of drainage pattern whereas the denudational plateaus exhibits
dendritic drainage characteristic of granites and gneisses. The regional geomorphologic
map of Bellary district is given vide MES/DWG/GM/22-06.
3.4.5.2 Hydrogeology
Groundwater occurs in Achaean crystalline province mostly under unconfined to semi confined
conditions. The rock units do not have the primary porosity. The occurrence and movement of
groundwater is through secondary porosity developed from the erosional and structural deformity
undergone by the rocks. The main source of recharge is precipitation and by return flow from
applied irrigation in the plain area and percolation of rainfall runoff in plateau area. The rocks
have undergone different degree of weathering with fissures and fractures. The movement of
groundwater is through the weathered zone extending up to 12 m. in phreatic aquifers. The
productivity of the aquifers generally depends on the precipitation in general and weathered zone,
fissures and fractures in particular.
Hydrogeological surveys carried out in Sandur Taluk by the Central Ground Water Board indicate
the fluctuation of water table varied between 0.52 m to 0.82 m per annum. The fluctuations are
less near the drainage system and topographic lows and higher in the topographic highs and hilly
areas.Change in ground water scenario over a decade in Sandur Taluk show rise in water level
from 0.30 to 3.90 m / year in respect of three National Hydrograph Stations (NHS) while decline
is not observed in any of the three hydrograph stations.
This clearly indicates ground water development is very low when compared with the recharge in
the area. The long-term average annual fluctuation is arrived at 2.4 m / annum.
Aquifer description
The aquifer exposed in the area are granites and gneisses of Archaean. Ground water occurs in
weathered mantle at shallow depths and fractures at depth. Sandur taluk in particular is still seen
shallow aquifer prevailing in the form of dug wells, mostly in use for agriculture.
Bore wells in the area are penetrated up to a depth of 200 m bgl, where the fracture thickness will
be in the range of 2 to 5 m.
3.4.6 Land use
Present status of Land-Use Land-Cover within in 10 km radius of the proposed area is shown in
MES/DWG/LU/22-13. Detailed classification of land use is given in Table 3.4 .
The landuse classification, in the core zone, as well as the 10km radius (buffer zone) of the
proposed mineral beneficiation plant, are as under:
Table 3.3 : Landuse Details of Buffer zone
Land use Pattern in 10 Km radius area arround the Project Area
and Ka
Sl.No Type Area in Ha %
1 Dense Forest 7031 15.16
2 Water Bodies 695 1.50
3 Mining Area 1268 2.73
4 Settlements 2416 5.21
5 Agricultural Land 11933 25.72
6 Scrub Forest 22842 49.24
Stone Quarry and Solar
7 204.6 0.44
pannels
Total 46390 100.00
3.4.7 Soil Methodology:
The soils of the district are derived from Granites, Gneisses and Schistose rocks. The Sandy loam
soil mixed with black and grey soil occurs along the stream beds. These are originated from
gneisses and granites. They are permeable and mildly alkaline in nature. The thickness of the soil
varies from 0.2 to 1.00m.
The Red soil are the major type of soil in the district, found mainly at elevated places especially at
fringes of hills due to decomposition of rocks and surrounding granitic and gneissic hills. These
soils are with high permeability and neutral PH. Black soil with high initial infiltration rate when
dry and cracked.
On getting wet cracks will close and infiltration rate will be very low. These are derived from
schistose rocks. The Black soil is found in the prolonged submerged areas and canal command
areas having low Permeability. It is calcareous and mildly alkaline in nature.The soil type of the
region is given vide MES/DWG/SM/22-07
Soil samples have been collected from 11 locations during Post monsoon season 2021 using
sampling augers for analysis of physical and chemical parameters.
At each location collect at least 10 to 15 samples from each sampling unit and place in a bucket or
tray.
Generally 10 to 20 spots must be taken for one composite sample depending on the size of the
field at depth of 0-30 cms below the surface. The collected sample from each location is
uniformly mixed before homogenizing the soil samples.
Sr. Crop Soil Sampling Depth
No. Inches Cm
1 Grasses and grasslands 2 5
2 Rice, finger millet, groundnut, pearl 6 15
millet, small millets etc. (shallow rooted
crops)
3 Cotton, Redgram, sugarcane, banana, 9 22
tapioca, vegetables etc., (deep rooted
crops)
4 Perennial crops, plantations and Three soil samples Three soil samples
orchard crops at 12, 24 and 36 inches at 30,60 and 90 cm
Source:-CPCB guidelines for Soil Sampling
3.4.8 CALIBRATION
The monitoring and analytical instruments are being calibrated periodically. The correction
factors, if any, are being applied in the computation of the data.
3.4.9 FLORA-FAUNA
A general ecological survey covering an area of 10 km radius around ML Area has been
conducted using least count quadrate method and reported. Each of the quartiles have been
examined for representative flora on randomly sampled quadrats for trees (25x25-m), shrubs
(10x10-m) and herbs (2x2-m) depending upon prevailing geographical conditions and bio-
diversity aspects of study area.
The data obtained is further used to estimate Relative Dominance, Relative Density (RD),
Relative Frequency (RF) and Importance Value index (IVI) as per the formulae.
Faunal survey covers the Terrestrial Fauna, Avian Fauna and Aquatic Fauna. The survey is based
on personal observation, enquiry with local population and records available. This study includes
the identification of endangered and rare species as per Red Book.
3.4.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY
As the proposed Mining activity is within the existing ML Area, this Project does not involve
resettlement/rehabilitation. The Socio-Economic profile of the population living in study area has
been prepared based on Census 2011 data and Survey 2021.
3.5 BASE LINE & BASE MAPS -ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS
3.5.1 Environmental Monitoring Program
The location of air, water, noise and soil sampling stations were selected for appropriate
monitoring. A monitoring station was positioned at core zone (project site) for micro-
meteorological data collection. The schedule of the environmental monitoring programme is
described below:
Table.No.3.4 Environmental Monitoring Program

Environmental Monitoring Number of Parameters
component period Sampling Stations
Micro- Oct-2021 to Temp, Relative humidity, Rainfall, Wind
one
Metrology Dec - 2021 speed, wind direction
Oct-2021 to PM10,PM2.5,SO2,NO2,CO,NH3,C6H6,B(a)P,As,
Air Quality 12 Stations
Dec - 2021 Lead & Nickel
8 Samples Surface
Water Quality Dec, 2021 water & 9 Samples IS-10500:2012 & IS 2296
Ground water
Noise Dec, 2021 12 Stations Lday,Lnight, & Leq
Physical ,Chemical parameters and micro
Soil Dec, 2021 11 Samples
nutirents of Indian standards IS: 2720
Table.No.3.5 Environmental Attributes & Frequency of Monitoring

Sl.no Environmental Sampling Locations Sampling Parameters Total Sampling
Component Sampling Frequency
period
Wind speed, Wind 3 months Hourly
Direction
1. Meteorology Core Central Location Rainfall, cloud cover 3 months Daily
Temp and relative 3 months Twice , Thrice
humidity & daily
2 Ambient Air A1 Plant area PM10, PM2.5,
Quality A2 Yeshwantnagar village SO2,NO2, 2 days/ 24 hourly
A3 Bandri Village CO,NH3,B(a)P, Heavy week
A4 Somlapur Village Metals : Pb,As,Ni,Hg
A5 Dharmapur Village & Free silica
A6 Anakamanahall village
A7 Subbaryanahalli Village
A8 Ramgad Village
A9 Nidagutti Village
A10 Devaramallpur Village
A11 Kalingeri Village
A12 Kapatrahallu Village
3 Water Quality SURFACE WATER As per Grab Once during
SW1 Narihalla Upstream IS:2296 Sampling study period
SW2 Anakamanahall Kere Water
SW3 Somalapura Nallah water
SW4 Bandri Kere water
SW5 Narahalla Downstream
SW6 Herahallu Kere Water
SW7 Harishankar Spring Water
SW8 Kere water near village
SW9 Kere water near Chorauru
SW10 Kere water near Jiinihalli
GROUND WATER
GW1 Ubbalgundi illage Bore water
GW2 Anakamanahall Bore water, IS – 10500: 2012
GW3 Somalapur bore well water,
GW4 Yeshwantnagar bore water well.
GW5 Dharamapura Bore well water,
GW6 Sandur bore well water,
GW7 Daulathpur Bore Water
GW8 Bandri Bore Well Water
GW9 Upparanhalli Bore water
GW10 Kodialli Bore water

GW11 Herehallu Bore Water
GW12 Devaramallapur Bore Water
GW13 Tyagadahallu Bore Water
GW14 Tippanamaradi Bore water
4 Noise N1 Bandri village, Lday, Lnight & Leq 24 Hourly Once during
N2 Kumarswami Betta RF, compo-site study period
N3 Ramgad RF
N4 Sandur
N5 Somlapura RF
N6 Near Gandi Narashima swami
Temple
N7 Yeshwantnagar Village
N8 Anakamanahall Village
N9 Dharampur Village
N10 Devaramallapur Village
N11 Kalingeri & Village
N12 Kapatrahallu Village
5 Soil S1 SubbarayanaHalli Village Physical and Chemical Compo- Once during
S2 Ramgad RF soil constituents, suitability site study period
S3 Somalapura RF AG soil for agricultural growth Sample
S4 Anakamanahall village AG soil
S5 Yeshwantanagar Village soil
S6 Bandri Ag Soil
S7 Somalapur Ag Soil
S8 Dharamapur Village Ag Soil
S9 Devarallapur Ag soil
S10 Kalingeri Village Ag soil
S11 Kapatrahallu Village Ag soil
3.5.1.2 MICROMETEOROLOGICAL STATUS

The Climate is normally mild cold Oct 2021, Nov 2021 and Dec 2021 months are usually
pleasant with moderate winds from South East to North West. December to February are Coolest
months of the year, during these months the wind shift in North East with increased force and
brings welcome showers by the end of February. During the succeeding four months the wind
blows from Eastern side and brings fair quantum of rainfall.
By the end of March the wind is light and pleasant forecasting the on set of Northeast monsoon.
In November and December the weather is fine, Rainfall is rare and wind is light with occurrence
of heavy dew.
Sub-tropical climate prevails over the study area. The nearest IMD station is at Ballari. The
temperature during the period Oct 2021 to Dec, 2021 the minimum temperature ranges from
15.4oC to 26.2oC and maximum temperature from 25.4oC to 37.2oC. The District receives low to
moderate rainfall and is one of the drought prone districts in the state. Normal Annual Rainfall is
630 mm in Sandur taluk of Ballari District. Monthwise rainfall data depicted in Figure No.3.1
Table.No 3.6 Source: - Hydromet Division, Indian Meterological Department, New Delhi
Monthly Rainfall at Sandur
Fig.3.1 Monthly Rainfall for Sandur, Ballari District
In the abstract of collected hourly data during October, 2021 to December, 2021, data pertaining
to three months during Post Monsoon , parameters viz. wind speed, direction, temperature,
relative humidity, are presented in Table 3.6. Wind roses diagram has been drawn and presented
as Figure No.3A & 3B.
Observations:
During the monitoring period the observations in the study area are
 Predominant winds from NE directions
 Wind Speed readings in the range 3.00-20.0 kmph,
 Calm condition prevailed for 49.66% of the monitoring period
 Temperature readings ranging from 15.0oC to 35.6 oC,
 Relative humidity values ranging in between 68.6 % to 106.3%,
 Mean atmospheric pressure 755 mm (of mercury),
 Clear skies prevailed most of the times and
 No major rainy days during the monitoring period have been observed
 The collected meteorological data during this season represents the local weather
phenomena.
Table.No.3.7 Meterological Data

October 2021
Temperature inOC Relative Humidity in % Wind Speed Km/hr
Date
Min. Max. Min. Max. Max. Average
01/10/2021 20.0 25.2 76.3 98.0 0.7 0.03
02/10/2021 20.0 26.4 72.1 98.0 0.0 0.00
03/10/2021 20.2 26.4 73.0 97.3 0.0 0.00
04/10/2021 20.3 27.0 69.3 98.5 0.0 0.00
05/10/2021 20.0 26.4 67.3 96.3 0.1 0.00
06/10/2021 20.1 24.3 74.1 94.1 0.0 0.00
07/10/2021 20.0 25.2 72.3 97.5 1.5 0.07
08/10/2021 20.0 26.5 71.0 98.5 7.4 0.35
09/10/2021 20.0 27.4 66.1 94.4 16.0 1.81
10/10/2021 21.1 28.6 66.1 98.6 17.7 6.01
11/10/2021 21.2 31.4 53.1 98.6 0.0 0.00
12/10/2021 22.1 31.4 49.4 96.0 0.0 0.00
13/10/2021 21.0 31.4 54.2 96.4 1.3 0.07
14/10/2021 21.1 28.2 69.2 94.3 0.3 0.01
15/10/2021 21.0 25.0 83.0 97.6 0.7 0.03
16/10/2021 21.0 28.4 65.5 68.6 0.7 0.03
17/10/2021 21.0 27.2 72.5 97.5 16.5 9.34
18/10/2021 21.1 27.2 70.5 97.3 18.0 10.40
19/10/2021 20.0 27.5 67.3 98.4 16.5 10.31
20/10/2021 21.0 25.1 77.6 98.5 12.6 1.61
21/10/2021 21.0 26.5 70.2 97.4 0.0 0.00
22/10/2021 21.1 27.1 62.2 98.2 0.0 0.00
23/10/2021 21.1 28.4 61.3 93.5 3.9 0.43
24/10/2021 21.2 28.5 50.6 84.6 0.0 0.00
25/10/2021 22.1 28.5 51.2 71.0 8.6 3.09
26/10/2021 21.1 28.6 55.0 90.0 5.1 0.68
27/10/2021 20.0 27.5 58.3 93.1 2.8 0.12
28/10/2021 20.1 28.2 46.3 96.1 0.0 0.00
29/10/2021 21.0 28.5 60.3 90.4 0.0 0.00
30/10/2021 22.1 29.2 57.3 90.5 0.0 0.00
31/10/2021 20.1 29.3 55.1 88.2 0.0 0.00
November 2021
Date
01/11/2021 20.6 29.1 60.2 96.5 4.0 0.63
02/11/2021 22.4 33.0 54.4 92.1 4.0 0.58
03/11/2021 23.8 33.0 53.5 92.1 12.0 2.25
04/11/2021 22.3 33.4 49.2 95.1 8.0 2.00
05/11/2021 26.0 33.3 37.9 84.6 14.0 5.50
06/11/2021 25.9 32.8 53.9 75.9 19.0 6.38
07/11/2021 22.7 32.4 46.6 86.9 9.0 2.92
08/11/2021 22.2 33.3 34.4 86.0 9.0 2.92
09/11/2021 20.8 33.2 40.5 88.0 8.0 1.58
10/11/2021 20.8 33.0 29.1 87.8 6.0 1.08
11/11/2021 20.0 34.7 33.5 92.2 9.0 1.58
12/11/2021 19.7 34.4 35 87.3 12.0 2.42
13/11/2021 19.7 34.6 39.4 87.3 20.0 5.92
14/11/2021 19.2 35.3 35.7 88.7 8.0 2.04
15/11/2021 18.9 35.6 32.5 89.4 6.0 0.71
16/11/2021 18.2 32.4 34.7 93.1 3.0 0.25
17/11/2021 19.3 33.6 37.3 89.1 4.0 0.67

18/11/2021 19.2 34.6 35 92.3 3.0 0.50
19/11/2021 20.8 34.6 40.5 82.8 6.0 1.29
20/11/2021 20.6 34.7 36.8 85.6 9.0 1.13
21/11/2021 22.3 32.7 53.6 86.4 11.0 3.88
22/11/2021 26.1 34.4 51.1 84.1 9.0 2.92
23/11/2021 23.1 33.9 51 93.6 6.0 0.88
24/11/2021 18.1 27.3 69.3 103.4 9.0 1.58
25/11/2021 20.2 27.3 52 101.4 9.0 2.17
26/11/2021 19.0 27.5 51.3 101.1 9.0 2.25
27/11/2021 18.1 25.2 57 97.3 8.0 1.92
28/11/2021 19.0 22.1 80.2 101.2 6.0 0.71
29/11/2021 20.0 23.5 88 104.2 3.0 0.25
30/11/2021 20.0 26.1 72.4 106.3 4.0 0.71
December 2021
Date
01/12/2021 20.1 26.2 69.2 103.2 6.0 1.29
02/12/2021 20.0 27.2 62 103.3 9.0 1.13
03/12/2021 20.1 26.3 70.5 99 11.0 3.88
04/12/2021 20.1 28.3 59.5 100.4 9.0 2.92
05/12/2021 20.2 26.0 67 106.2 6.0 0.88
06/12/2021 19.2 26.0 62.1 91.2 17.0 5.75
07/12/2021 17.0 31.5 37.5 92.2 19.0 5.71
08/12/2021 19.8 29.6 38.4 87.8 9.0 1.46
09/12/2021 20.7 27.9 42.2 62 0.0 0.00
10/12/2021 22.9 31.5 37.5 81.4 9.0 2.13
11/12/2021 20.1 26.3 70.5 99 11.0 3.88
12/12/2021 15.0 26.6 29.1 96.2 3.0 0.13
13/12/2021 20.1 27.4 36.5 100.4 0.0 0.00
14/12/2021 19.0 25.5 60.3 101.1 0.0 0.00
15/12/2021 19.0 26.3 46.1 100.6 0.0 0.00
16/12/2021 18.0 26.4 45.3 102.4 0.0 0.00
17/12/2021 16.2 25.6 39.6 88.3 0.0 0.00
18/12/2021 16.2 25.1 28 83.1 0.0 0.00
19/12/2021 15.0 26.6 29.1 64.5 0.0 0.00
20/12/2021 16.0 26.6 34.2 79.1 0.0 0.00
21/12/2021 15.0 26.3 23.3 78.1 0.0 0.00
22/12/2021 15.0 26.6 23.3 78.1 1.6 0.16
23/12/2021 19.2 26.3 59 101 2.0 0.87
24/12/2021 19.0 26.5 53.6 91 2.5 0.88
25/12/2021 18.2 28.1 43.1 86.4 17.2 4.14
26/12/2021 18.0 27.4 39.5 91.3 2.4 0.81
27/12/2021 17.4 27.3 43.1 93.1 12.9 1.23
28/12/2021 18.2 26.3 55.2 101 2.0 0.63
29/12/2021 19.0 26.5 53.6 91 2.5 0.88
30/12/2021 18.2 28.1 43.1 86.4 17.2 4.14
31/12/2021 18.0 27.4 39.5 91.3 2.4 0.81
Windrose at site October, 2021 Windrose at site November, 2021

Figure No. 3.2A.
Windrose at site December, 2021 Post Monsoon season 2021 (Oct,2021 to Dec,2021)
Figure No. 3.2B
3.5.3 Air Quality Data

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km radius around the plant forms the
baseline information. The study area represents mostly rural environment. The various sources of
air pollution in the region are vehicular traffic, dust arising from unpaved village roads &
domestic fuel burning. The prime objective of baseline air quality survey is to assess the existing
air quality of the study area. This will also be useful in assessing the conformity to standards of
the ambient air quality.
3.5.3.1 SELECTION OF SAMPLING STATIONS
The baseline status of the ambient air quality can be assessed through scientifically designed
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network. The selection of sampling locations for the air quality
surveillance programme is based on the following.
(a) Representation of the Plant area
(b) Representation of down wind direction
(c) Representation of upwind direction
(d) Representation of cross wind direction
(e) Representation of residential areas
(f) Representation of regional background levels
(g) Representation of sensitive receptors
Since the ground level concentration of the pollutants, mainly the dust released from the
proposed plant will not spread beyond 5 km radius, the locations of monitoring stations in the
buffer zone have been kept close to proposed plant area. For the AAQ monitoring, stations have
been selected on the basis of wind direction. The wind direction conditions have been considered
and correlated during the monitoring. The stations monitored for ambient air quality and for
source monitoring are furnished below:
Table.No. 3.8 Location of Air stations
From Plant Area From Tailing Pond Latitude Longitude
Location Distance Distance
Direction Direction
Kms Kms D M S D M S
A1 - Within 500m from
0.5 NE 0.5 N 15 1 48.61 76 30 23.94
plant site & Tailing Pond
A2 - Yeshwanthnagar 1.3 N 6.6 N 15 02 40.17 76 29 48.71
A3 - Bandri 5.8 SW 4.4 W 14 59 32.32 76 27 06.16
A4 - Somalapur 1.0 NW 5.0 NNW 15 01 57.36 76 29 26.62
A5 - Dharmapur 4.7 NE 9.9 NNE 15 04 08.91 76 31 52.56
A6 - Anakamanahall 3.1 S 1.0 NE 15 59 37.36 76 30 33.50
A7 - Subbarayanahalli 5.7 SE 6.3 NE 15 00 25.42 76 33 18.77
A8 - Ramgad 6.5 NNW 11.3 NW 15 04 48.76 76 27 43.58
A9 - Nidagutti 7.0 SWW 7.8 NEE 15 01 05.75 76 25 49.01
A10 - Devaramallapur 6.5 SSE 2.0 SE 14 28 01.50 76 31 10.26
A11 - Kalingeri 9.0 S 3.5 S 14 55 21.12 76 31 15.00
A12 - Kapatrahallu 7.7 SSW 3.0 SW 15 00 36.96 76 29 52.08
Their locations are marked in key plan in MES/DWG/AM/22-08
3.5.3.2 FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

Ambient air quality (AAQ) samples were collected on basis of 24-hour sampling and twice a
week at each site. The ambient air quality samples were collected for continuous 12-weeks
beginning from Oct-2021 to Dec-2021.
The samples were preserved and analysed as per the standard methods recommended by Standard
Operating Procedure (SOPs) of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB 2011).Ozone (O 3) and
Carbon Monoxide (CO) were monitored by randomly collecting the gas through one hour
sampling procedure. Samples for Ammonia (NH3) were randomly monitored for its presence.
3.5.3.3 METHOD OF ANALYSIS
Ambient air samples were analysed with Gravimetric, Colorimetric or Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometric (AAS) method as per standard methods specified by Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB 2011).
OBSERVATIONS
The ambient air quality monitoring results for all the stations for the Post Monsoon 2021 season
are presented under Annexure No. 4 and their statistical analysis report for SO2, NO2 PM10 &
PM2.5 are presented below since all other parameters are well below the limits:
Table.No.3.9: Ambient Air Quality Baseline Data Statistical Analysis
Post Monsoon Season, 2021 (October to December, 2021)
Station Code : A1 - Within 500M from
A2 - Yeshwanthanagar A3 - Bandri
Plant site NE Direction
SO2 NO2 PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 PM10 PM2.5
Min. 7 9 36 15 5 10 37 16 7 9 32 19
10% 8 10 40 18 8 11 40 19 7 11 36 22
25% 9 11 46 21 8 12 45 21 8 11 39 24
50% 10 13 50 24 10 13 48 25 9 13 41 27
75% 11 14 56 28 11 14 53 26 11 14 50 29
98% 13 16 61 32 12 18 58 30 12 18 63 34
Max. 13 16 61 32 12 19 58 30 12 18 63 36
Avg. 10 12 50 24 9 13 48 24 9 13 44 26
SD 2 2 7 5 2 2 6 4 2 2 8 4
No. of obs 26
Station Code : A4 - Somalapura A5 - Dharmapura A6 - Ankamanahal
Min. 5 9 30 15 6 9 29 15 5 9 30 15
10% 6 9 36 17 8 9 32 17 6 9 33 17
25% 8 10 38 18 8 10 37 20 7 10 37 19
50% 9 11 40 21 9 11 42 22 9 11 40 23
75% 10 12 47 26 10 13 49 26 10 13 45 26
98% 12 15 51 29 12 16 57 28 11 15 55 29
Max. 12 15 52 30 12 16 58 28 11 15 56 29
Avg. 9 11 42 22 9 12 42 22 8 11 41 23
SD 2 2 6 4 2 2 8 4 2 2 7 4
No. of obs 26
Station Code : A7 - Subbarayanahalli A8 - Ramgad A9 - Nidagutti
Min. 5 9 41 16 6 9 36 15 6 9 29 14
10% 7 9 45 18 7 10 40 17 7 10 34 16
25% 7 10 50 19 8 10 47 18 7 11 39 20
50% 9 11 53 23 9 11 50 21 9 13 44 24
75% 10 13 59 25 10 12 54 26 11 15 48 26
98% 12 15 61 32 12 16 58 29 12 17 62 32
Max. 12 15 68 30 11 15 69 28 12 17 59 31
Avg. 9 11 54 23 9 11 51 22 9 13 43 23
SD 2 2 8 4 2 2 8 4 2 2 7 4
No. of obs 26
Station Code : A10 - Devaramallapur A11 - Kalingeri A12 - Kapatrahallu
Min. 6 10 29 12 6 9 30 17 7 9 30 15
10% 7 11 36 17 7 10 35 19 7 11 35 19
25% 8 12 39 20 7 11 38 21 8 12 39 22
50% 9 13 41 25 9 11 42 24 10 14 44 26
75% 11 15 45 27 10 13 46 25 11 15 48 27
98% 13 17 53 31 12 17 53 27 13 18 54 30
Max. 13 17 53 33 13 18 56 27 13 18 55 30
Avg. 9 13 42 23 9 12 42 23 10 14 43 25
SD 2 2 6 5 2 2 6 3 2 2 6 4
No. of obs 26
Results:
The values of SO2, NO2, PM10 & PM2.5 in the core zone are observed to be ranging between SO2
5 to 13, NO2 9 to 19, PM10 29, to 69, PM2.5 12 to 36 µg/m3. All the parameters including CO, Pb,
and O3 as per NAAQS are monitored and monitoring results compared to AAQS are observed to
be well within the limits.
3.5.3.4 MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITION OF PM10 :

The Free Silica content in ore and waste is estimated as <0.043% using personal dust samplers as
per DGMS circular which is much lower than the 5% limit of Free Silica for a dust concentration
limit of 3 mg/m3 . A copy of the report on Air borne dust and free silica analysis is enclosed vide
Annexure No.4 .
Table.No.3.10: Air Quality Paramters and Methology
Time Weighted Concentration in Ambient Air Methods of Measurement
Average Industrial, Ecologically
Residential, Sensitive Area
Sl.no Pollutants
Rural and (Notified by
other Areas Central
Government)
Sulphur Dioxide Annual * 50 20 -Improved West and Gaeke Method
1
(SO2), μg/m3 24 Hours ** 80 80 -Ultraviolet Fluorescence
Nitrogen Dioxide Annual * 40 30 -Jacob & Hochheiser modified
2 (NO2), μg/m3 24 Hours ** 80 80 (NaOH-NaAsO2) Method
-Gas Phase Chemiluminescence
Particulate Matter Annual * 60 60 -Gravimetric
3 (Size less than 10 μ) 24 Hours ** 100 100 -TEOM
or PM10, μg/m3 -Beta attenuation
Particulate Matter Annual * 40 40 -Gravimetric
4 (Size less than 2.5 μ) 24 Hours ** 60 60 -TEOM
or PM2.5, μg/m3 -Beta attenuation
Ozone (O3) μg/m3 8 Hours * 100 100 -UV Photometric
5
1 Hour ** 180 180 -Chemiluminescence
Lead (Pb) μg/m3 Annual * 0.50 0.50 -AAS/ICP Method after sampling
24 Hours ** 1.0 1.0 on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter
6
paper
-ED-XRF using Teflon filter
Carbon 8 Hours ** 02 02 -Non dispersive Infrared (NDIR)
7 Monoxide(CO),mg/m3 1 Hour ** 04 04 Spectroscopy
Ammonia (NH3), Annual * 24 100 100 -Chemiluminescene -Indophenol
8 μg/m3 Hours ** 400 400 blue method
Benzene (C6H6),μg/m3 Annual * 05 05 -Gas Chromatography (GC) based
9 continuous analyzer -Adsorption and
desorption followed by GC analysis
Benzo(a)Pyrene Annual * 01 01 -Solvent extraction followed by
10 (BaP) Particulate HPLC/ GC analysis
phase only, ng/m3
Arsenic (As), ng/m3 Annual * 06 06 -AAS/ICP Method after sampling on
11
EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper
Nickel (Ni), ng/m3 Annual * 20 20 -AAS/ICP Method after sampling on
12
EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper
* Annual Arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular site taken twice a week 24 hourly at
uniform intervals.
** 24 hourly or 8 hourly or 1 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year. 2%
of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring.
NOTE: Whenever and wherever monitoring results on two consecutive days of monitoring exceed the limits specified
above for the respective category, it shall be considered adequate reason to institute regular or continuous monitoring and
further investigations.
3.5.4 Noise Environment

Table.No.3.11 Location of Noise Monitoring Stations
From Plant Boundary From Settling Ponda
Code Latitude Longitude
Locations Distance Distance
No Direction Direction
km km
D M S D M S
N1 Bandri 5.8 SW 4.4 W 14 59 32.40 76 27 20.50
Kumar Swamy
N2 1.2 S 3.3 N 15 0 54.20 76 30 32.30
Betta RF
N3 Ramgad RF 4.4 NNW 9.3 NW 15 3 59.50 76 28 37.70
N4 Sandur 6.7 NE 11.7 NNE 15 4 51.56 76 32 38.64
N5 Somalapura RF 1.5 NW 5.2 NNW 15 0 35.30 76 30 37.22
Near Gandi
N6 Narashima 3.5 NE 8.5 N 15 3 34.40 76 31 20.30
Swamy Temple
N7 Yeshwanth Nagar 1.3 N 6.6 N 15 2 38.50 76 29 59.10
Anakamhalla
N8 3.1 S 1.0 NE
Village 14 59 32.00 76 30 34.68
Dharamapur
N9 4.7 NE 9.9 NNE
Village 15 4 11.29 76 31 51.85
Devaramallapur
N10 6.5 SSE 2.0 SE 14 28 1.50 76 31 10.26
village
N11 Kalingeri village 9.0 S 3.5 S 14 55 21.12 76 31 15.00
N12 Kapatrahallu 7.7 SSW 3.0 SW 15 0 36.96 76 29 52.08
Within 500m
N13 from plant site & 0.5 NE 0.5 N 15 1 48.61 76 30 23.94
Tailing Pond
The ambient noise quality monitoring results for all the stations for the Post Monsoon 2021
season are presented under Annexure No.4 and their summary of Leq for both day & night results
are presented below:
Observations
The noise monitoring results are compared with the Ambient Noise Quality Standard notified
under Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, given below and they are observed to be well within
the limits.
Table.No 3.12 .Noise Quality Standards
Leq. Limit
Permissible limits as per ILO Code of Practice Ambient Noise Levels- dB(A)
For Unprotected ear - 8 hrs working shift Day Night
Warning limit - 85 dB(A) Industrial areas 75 70
Danger limit - 90 dB(A) Commercial area 65 55
Worker not to be exposed for more than 115 dB(A) Residential area 55 45
Silence Zone 50 40
Table .no.3.13 Results observed
Code Day Night
Monitoring stations Area
No. Leq Leq
Buffer Zone
N1 Bandri village Commerecial area 50.5 41.2
N2 Kumarswamy betta RF Silence area 46.7 42.9
N3 Ramgad village Industrial areas 54.6 42.7
N4 Sandur Commerecial area 53.3 41.7
N5 Somalapura RF Silence area 48.4 42.3
Near Gandi Narashimma
N6 Silence area 48.2 36.8
Swamy Temple
N7 Yeshwanthanagar Commerecial area 51.3 43.9
N8 Ankamanahal village Residential area 45.3 40.3
N9 Dharmapura Residential area 52.1 43.2
N10 Kapatrahallu village Residential area 49.7 43.4
N11 Kalingeri village Residential area 51.8 39.2
N12 Devaramallapu village Residential area 52.6 41.5
Core Zone
Within 500m from plant site &
N1 Industrial Area 53.9 42.5
Tailing Pond
Results
The summarized results of ambient noise monitoring are given in above Table.No.
3.13A.The results have been compared with the standards specified in Schedule III, Rule
3 of Environmental Protection Rules 1986
3.5.5 Water Environment

3.5.5.1 Surface Water
There are 3, seasonal nallahs passing through the Plant area as such no modification / diversion
proposed.
There are 6 water tanks in the buffer area. However, there is a natural spring located at a distance
of 6.0 kms towards E direction from plant area and 7.6 kms towards NE towards from tailings
(filter cake storage).
During monsoon the rain water is drained through the natural valleys on the Western part of the
Plant and joins into the Narihalla, a seasonal nallah passes through Plant area and Tailing pond.
The study area experiences an average annual rainfall of 840 mm. To store the run-off in the
sedimentation ponds or water ponds especially to be created for the storage purpose and using it
for watering plantation and sprinkling of the haul roads. It is proposed to construct check dams,
gully plugs and garland drain which store the rainwater. These need to be cleaned during pre-
monsoon period.
3.5.5.2 Ground Water
Hydrogeologically, the district forms a part of hard rock terrain comprising granitic gneiss,
younger granites and schistose formation of Archean age. The alluvium occurring in old river
course and in flood plains of granitic and gneissic terrain, which are noticed in Hagari river
course of Kudlugi, Bellary and Siruguppa taluks. The wells constructed in these areas tapping
alluvial aquifers are with perporated cement ring dug wells and fitted centrifugal pumps.
Even cavity wells were noticed near kottur area. The granitic gneiss and gneissic granite which
form major aquifers in the district recorded a weathered and semi weathered zone up to 25m.
Schistose formation has weathered formation with less granular and fractured as openings than
granites and gneisses. Occurrence and movement of ground water are controlled by the degree of
weathering, fracturing and the geomorphologic set up in the area.
The ground water occurs under phreatic and semi confined conditions in weathered and fractured
rocks. The principal rock types are granites, gneisses, and schist has no primary porosity but
possess fractures and joints as secondary porosity which forms water bearing and yielding
properties of these rocks. The ground water in the above rock types reported that the potential
aquifers exist down to the depth of 138mbgl in the gneissic and granitic rocks where as schistose
rocks holds less potential zones due to its compactness and clay filled weaker zones. Alluvial
aquifers with the thickness of up to 25 m yields copious water as observed in PD Halli. The deep-
seated fracture is common to the depth range of 80 to 110m along major lineaments.
The principal source of recharge is rainfall. In command areas seepage from reservoirs canals and
percolation from applied irrigation water form additional recharge source.
Out of 21 National Hydrograph Stations (NHS-dug wells) located in Bellary district, the depth to
water levels recorded was in the range of 1.72 to 19.48m BGL
The depths to water levels recorded during post monsoon period were in the range of 1.22 to
17.61m BGL. The average depth to water level during pre-monsoon is 6.78m and in post
monsoon it is 5.94m.
Further the depth to water level between 0.00 to 5.00m in both pre and post monsoon periods
were observed in parts of Hospet taluk, most of the part of Siruguppa taluk and in some parts of
west and North West of Bellary in Bellary taluk due to Tungabhadra canal irrigation activity. The
major portion of the district shows 5.00m to 10.00m water level during pre-monsoon as well as
during post-monsoon season.
3.5.5.3 Water Quality
Surface Water Sampling Stations
The 5 surface water samples collected during winter 2019-20 were analysed and the results of the
analysis were compared with the standards of IS: 2296 for surface water samples. All the
parameters were observed to be well within the limits. The analysis reports of surface water are
presented under Annexure No.4
Table.No.3.14 Location of Surface Water Sampling Stations
From Plant
From Settling Ponda
Boundary
Locations
No Distance Distance
Direction Direction
km km
D M S D M S
Surface water
SW1 Narihalla Upstream 2.5 S 1.9 NE 15 0 7.18 76 30 40.32
Ankamanahal Kere
SW2 3.7 S 2.0 NE 14 59 36.80 76 31 12.90
Water
Somalapura Nallah
SW3 3.2 S 0.9 N 14 59 36.20 76 29 41.00
Water
SW4 Bandri Kere Water 6.1 SW 4.0 W 14 59 6.90 76 27 8.50
Narihalla Down
SW5 1.6 N 6.8 N 15 2 44.40 76 29 41.50
Stream Water
SW6 Herahallu kere Water 6.7 S 2.3 SE 14 57 39.90 76 30 52.70
Harishankar Spring
SW7 6.0 E 7.6 NE 15 1 28.82 76 33 38.09
Water
Kere water Near
SW8 9.1 S 3.5 S 14 56 36.60 76 30 22.98
Kalingeri village
Kere Water Near
SW9 11.8 SSE 6.7 SSE 14 55 19.92 76 31 72.90
Choranuru
Kere water Near
SW10 10.2 SE 6.0 SE 14 56 42.90 76 32 47.64
Jiginihalli
Results : Further, the analysis results when compared with the Limits for Stream Water Standards
IS 2296, 1982 Class C norms for surface water bodies, it indicates neutral nature of water as DO
from min 5.3 to max 5.8 mg/l, Chlorides varies from Min 15 to Max 235 mg/l, TDS varies from
min 118 to max 885 mg/l thus at all the locations is well within the prescribed permissible limits.
The Heavy metal content is found below detectable limits
3.5.5.4 Ground Water Sampling Stations

14 Nos. of Ground water Samples were collected in Buffer Zone and analyzed under IS 10500
standards. Locations of water sampling stations are marked in MES/DWG/WS/22-10
Table.No.3.15 Location of Ground Water Sampling Stations
From Plant
From Settling Ponda
Boundary
Locations
Direction Direction
km km
D M S D M S
Ubbalgundi
GW1 Village Bore 3.5 NE 8.5 N 15 3 32.50 76 31 18.80
Water
Ankamanahal
GW2 3.7 S 1.9 NE 14 59 32.80 76 31 7.00
Bore Water
Somalapur
GW3 1.0 NW 5.5 NNW 15 2 5.04 76 29 29.20
Bore Water
Yeshwanth
GW4 Nagar Bore 3.6 N 7.0 N 15 3 59.50 76 30 6.30
water
Dharamapura
GW5 4.7 NE 9.9 NNE 15 4 9.40 76 31 54.00
Bore water
Sandur Bore
GW6 6.7 NE 11.7 NNE 15 4 52.10 76 32 40.20
water
Daulathpur
GW7 8.3 NE 13.9 NNE 15 6 17.40 76 32 7.38
Bore water
GW8 Bandri 5.5 SW 3.9 W 14 59 32.40 76 27 20.50
Upparanhalli
GW9 10.3 S 4.8 S 14 55 59.40 76 30 41.46
Bore Water
Kodialli Bore
GW10 5.7 SSW 2.8 W 14 59 6.78 76 27 50.46
Water
Herehallu Bore
GW11 7.5 SSE 2.3 SSE 14 57 30.54 76 30 42.60
Water
Devaramallapur
GW12 6.5 SSE 2.1 SE 14 58 4.32 76 31 14.10
Bore water
Tyagadahallu
GW13 8.3 SSE 4.0 SE 14 57 20.04 76 31 55.20
Bore water
Tippanamaradi
GW14 9.0 SSE 4.0 SSE 14 56 43.44 76 31 6.96
Bore water
The parameters wise ground water quality is given in Annexure.No.4 enclosed
Results:
The results have been compared with the drinking water quality standards specified in IS
10500.The analysis results indicate that all the parameters are well within the permissible
limit.
3.5.5.5 The water requirement for the Project, its availability and source should be furnished. A
detailed water balance should also be provided. Fresh water requirement for the Project should be
indicated.Water required for the plant operations is about 2491 KLD per day and it is being
brought from nearby bore well initially and from public water supply system later on.
i. Dust Suppression --- 100 KLD
ii. Green Belt --- 44 KLD
iii. Domestic --- 54 KLD
iv. Plant Opeartion --- 2293 KLD
3.5.6 Soil Quality
Table.No.3.16 Location of Soil Sampling Stations
Location of Soil Sampling Stations
From Plant
From Settling Ponda
Boundary
Locations
Direction Direction
km km
D M S D M S
S1 Subbarayana halli 6.0 SE 6.5 NE 15 0 22.90 76 33 30.15
S2 Ramgad RF 4.4 NNW 9.3 NNW 15 3 58.70 76 28 37.40
S3 Somalapura RF 1.2 NW 2.8 N 15 0 35.60 76 30 36.42
S4 Anakamahalli Ag Soil 1.6 S 1.8 NE 14 59 32.80 76 31 7.00
S5 Yeshwanth Nagar 1.9 N 7.2 N 15 3 1.50 76 30 9.90
S6 Bandri Ag Soil 6.1 SW 4.0 W 14 59 11.31 76 27 10.88
Somalapura Village
S7 1.2 NW 5.6 N 15 2 2.07 76 29 20.00
Ag soil
Dharamapur Village
S8 4.7 NE 9.7 N 15 4 3.75 76 3 53.86
Ag soil
Devaramallapur Ag
S9 6.4 SSE 2.4 E 14 56 16.45 76 31 19.00
Soil
Kalingeri Village Ag
S10 9.1 S 3.6 S 14 56 35.25 76 30 29.57
soil
Kapatrahallu Village
S11 7.4 SSW 2.8 SSW 14 57 54.21 76 28 8.11
Ag soil
The locations are marked in MES/DWG/SS/22-11
Obseravtaions
SL.
PARAMETERS Unit S1 S2 S3 S4
No
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
1 pH -- 6.83 7.05 6.59 6.88
2 EC m.mohs/cm 0.365 0.385 0.396 0.566
Chemcial Properties
3 Nitrogen as N Kg/Ha 380 370 380 385
4 Phosphorous as P Kg/Ha 28.5 45.6 39.4 33.82
5 Potassium as K2O Kg/Ha 185 199 210 235
SL.No PARAMETERS Unit S5 S6 S7 S8
Physical properties
1 pH -- 6.89 6.95 7.82 6.92
2 EC m.mohs/cm 0.368 0.572 0.628 0.485
Chemcial Properties
3 Nitrogen as N Kg/Ha 410 385 315 330
4 Phosphorous as P Kg/Ha 27.6 30.5 29.8 30.27
5 Potassium as K2O Kg/Ha 210 225 235 220
SL.No PARAMETERS Unit S9 S10 S11
Physical properties
1 pH -- 6.11 6.66 7.72
2 EC m.mohs/cm 0.372 0.588 0.633
Chemcial Properties
3 Nitrogen as N Kg/Ha 330 310 352
4 Phosphorous as P Kg/Ha 26.0 34.0 31.0
5 Potassium as K2O Kg/Ha 205 210 211
Result: The observed results are found within limits as soil pH plays an important role in the
availability of nutrients. Soil microbial activity is also dependent on pH. The results show that the
soils are with pH varies from 6.83 to 7.82, texture varies from Clay loam to silty clay. The
nutrient content is low and need slight addition of fertilizer for good yield. In the study area the
soil pH is moderately saline and slightly alkaline/sodic alkaline.
Electrical conductivity (EC) is a measure of the soluble salts and ionic activity in the soil. In the
collected soil samples, the conductivity ranged from 0.365 to 0.633µS/cm. Nitrogen are limiting
nutrients. In the tested soil samples, availability of phosphorus nitrogen is low to medium
3.6 Land Environment
Land use of the study area delineating forest area, agricultural land, grazing land, wildlife
sanctuary, national park, migratory routes of fauna, water bodies, human settlements and other
ecological features should be indicated. Land use plan of the plant area should be prepared to
encompass preoperational, operational and post operational phases and submitted. Impact, if any,
of change of land use should be given.
3.6.1 Land use and Land cover of 10-km radius of plantarea & buffer zone is shown vide
MES/DWG/LU/22-13
Table.No.3.18 Land Use Pattern of 10 km radius buffer area
Land use Pattern in 10 Km radius area arround the Project Area

and Ka
Sl.No Type Area in Ha %
1 Dense Forest 7031 15.16
2 Water Bodies 695 1.50
3 Mining Area 1268 2.73
4 Settlements 2416 5.21
5 Agricultural Land 11933 25.72
6 Scrub Forest 22842 49.24
Stone Quarry and Solar
7 204.6 0.44
pannels
Total 46390 100.00
3.6.2 Land use of plant area 26.44 ha

Existing land use of Plant area MES/DWG/LU/22-13 and also Noramalised Difference
Vegetation Index Map (NDVI) is given vide MES/DWG/NDVI/22-14
Table.No.3.19 Landuse of Plant area & Kalingeri area
Sl. Area in
Description of Unit
NO Ha SI. Description Area
1 Iron Ore Processing 1.68 No in Ha
1 Tailing dumping /stacking & Installation
2 Pellet plant 1.88 20.33
of filtration/dewatering unit.
3 Green zone 9.82 2 Buildings, water complex & reservoir
8.09
4 Water Storage 0.85 system.
3 Internal roads & drainage system. 7.58
5 Raw material Yard 4.56 4 Future expansion for ancillary facilities 31.78
6 Office Space & Ancillary 5.95 5 Green belt development. 33.38
Slime (tailing reject) Total 101.17
7 storage & Management in 1.70
Plant
Total Land 26.44
3.7 Biological Environment:

Biodiversity is crucial for the wellbeing of people and the earth environment. Ecological
communities maintain the ecological and evolutionary processes that sustain life. These are
necessary to help maintain the planet’s chemical balance, moderate climate, renew soil, and
conserve species diversity. Plants, animals and other species have intrinsic worth. They are also
the source of all biological wealth-supplying food, raw materials, medicines, recreational
resources, and a store of other goods and services worth many billions of dollars per year.
The genetic stocks within crop varieties, livestock breeds and their wild relatives provide essential
traits for increasing and improving agricultural production and the development of
biotechnologies.
The basic objectives of the assignment are to rationalize the protocol for an effective Biodiversity
management plan for the proposed project area. This has been attempted by the following
objectives.
 Collection and synthesis of secondary information on the status of biodiversity in
study region.
 Undertake intensive field survey to assess the status of floral component in different
habitats (tree, shrubs, herbs, grass and creepers) and similarly, faunal groups
(amphibians, reptiles, terrestrial and aquatic birds and mammals) in core and buffer
areas of project sites.
 Authenticating the report on Wildlife management plan of Schedule – I species by
forest department authority.
 Identification and listing of flora and fauna which are important as per the Wildlife
(Protection) Act 1972.
 Suggest conservation and management plan to improve the habitat quality of the
project area and to conserve the overall biological diversity of flora and faunas in the
study area.
 Suggest Wildlife conservation (species specific/habitat specific) and management plan
for the threatened (critically endangered & endangered species - schedule I) faunal
species if any reported within the study area.
3.7.1 Study Region

The capacity of 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of
26.44 ha, MTPA iron processing plant and Pellet plant somalapura, of Somalapura village,
Sandur taluk, Bellary district of Karnataka state (Fig 3.3). The latitude: N 15° 01'26.00" to N 15 o
01’ 57.3” longitude: E 76° 29' 47.10" to E 76o 30’ 12.0”, toposheet number 57A/8 (Fig. 3.3) at
Village Somalapura, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka by MSPL Limited.
The proposed area fall into private agriculture land, which is away from Ramgad Reserve Forest
(2.3 Km), Kumaraswami Betta RF (0.68 Km) and Somalapur RF (0.47 Km).
Figure 3.3 Overview of core area and buffer area map
3.7.2 Tailing disposal land: Kalingeri

M/s. MSPL identified tailing disposal land of around 101.17 ha for future project/ancillary
expansion in Kalingeri village (Latitude range 14o 58’ 28’’ – 140 59’ 12’’ & Longitude 760 29’
22’’ – 76 0 30’ 20’’ google image - 3.4), which is about 6 km away from the proposed plant.
Currently, 20.33 Ha are set aside for stockpiling filter cake at Kalingeri, and the remaining 80.84
hectares will be set aside for future development and ancillaries including water storage. The
tailings will be conveyed in a slurry form by pipeline to Kalingeri, where they will be filtered, de-
watered, and collected as filter cake for further stocking/disposing to the end user's use and water
will be re-used at Somalapura plant.
Figure 3.3A. Core area (Beneficiation and Tailing disposal Area) and its surrounding 10 km
buffer area
Approach
A participatory and consultative approach was followed in executing the assignment on Ecology
& Biodiversity assessment of the mining core and 10-km buffer region. Further enquiries were
made with forest officials, revenue department and local villagers. Literature survey included a
review of the forest working plan, Census hand book, Gazetteer and other records related to the
ecology of the region.
3.7.2 METHODOLOGY
Forest Types
Forest types were closely observed on the ground and identified using Champion & Seth 1968,
forest classification of India. The forest types are based on the species composition and diversity.
The identified forest types have been verified and confirmed from forest working plan and species
were authenticated by using published and other sources.
Field observation was done during months of Nov – Dec 2020 and other also collated secondary
information from published research articles and books, flora, forest working plan from forest
departments and authenticated with local experts.
Quartile Approach
In order to provide representative ecological status 10-km buffer has been divided into four
quartiles for biodiversity sampling, i.e., NE (Q-1), NW (Q-2) SW (Q-3) and SE (Q-4) is given in
Fig. 3.4. Each of the quartiles have been examined for representative flora on randomly sampled
quadrats for trees (25x25-m), shrubs (10x10-m) and herbs (2x2-m) depending upon prevailing
geographical conditions and bio-diversity aspects of study area.
Figure.3.4. Schematic diagram showing 10-km radius buffer area into four quartiles for
floral samples.
Phyto-sociological parameters, viz., Abundance, Density, Frequency (%) were measured as per
below formula. A total of 10 quadrats were laid down in randomly within core area and 40
quadrats were laid down within four quartiles randomly (10/quartile) in buffer area (see Fig 3.2),
each quadrat trees, shrubs, and herbs as per the Fig.3.4.
Quadrat method
Quadrats of 25 × 25-m were laid down randomly within core and 10-km buffer area; each quadrat
was laid to assess the trees (>5 cm GBH) and one, 10 × 10-m sub-quadrat nested within the
quadrat for shrubs, and two, plots 2 × 2-m for herbs, climbers & grass is given in Fig. 3.5. The
quadrats were laid randomly to cover the area to maximize the sampling efforts and minimize the
species homogeneity, such as small stream area, trees in agricultural bunds, tank bunds, farm
forestry plantations, wildlife areas, natural forest area, avenue plantations, house backyards, etc.
Figure.3.5 Schematic representation of quadrats for trees, shrubs, herbs & grass.
Following formulae was used for calculating the frequency (%), abundance and density of the
floral species
Biodiversity Analysis using index

Species diversity will be calculated by using Shannon and Wiener (1963) formula as follows:
Whereas H΄is Shannon index of general diversity, is often the proportion of individuals
belonging to the ith species in the dataset of interest.
Screening IUCN and other sources for species Conservation status
Besides measuring these parameters, other biodiversity aspects in the form of endemic status,
keystone species, threatened status, and IUCN, Red-data books of the Botanical Survey of India
(BSI), have been verified for their conservation status (see
http://www.iucnredlist.org/static/categories_criteria_3_1).
A keystone species: Is a species that has a disproportionately large effect on its
environment relative to its abundance. Such species are described as playing a critical role in
maintaining the structure of an ecological community, affecting many other organisms in
an ecosystem and helping to determine the types and numbers of various other species in the
community.
The IUCN Species Programme of the IUCN Species Survival Commission (SSC), has for more
than four decades been assessing the conservation status of species, subspecies, varieties, and
even selected subpopulations on a global scale in order to highlight taxa threatened with
extinction, and therefore promote their conservation.
Figure 3.6. IUCN categories showing threatened species categories

The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species provides taxonomic, conservation status and
distribution information on plants and animals that have been globally evaluated using the IUCN
Red List Categories and Criteria (Fig. 3.6). This system is designed to determine the relative risk
of extinction, and the main purpose of the IUCN Red List is to catalogue and highlight those
plants and animals that are facing a higher risk of global extinction (i.e., those listed as Critically
Endangered, Endangered, and Vulnerable). The IUCN Red List also includes information on
plants and animals that are categorisedas Extinct or Extinct in the Wild; on taxa that cannot be
evaluated because of insufficient. information (i.e., are Data Deficient); and on plants and animals
that are either close to meeting the threatened thresholds or that would be threatened if not
considered foran ongoing taxon-specific conservation programme (i.e., are Near Threatened).
Faunal diversity
Mammals were observed using indirect methods such as faecal matter (i.e., scat) and pug mark by
establishing 10 × 100-m linear transects depending on the habitat (i.e,. existing wildlife game
routes/forest trails used). We have also documented few mammals by direct sighting. We have
used point count method for bird documentation as per standard method by Sutherland (1996),
which involved 10-minute observation in each point during early morning hours (6.00 to 10.00
AM). We have enumerated 20 point-counts in each quartile, which constitute a total of 80 points-
counts (20 × 4) within 10-km radius area. The butterfly was enumerated by 2 linear transects of
10 × 100 m were laid within each quartile at minimum interval of 1 km. Further, reptiles and
fishes documented in existing literature and secondary information in consultation with local
people and wildlife experts. Apart from field observation, consultations were held with
knowledgeable persons of the villages, and frontline forest department officials to validate the
field observation and information cited in the literature. To know the endemic or conservation
status of the fauna, Schedule 1 of the Wildlife Preservation Act (1972) has been screened.
3.7.3 OBSERVATIONS AND DISCUSSIONS

Core Area: proposed Benefaction plant (Somalapura)
Entire beneficiation plant 26.44 ha fall within private land owned by the company and these land
historically seasonal Agriculture land as shown Photo 1 to 4 & Table 4.1 & 4.2. The land
remnant isolated species like Neem, Teak species.
The core area has one seasonal Nala (natural canal) passing within the land and also one
community sacred temple (Photo 3) observed otherwise the landscape does not fall under any
wildlife corridors and any ecological sensitivity.
Photo .1 Agriculture land Photo 3. Isolated Neem trees in the core area
Photo 2. Seasonal Nala passing in the area Photo. 4. A community sacred temple
3.7.3.1 Core Area: Tailing disposal land : Kalingeri
Entire tailing disposal land 101.17 ha open degraded revenue land, leased from the local
authority, of which, 20.33 ha land area will be used currently for stockpiling filter cake and tailing
pond establishment, remaining land of 81.17 ha will be kept for future expansion and also forest
plantations and water conservation purposes. The compete landscape is open barren with open
rocky with remnant thorny with open grassland (Photo 5). Total 4 trees, 5 shrubs and 12 herbs
were recorded from the area (Table 3.20 & 3.21).
Photo 5. Lease area Tailing disposal land : Kalingeri

Table 3.20. Biodiversity assessment within core area of beneficiation and tailing disposal
sites
Somalapura Kalingeri
Life forms Species Abundance Species Abundance
richness richness
Trees 4 17.6/ha 4 10.3/ha
Shrubs 4 350/ha 5 150/ha
Herbs 12 11000/ ha 12 1900/ ha
Total 20 21
Table 3.21. list of species reported from core area of Somalapura (Beneficiation plant) and
Kalingeri (Tailing disposal land)
Sl. Somalapura Kalingeri
Species Name Family
No. Abundance Density Frequency Abundance Density Frequency
TREES
1 Cassia siamea Caesalpinaceae 1 0.001 2.2
2 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae 1 0.001 12
3 Acacia nilotica Mimosaceae 1 0.001 10 1 0.001 8
4 Zizyphus mauritiana Rhamanaceae 1 0.0002 2.1 2 0.003 2.2
5 Canthium parviflora Rubiaceae 1 0.0002 2.1
6 Phoenix sylvestris Arecaceae 1 0.0002 3
SHRUBS
1 Calotropis gigantia Asclepiadaceae 2.1 0.004 32 3.2 0.005 38
2 Opuntia sp Cactaceae Yes Yes Yes
3 Cassia auriculata Caesalpiniaceae Yes Yes Yes
Chromolaena
4 Compositae 1.2 0.001 5 1.5 0.001 8
odorata*
5 Zizyphus jujuba Rhamanaceae 1.2 0.0003 12 1.2 0.0003 13
6 Lantana camara * Verbenaceae 2.2 0.002 5 3.1 0.03 14
HERBS
1 Astraceae mullu Asteraceae 2.30 0.01 8.70 1.43 0.01 5.32
2 Parthenium spp Asteraceae 5 0.03 10.20 6 0.04 12.10

3 Cassia sp1 Caesalpinaceae 2.10 0.11 12.20 2.10 0.01 13.00
4 Cassia tora Caesalpinaceae 4.30 1.02 10.00 5.20 2.10 11.00
5 Bidens biternata Compositae 2.20 0.04 9.00 1.20 0.03 8.00
6 Sida cordifolia Malvaceae 2.2 0.01 12.00 3.1 0.03 14.00
7 Mimosa hamata Mimosaceae 2.1 0.01 13.40
8 Mimosa pudica Mimosaceae 4.3 0.04 54.00 5.2 0.05 45.00
9 Cenchrus ciliaris Poaceae Yes Yes
Heteropogon
10 Poaceae
contortus Yes Yes
Cymbopogan
11
martini Poaceae Yes Yes
12 Cyperus rotundus Cyperaceae Yes Yes
3.7.3.2 Buffer Area: Overview of forest types
The vegetation occurring in the area belongs to Southern tropical dry deciduous forests according
to Champion and Seth Classification of forest types of India, 1968. The area falls under the mixed
deciduous sub classification. According to the classification made by Legris and Pascal (1982) the
area falls under deciduous climax forests. According to this classification this type of forests does
not have the potentiality of secondary moist deciduous forests. The canopy is open and the
majority of the trees are leafless during the dry months. The flowering and fruiting are generally
far advanced before the first flush of new leaves appears with the showers in April – May
(quartiles- I, II, &IV, see Fig 3.3.& 3.7.
Figure. 3.7 Study area quartile I, II, III & IV

A total of 123 plant species were recorded from 47 families in both core and 10-km radius buffer
region; of these, there were 68 trees, 28 shrubs, 29 herbs including climbers and grass. The
dominant families are Fabaceae (13 plant species), Euphorbiaceous (8 species) and Combretaceae
(6 species) and Caesalpiniaceae and Verbenaceae (5 species respectively) recorded (Table 1 to 4
& Appendix I).
Table 3.23. Vegetation characteristics of trees, shrubs and herbs in four quartiles of 10-km
radius
Quartiles Life forms Species richness Density/ha Species diversity (H')
Tree 58 731 2.45
Quartile -I
Shrubs 26 1,470 1.96
North -East
Herbs 26 38,125 2.35
Tree 54 662 2.55
Quartile -II
Shrubs 22 860 1.25
North-West
Herbs 22 53,000 2.16
Tree 28 477 2.10
Quartile -III
Shrubs 18 1,250 2.10
East-South
Herbs 16 13,250 2.19
Tree 43 499 1.05
Quartile -IV
Shrubs 20 1,430 1.65
West-South
Herbs 18 27,500 1.70
Trees 68 (Total) 592.4 (Ave.) 2.04 (Ave.)
Overall Shrubs 27 (Total) 1252.5 (Ave.) 1.74 (Ave.)
Herbs 28 (Total) 32968.8 (Ave.) 2.10 (Ave.)
The buffer area: - Quartile I (North-East) shown a higher proportion of forest cover and species
richness compared to the rest of the quartiles, this is due to Kumaraswami betta RF, and Ramgad
RF, these RF largely mixed dense to open forest and also open scrubs patches all along with Nari
Halla stream falls within quartile I. Quartile II (North-West) which is the second most forest
cover quartile got Ramgad RF, mostly dense mixed forest to open scrub forest. Which is
contiguous from Kumaraswami betta RF. Quartile III (South-West), 50% land use also part of
agriculture and human settlements and partly Somalapura RF, open rocky areas and open scrub
forest and quartile IV (South East) third most dominated by forest cover after quartile I and II.
The landscape is dominated by 3 to 4 wetlands which are major sources for irrigations and the
Southern Railway track cut across and pass nearby to the Beneficiation plant (Photo 5 to 20 &
Table 3.23.).
Photo. 5. Wetland for irrigation (150 59’ 28’’ & 760 29’ 59’’) Photo. 8. Narihalli Nala (Tugabhadra stream) 150
00’ 6.84’’, & 760 30’ 40.78’’)
Photo. 6. Areca nut planted wherever wetlands nearby Photo. 9. Lower side of wetland luxuriantly gown
paddy fields
Photo. 7. Dry land agriculture landscape Photo. 10. Dryland agriculture within Mango
orchards
Photo. 11. Forest department planted forest (domainted Photo. 13. Dense mixed forest
species Hardwickia sp)
Photo. 12. Agricutlure : Banana plantation Photo. 14 Agriculture: Red chilly
3.7.3.1 Floral Assessment

Trees: Total 68 species recorded, out of 68 species from Buffer area. Table 3.24.The higher
frequency species in buffer area were Dolichandrone atrovirens, Cassia siamea, Pongamia
pinnata , Acacia nilotica, Prosopis juliflora, Ficus benghalensis, Ficus religiosa and Zizyphus
mauritiana..
Table 3.24. Trees species recorded within buffer area of 10-km
Sl.No Species Name Family Abundance Density Frequency (%)

1 Buchanania lanzan Anacardiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
2 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
3 Plumeria acutifolia Apocynaceae 2 0.0005 2.5
4 Wrightia tinetoria Apocynaceae 3 0.001 7.5
5 Borassus flabellifer Arecaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
6 Phoenix fernifera Arecaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
7 Phoenix sylvestris Arecaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
8 Agave spp Asparagaceae 3 0.0008 2.5
9 Careya arborea Barringtoniaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
10 Dolichandrone atrovirens Bignoniaceae 2.33 0.0035 15
11 Stereospermum colais Bignoniaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
12 Bambox cieba Bombocaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
13 Cordia wallichii Boraginaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
14 Boswelia serrata Burseraceae 1 0.0003 2.5
15 Protium caudatum Burseraceae 2 0.0005 2.5
16 Cassia siamea Caesalpinaceae 1.83 0.0028 15
17 Delonix elata Caesalpiniaceae 2 0.0005 2.5
18 Gymnosporia senegalensis Celastraceae 3 0.0005 3.5
19 Cochlospermum religiosum Cochlospermaceae 1 0.0008 7.5
20 Anogeissus latifolia Combretaceae 2 0.0003 5
21 Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
22 Terminalia belerica Combretaceae 2 0.0005 2.5
23 Terminalia chebula Combretaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
24 Terminalia paniculata Combretaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
25 Terminalia tomentosa Combretaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
26 Shorea talura Dipterocarpaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
27 Diospyros melanoxylon Ebenaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
28 Diospyros montana Ebenaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
29 Bridelia retusa Euphorbiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
30 Mallotus philippinensis Euphorbiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5

31 Givotia rottleriformis Euphorbiaceae 2 0.0005 2.5
32 Abrus precatorius Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
33 Acacia catechu Fabaceae 3.6 0.0033 12.5
34 Acacia horrida Fabaceae 2 0.0003 2.5
35 Bauhinia racemosa Fabaceae 1.67 0.0013 7.5
36 Butea monosperm Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
37 Cassia fistula Fabaceae 1.33 0.001 7.5
38 Dalbergia latifolia Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
39 Dalbergia paniculata Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
40 Dichrostachys cinerea Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
41 Hardwickia binata Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
42 Pongamia pinnata Fabaceae 2.6 0.0065 25
43 Pterocarpus marsupium Fabaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
44 Tamarindus indica Fabaceae 1.6 0.002 12.5
45 Lagerstroemia parviflora Lythraceae 1 0.0003 2.5
46 Kydia calycina Malvaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
47 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae 2.67 0.01 37.5
48 Melia dubia Meliaceae 5.2 0.0008 12.2
49 Acacia leucophloea Mimosaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
50 Acacia nilotica Mimosaceae 1.38 0.0028 20
51 Albizia amara Mimosaceae 3 0.003 10
52 Prosopis juliflora Mimosaceae 6.18 0.034 55
53 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae 2.25 0.0023 22
54 Ficus religiosa Moraceae 1.43 0.0025 17.5
55 Eucalyptus glabra Myrtaceae 1 0.001 10
56 Decalepis hamiltonii Periplocaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
57 Zizyphus mauritiana Rhamanaceae 1.78 0.008 45
58 Canthium parviflora Rubiaceae 1.33 0.0003 7.5
59 Gardenia gummifera Rubiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
60 Morinda pubescens Rubiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
61 Chloroxylon swietenia Rutaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
62 Sapindus emarginatus Sapindaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
63 Bassia latifolia Sapotaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
64 Sterculia urens Sterculiaceae 2 0.0005 2.5
65 Sterculia villosa Sterculiaceae 2 0.0005 2.5
66 Holoptelea integrifolia Ulmaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
67 Premna tomentosa Verbenaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
68 Tectona gradis Verbenaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
Note ** Secondary information
Photo 15. Givotia rottleriformis Photo 18. Dodonaea viscosa
Photo 16. Tecoma stans Photo 19. Chloroxylon swietenia
Photo 17. Albizia amara Photo 20. Euphorbia tortilis

Shrubs: Total 27 species recorded within buffer area from both working plan and primary
observation (Table 3.25). Overall, data revealed that dominated species area Euphorbia tirucalli
Jatropha gossypifolia, Zizyphus jujuba and Vitex nigondo
Table 3.25. Shrub’s species recorded within buffer area of 10-km

Sl.
Species Name Family Abundance Density Frequency
No
1 Annona squamosa Annonaceae 1 0.0005 5
2 Miliusa montana Annonaceae 3 0.0003 2.5
3 Carissa carandas Apocynaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
4 Calotropis gigantia Asclepiadaceae 6.08 0.006 60
5 Cordia spp. Boraginaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
6 Opuntia clatior Cactaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
7 Opuntia dillenii Cactaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
8 Cassia auriculata Caesalpiniaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
9 Chromolaena odorata* Compositae 3 0.0003 2.5
10 Erythroxylum monogynum Erythroxylaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
11 Euphorbia tirucalli Euphorbiaceae 2.83 0.0015 15
12 Jatropha gossypifolia Euphorbiaceae 5.27 0.0055 55
13 Soymida febrifuga Meliaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
14 Eugenia mabaeoides Myrtaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
15 Zizyphus jujuba Rhamanaceae 3.33 0.0015 20
16 Canthium coromandelicum Rubiaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
17 Ixora parviflora Rubiaceae 2 0.0003 2.5
18 Atalantia monophylla Rutaceae 1.5 0.0005 5
19 Citrus lemon Rutaceae 3 0.0005 5
20 Santalum album Santalaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
21 Dodonaea viscosa Sapindaceae 2.5 0.001 10
22 Schleichera oleosa Sapindaceae 1 0.0003 2.5
23 Grewia abutifolia Tiliaceae 3 0.001 10
24 Lantana camara * Verbenaceae 3.25 0.001 10
25 Vitex nigondo Verbenaceae 4.86 0.0018 17.5
26 Bambusa bambos Poaceae Yes
27 Dendrocalamus spp Poaceae Yes
Note * Invasive species ** Secondary information
Herbs: Total 28 species reported including secondary information from working plan and
published information. Overall, dominated once are Barleria prionitis, Alternanthera pungens,
Asparagus racemosus, Parthenium hysterophorus, Acalypha indica, Acalypha lanceolata , Hyptis
suaveolens, Grewia tiliifolia and Stachytarpheta jamaicensis (Table 3.26).
Table 3.26. Herbs species recorded within buffer area of 10-km
Sl.
Species Name Family Abundance Density Frequency
No.
1 Barleria prionitis Acanthaceae 1.50 0.01 66.70
2 Lepidagathis cristata Acanthaceae 7.00 0.09 28.00
3 Achyranthes aspera Amaranthaceae 3.86 0.08 25.90
4 Alternanthera pungens Amaranthaceae 3.00 0.04 33.30
5 Asparagus racemosus Asparagaceae 1.00 0.00 100.00
6 Astraceae mullu Asteraceae 7.00 0.09 14.30
7 Parthenium spp Asteraceae 8.50 0.05 11.80
8 Cassia sp1 Caesalpinaceae 5.29 0.12 18.90
9 Cassia tora Caesalpinaceae 9.13 1.08 11.00
10 Bidens biternata Compositae 7.83 0.15 12.80
11 Parthenium hysterophorus Compositae 1.00 0.00 100.00
12 Acalypha indica Euphorbiaceae 2.00 0.01 50.00
13 Acalypha lanceolata Euphorbiaceae 2.00 0.01 50.00
14 Securinega virosa Euphorbiaceae 4.00 0.01 25.00
15 Hyptis suaveolens Lamiaceae 3.00 0.02 33.30
16 Ocimum sanctum Lamiaceae 3.92 0.15 25.50

17 Hibiscus ovalifolia Malvaceae 6.50 0.04 15.40
18 Sida cordifolia Malvaceae 5.00 0.02 20.00
19 Thespesia lampas Malvaceae 6.00 0.04 16.70
20 Mimosa hamata Mimosaceae 4.00 0.01 25.00
21 Mimosa pudica Mimosaceae 2.40 0.04 41.70
22 Grewia tiliifolia Tiliaceae 1.00 0.00 100.00
23 Stachytarpheta jamaicensis Verbenaceae 3.00 0.01 33.30
24 Tribulus terrestris Zygophyllaceae 5.60 0.09 17.90
25 Cenchrus ciliaris Poaceae Yes
26 Heteropogon contortus Poaceae Yes
27 Cymbopogan martini Poaceae Yes
28 Cyperus rotundus Cyperaceae Yes
Totally 47 families of 123 plant species were recorded within the core and buffer area. The
dominant species recorded belonged to the families of Caesalpinaceae, Combretaceae,
Euphorbiaceae, Mimosaceae, Rubiaceae and Verbenaceae (Appendix I).
Appendix I. List of plants with their scientific name, family and life form found in 10-km
radius and core area
Sl. No Species Name Family Lifeform
1 Buchanania lanzan Anacardiaceae Tree
2 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Tree
3 Plumeria acutifolia Apocynaceae Tree
4 Wrightia tinetoria Apocynaceae Tree
5 Borassus flabellifer Arecaceae Tree
6 Phoenix fernifera Arecaceae Tree
7 Phoenix sylvestris Arecaceae Tree
8 Agave spp Asparagaceae Tree
9 Careya arborea Barringtoniaceae Tree
10 Dolichandrone atrovirens Bignoniaceae Tree
11 Stereospermum colais Bignoniaceae Tree
12 Bambox cieba Bombocaceae Tree
13 Cordia wallichii Boraginaceae Tree
14 Boswelia serrata Burseraceae Tree
15 Protium caudatum Burseraceae Tree
16 Cassia siamea Caesalpinaceae Tree
17 Delonix elata Caesalpiniaceae Tree
18 Gymnosporia senegalensis Celastraceae Tree
19 Cochlospermum religiosum Cochlospermaceae Tree
20 Anogeissus latifolia Combretaceae Tree
21 Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae Tree
22 Terminalia belerica Combretaceae Tree
23 Terminalia chebula Combretaceae Tree
24 Terminalia paniculata Combretaceae Tree
25 Terminalia tomentosa Combretaceae Tree
26 Shorea talura Dipterocarpaceae Tree
27 Diospyros melanoxylon Ebenaceae Tree
28 Diospyros montana Ebenaceae Tree
29 Bridelia retusa Euphorbiaceae Tree
30 Mallotus philippinensis Euphorbiaceae Tree
31 Givotia rottleriformis Euphorbiaceae Tree
32 Abrus precatorius Fabaceae Tree
33 Acacia catechu Fabaceae Tree
34 Acacia horrida Fabaceae Tree
35 Bauhinia racemosa Fabaceae Tree

36 Butea monosperm Fabaceae Tree
37 Cassia fistula Fabaceae Tree
38 Dalbergia latifolia Fabaceae Tree
39 Dalbergia paniculata Fabaceae Tree
40 Dichrostachys cinerea Fabaceae Tree
41 Hardwickia binata Fabaceae Tree
42 Pongamia pinnata Fabaceae Tree
43 Pterocarpus marsupium Fabaceae Tree
44 Tamarindus indica Fabaceae Tree
45 Lagerstroemia parviflora Lythraceae Tree
46 Kydia calycina Malvaceae Tree
47 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae Tree
48 Melia dubia Meliaceae Tree
49 Acacia leucophloea Mimosaceae Tree
50 Acacia nilotica Mimosaceae Tree
51 Albizia amara Mimosaceae Tree
52 Prosopis juliflora Mimosaceae Tree
53 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Tree
54 Ficus religiosa Moraceae Tree
55 Eucalyptus glabra Myrtaceae Tree
56 Decalepis hamiltonii Periplocaceae Tree
57 Zizyphus mauritiana Rhamanaceae Tree
58 Canthium parviflora Rubiaceae Tree
59 Gardenia gummifera Rubiaceae Tree
60 Morinda pubescens Rubiaceae Tree
61 Chloroxylon swietenia Rutaceae Tree
62 Sapindus emarginatus Sapindaceae Tree
63 Bassia latifolia Sapotaceae Tree
64 Sterculia urens Sterculiaceae Tree
65 Sterculia villosa Sterculiaceae Tree
66 Holoptelea integrifolia Ulmaceae Tree
67 Premna tomentosa Verbenaceae Tree
68 Tectona gradis Verbenaceae Tree
69 Annona squamosa Annonaceae Shrub
70 Miliusa montana Annonaceae Shrub
71 Carissa carandas Apocynaceae Shrub
72 Calotropis gigantia Asclepiadaceae Shrub
73 Cordia spp. Boraginaceae Shrub
74 Opuntia clatior Cactaceae Shrub
75 Opuntia dillenii Cactaceae Shrub
76 Cassia auriculata Caesalpiniaceae Shrub
77 Chromolaena odorata* Compositae Shrub
78 Erythroxylum monogynum Erythroxylaceae Shrub
79 Euphorbia tirucalli Euphorbiaceae Shrub
80 Jatropha gossypifolia Euphorbiaceae Shrub
81 Soymida febrifuga Meliaceae Shrub
82 Eugenia mabaeoides Myrtaceae Shrub
83 Zizyphus jujuba Rhamanaceae Shrub
84 Canthium coromandelicum Rubiaceae Shrub
85 Ixora parviflora Rubiaceae Shrub
86 Atalantia monophylla Rutaceae Shrub
87 Citrus lemon Rutaceae Shrub
88 Santalum album Santalaceae Shrub
89 Dodonaea viscosa Sapindaceae Shrub
90 Schleichera oleosa Sapindaceae Shrub
91 Grewia abutifolia Tiliaceae Shrub
92 Lantana camara * Verbenaceae Shrub

93 Vitex nigondo Verbenaceae Shrub
94 Bambusa bambos Poaceae Shrub
95 Dendrocalamus spp Poaceae Shrub
96 Barleria prionitis Acanthaceae Herb
97 Lepidagathis cristata Acanthaceae Herb
98 Achyranthes aspera Amaranthaceae Herb
99 Alternanthera pungens Amaranthaceae Herb
100 Asparagus racemosus Asparagaceae Herb
101 Astraceae mullu Asteraceae Herb
102 Parthenium spp Asteraceae Herb
103 Cassia sp1 Caesalpinaceae Herb
104 Cassia tora Caesalpinaceae Herb
105 Bidens biternata Compositae Herb
106 Parthenium hysterophorus Compositae Herb
107 Acalypha indica Euphorbiaceae Herb
108 Acalypha lanceolata Euphorbiaceae Herb
109 Securinega virosa Euphorbiaceae Herb
110 Hyptis suaveolens Lamiaceae Herb
111 Ocimum sanctum Lamiaceae Herb
112 Hibiscus ovalifolia Malvaceae Herb
113 Sida cordifolia Malvaceae Herb
114 Thespesia lampas Malvaceae Herb
115 Mimosa hamata Mimosaceae Herb
116 Mimosa pudica Mimosaceae Herb
117 Grewia tiliifolia Tiliaceae Herb
118 Stachytarpheta jamaicensis Verbenaceae Herb
119 Tribulus terrestris Zygophyllaceae Herb
120 Cenchrus ciliaris Poaceae Herb
121 Heteropogon contortus Poaceae Herb
122 Cymbopogan martini Poaceae Herb
123 Cyperus rotundus Cyperaceae Herb
Table. 3.27. Agricultural crops with 10 km radius from the core areas
Sl. No Species list Land use
1 Red chilly Agriculture
2 Rice Agriculture
3 Sunflower Agriculture
4 Cotton Agriculture
5 Groundnut Agriculture
6 Jowar Agriculture
7 Banana Agriculture
8 Mango orchards Agriculture
9 Areca nuts Agriculture
10 Cereals Agriculture
11 Vegetables Agriculture
The buffer zone of the project site is predominately (2/3rd ) covered by open scrub and dry
deciduous reserve forest such as Table 3.28.
Table 3.28. List of reserve forest patches of 10-km radius

Distance (km) from Distance (km) from
Sl. No. Forest/Protected Area name Beneficiation (km) Tailing disposal site
(km)
1 Kumaraswami Betta Reserve Forest 00.68Km 3 km
2 Ramgarh Reserve Forest 02.30Km 7km
3 Somalapura RF 00.47Km 2.3km
4 Nari halla dam 0.5 Km 2.3km
5 Bandri lake 06.40Km >10km
6 Ankamanhalli lake 03.70Km
7 Kereyaginahalli RF 5km
The plant species recorded in the study area were grouped into three categories, i.e., endemic,
rare, threatened and keystone species (Table 3.29). Overall, 4 important species were recorded
within the buffer area, of which 3 species Keystone and one under IUCN vulnerable category
species were recorded within the core area.
Table 3.29. Endemic, Keystone and Threatened species recorded in 10-km radius area
Core/buffer
Sl. No. Species Family Habitat Status
region
1 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Buffer Open/Villages Keystone
2 Ficus glomerata Moraceae Buffer Open / Agricultural Keystone
3 Ficus religiosa Moraceae Buffer Open/ Village temple Keystone
4 Santalum alba Santalaceae Buffer Open scrub forest Vulnerable
3.7.4 Biodiversity: Fauna

The forest diversity due to variation altitudinal effects, soil characters, and slope aspect etc.
Palatable grasses and larger stretchers contiguous of forest area make this region suitable for
ungulates. Along with ungulates one also comes across carnivores like Leopard, civet, common
mongoose, etc. However, due to various types of disturbances, pressures, habitat alternation due to
land use change the destruction of the fauna found in this area is largely reserve forest.
Commonly seen mammals are Indian hare, Animals and birds in the study area were documented.
Actual sighting indict evidence (Pallets, dungs, droppings scats, mound, etc.). Calls (birds as well as
animals) Nesting/roosting sites (birds, burrows for small mammals) and secondary sources and
published literature were also documented. The records for the birds, mammals and other faunal
groups were made at the same site where vegetation sampling was carried out. Most of the records
of the mammalian and herpeto fauna are opportunistic, nonetheless very useful to understand
habitat specific and interrelationship between certain floral and faunal elements and also between
certain geological and faunal features. The checklist of mammals, reptiles, frogs, birds, & butterflies
from the study area is given below.
Totally, 13 species of mammals were recorded within the 10-km radius (Table. 3.30); of which one
arboreal mammal – Squirrel, Bonnet Macaque, and Hanuman Langur and remaining were ground
dwellers. The carnivorous’ Leopard, and omnivorous Mongoose were hinted by rural communities.
The most common species sighted by us and local communities are Indian hare, Rats, Wild boar. As
per IUCN status, 1 species vulnerable and rest were lower risk, but Indian Wildlife Protection Act
Schedule species under 1 belonged to Schedule-I, 6 species to Schedule-II, one to Schedule III and
2 to Schedule IV and 3 to Schedule V.
Table 3.30. List of the mammal species recorded within 10-km radius
Sl. IUCN/WPA
Common name Scientific name Family
No Schedule
1 Common leopard* Panthera pardus Felidae Lower risk/I
2 Cat Felis chaus Felidae Lower risk/II
3 Civet* Paradoxurus hermaphroditus Viverridae Lower risk/II
4 Jackal Canis aureus Canidae Lower risk/II
5 Indian Gerbil Tatera indica Muridae Lower risk/V
6 Rat Rattus rattus Muridae Lower risk/V
7 Mongoose Herpestes auropunctatus Herpestidae Lower risk/IV
8 Shrew Suncus murinus Soricidae Lower risk/V
9 Squirrel Funambulus palmarum Sciuridae Lower risk/IV
10 Sloth Bear Melursus ursinus Ursidae Vulnerable/II
11 Boar Sus scrofa Suidae Lower risk/III
12 Bonnet Macaque Macaca radiate Cercopithecidae Lower risk/II
13 Hanuman Langur Semnopithecus entellus Cercopithecidae Lower risk/II
Note * Secondary sources (literature and Forest working plan)
Totally 16 reptile species were recorded within the buffer areas (Table 3.31), of which, 10 species
of snakes and 6 species of lizards were recorded. Indian rock python and Cobra were identified
as rare species under the IUCN status and most of them were common as per the IUCN status. As
per the Wildlife Protection Act, 2 Schedule I, 4 Schedule II, and 7 Schedule IV and 3 Schedule
VII species were recorded within the 10-km radius of the ML.
Table 3.31. Reptiles’ checklist in 10-km radius
Sl. IUCN/WPA
No. schedule
1 Giant Leaf-toed Gecko Hemidactylus giganteous Gekkonidae Lower risk/IV
2 Rock Agama Psammophilus dorslis Agamidae Lower risk/ VII
3 Calotes Calotes rouxii Agamidae Lower risk/ VII
4 Chameleaon Chameleo zeylanicus Chamaeleonidae Vulnerable/ II
5 Lizard Calotes versicolor Agamidae Lower risk/ VII
6 Monitor lizard Varanus bengalensis Varanidae Vulnerable/ II
7 Spotted supple skink Lygosoma punctata Scincidae Lower risk/ IV
8 Cobra Naja naja Elapidae Rare/I
9 Checkered Keelback Xenochrophis piscator Colubridae Lower risk/IV
10 Krait Bungarus caeruleus Elapidae Lower risk/ IV

11 Indian Rock Python* Python molurus Pythonidae Rare/I
12 Indian rat Snake Ptyas muscosa Colubridae Schedule II
13 Russell's viper Daboia russelii Viperidae Schedule II
14 Saw scaled Viper Echis carinathus Viperidae Schedule IV
15 Green Whip snake Coluber jugularis Colubridae Lower risk/IV
16 Wolf Snake Lycodon capicunus Colubridae Lower risk/IV
Note * Secondary sources (literature and Forest working plan)
Totally, 4 species of frogs were reported within various habitats ranging from Agricultural field,
scrub jungle, wetland (Table 3.32). As per WPA, 4 species were recorded under Schedule IV and
rest all common and least concern.
Table 3.32. List of toads and amphibians reported within 10-km radius around NIOM
Sl. IUCN / WPA
No. schedule
1 Common Indian toad Bufo melanostictus Bufonidae LC/IV
2 Brown leaping frog* Indirana semipalmata Ranidae LC/IV
3 Indian burrowing frog* Tomopterna breviceps Ranidae LC/IV
4 Dobson's burrowing frog* Tomopterna dobsoni Dicroglossidae LC/IV
Note: LC - Least concern, Wildlife Protection Act –Schedule-IV, * Secondary sources (literature
and Forest working plan)
Totally, 49 species of birds were recorded within habitats ranging from Agricultural field to scrub
thorny forest (Table 3.33). About 47 species were resident locally. Out of these, 1 species were
locally migratory and 1 were vulnerable species. As per the Wildlife Protection Act, 1 species
belonged to Schedule I and 48 species to Schedule IV.
Table 3.33. List of birds recorded within 10-km radius
Sl. IUCN/WPA
No. Schedules
1 Jungle babbler Turdoides striatus Timaliinae R/IV
2 Coppersmith barbet Megalaima haemacephala Capitonidae R/IV
3 Small green bee-eater Merops orientalis Meropidae R/IV
4 Red-vented bulbul Pycnonotus cafer Pycnonotidae R/IV
5 Red-whiskered bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus Pycnonotidae R/IV
6 White browed bulbul Pycnonotus luteolus Pycnonotidae R/IV
7 Pied bushchat Saxicola caprata Turdinae R/IV
8 Little cormorant Phalacrocorax niger Phalacrocoracidae R/IV
9 Lesser coucal* Centropus bengalensis Cuculidae U/IV
10 House crow Corvus splendens Corvidae R/IV
11 Jungle crow Corvus macrorhynchos Corvidae R/IV
12 Spotted dove Streptopelia chinensis Columbidae R/IV
13 Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus Dicruridae R/IV
14 Cattle egret Bubulcus ibis Ardeidae R/IV
15 Large egret Ardea alba Ardeidae R/IV
16 Little egret Egretta garzetta Ardeidae R/IV
17 Median egret Mesophoyx intermedia Ardeidae M/IV
18 Tickell's flowerpecker Dicaeum erythrorynchos Dicaeidae R/IV
19 Pond heron Ardeola grayii Ardeidae R/IV
20 Grey Junglefowl Gallus sonneratii Phasianidae R/IV
21 Small blue kingfisher Alcedo atthis Alcedinidae R/IV
22 White breasted kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis Alcedinidae R/IV

23 Black kite Milvus migrans Accipitridae R/IV
24 Brahminy kite Haliastur indus Accipitridae R/IV
25 Asian koel Eudynamys scolopacea Cuculidae R/IV
26 Rewd wattled lapwing Vanellus indicus Charadriidae R/IV
27 Small greenbilled malkoha Phaenicophaeus viridirostris Cuculidae R/IV
28 Common myna Acridotheres tristis Sturnidae R/IV
29 Jungle myna Acidotheres fuscus Sturnidae R/IV
30 Indian jungle nightjar Caprimulgus indicus Caprimulgidae RM/IV
31 Spotted owlet Athene brama Strigidae R/IV
32 Plum headed parakeet * Psittacula cyanocephala Psittacidae R/IV
33 Rose ringed parakeet Psittacula krameri Psittacidae R/IV
34 Indian peafowl Pavo cristatus Phasianidae R/I
35 Paddy field pipit Anthus rufulus Motacillidae R/IV
36 Indian robin Saxicoloides fulicata Turdinae R/IV
37 Oriental magpie robin Copsychus saularis Turdinae R/IV
38 Indian roller Coracias benghalensis Coraciidae R/IV
39 Indian shag Phalacrocorax fuscicollis Phalacrocoracidae R/IV
40 Common badius Accipiter badius Accipitridae R/IV
41 House sparrow Passer domesticus Passeridae R/IV
42 Purple sunbird Nectarinia asiatica Nectariniidae R/IV
43 Purple sunbird Nectarinia zeylonica Nectariniidae R/IV
44 Common swallow Hirundo rustica Hirundinidae R/IV
45 Red rumped swallow Hirundo daurica Hirudinidae R/IV
46 Common tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius Sylviinae R/IV
47 Indian treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda Corvidae R/IV
48 Large pied wagtail Motacilla maderaspatensis Motacillidae R/IV
49 White waterhen Amaurornis phoenicurus Rallidae R/IV
Note : M - Migratory, R - Resident, U - unclear, NT - Near threatened, V - Vulnerable. WPA
Schedule –I – IV, * Secondary sources (literature and Forest working plan)
Totally 12 species of butterflies were recorded within various habitats such as open field,
agricultural field, degraded habitat, scrub forest, open grassland, and near settlements (Table
3.34). Out of these 2 species belonged to schedule-I, 2 to Schedule-II and 9 Schedule-IV.
Table 3.34. List of butterfly species recorded within 10-km radius
Sl. IUCN /
Common Name Scientific name Family
No. WPA schedule
1 Indian cabbage white Pieris canidia Pieridae LC/IV
2 Common cerulean Jamides celeno Lycaenidae LC/IV
3 Tip crimson Colotis danae Pieridae LC/IV
4 Common Indian Crow* Euploea core Danainae LC/II
5 Danaid eggfly Hypolimnas misippus Nymphalidae LC/ IV
6 Common emigrant Catopsilla pomona Coliadinae LC/IV
7 Common grass Yellow Eurema hecabe Coliadinae LC/IV
8 Common Jezebel Delias eucharis Pierinae LC/IV
9 Great orange tip Hebomoia glaucippe Pieridae LC/IV
10 Crimson rose* Pachiopta hector Papilionidae LC/ I
11 Glassy tiger* Parantica aglea Nymphalidae LC/ II
12 Common crow Euploea core Nymphalidae LC/ IV
Note * Secondary sources (literature, field gudie and Forest working plan)
3.8 Socioeconomic Environment

The data for the study is collected in December 2021 using methods like random sample survey
of households, in-depth interviews and Focus Group Discussions (FGDs). Data on socioeconomic
status of population have been collected by using random sample survey of households. Data on
the infrastructure facilities have been collected from the village elders and local officials.
Assessment of minimum needs of the community has been collected using FGDs and in-depth
interviews. Data on morbidity pattern have been collected from any one or more than one heath
institutions (PHC or CHC or Clinic or Dispensary) in the buffer zone. Data on village population,
caste composition, literacy status, labour force participation, occupational classification and
industrial classification of workers have been collected from Census 2011.
An attempt is also made to project population characteristics for 2021 by extrapolating Census
data 2011 of the district in which buffer zone is located. The projections indicate only the
probable levels the characteristics the population would attain by 2021. The analysis is based on
the results of the census 2011, projections 2021 and the survey 2021.
Sample Design: Data on population size of village from census 2011 have been used for
selection of villages. 4 villages out of 25 villages were selected for sample survey. 100
households from the selected villages in buffer zone were interviewed. The Sandur town has been
excluded from the sampling. The selected villages and the number of households selected are
given in Table 3.35.
Table 3.35: Villages and number of households selected for study.
Villages selected Number of households selected

Yeswantanagar 35
Somalapura 20
Ankammanahal 15
Bandri 30
Total 100
All the households in the selected villages were listed two weeks prior to data collection by our
staff working in the buffer zone. The required number of households has been randomly selected
using systematic simple random sampling method with equal probability. The data have been
collected in the month of December, 2021. The FAE was present while data was being collected.
The data processing has been done using the Statistical Package for Social Science (SPSS).
Methodology of Data Collection:
 Data on socioeconomic status of population have been collected by random sample survey
of households.
 Data on the infrastructure facilities have been collected from the village elders and local
officials.
 Data on minimum needs assessment at community level have been collected using FGDs
and in-depth interviews.
Data on morbidity pattern are collected from the health institutions and medical practitioners in
and around the buffer zone. A reference period of three months has been taken.
3.8.1 Composition and size of families
Demographic status:
There are 25 villages and 2 small towns in the buffer zone. These villages and towns are located
in Sandur taluka of Bellary district in Karnataka state. The total population of these villages and
towns is 131,648 according to census 2011 and 151,278 according to projections for 2021 (Table
3.36A).
The village population size varies widely. It ranges from a minimum of 757 persons in
Thippanamaradi to a maximum of 7,421 persons in Chornur. Among towns, the population is
6,602 in Donimalai and 37,431 in Sandur. The sex ratio is 965 females per 1000 males according
to 2011 census and 1,058 according to Survey (Table 3.36B).
The average number of persons per household is very similar in buffer zone and the district in
census data at 5.2 and lower in survey at 4.6.
Comparison with district: The sex ratio and the average number of persons per household are
the same between buffer zone and the district according to census 2011. But the survey results are
different - sex ratio is higher and average number of persons per household is found to be lower in
survey.
Table 3.36A: Population in buffer zone villages, 2011 Census.
Sex ratio
Number of
Village Male Female Total /(F/M per
households
1000)
Bandri 1313 3506 3600 7106 1027
Nidugurthi 593 1652 1626 3278 984
Mallapura 353 1267 1189 2456 938
Ankammanahal 374 1251 1211 2462 968
Devaramallapur 424 1320 1289 2609 977
Yeswanthanagar 1270 3608 3239 6847 898
Suseelnagar 854 2469 2508 4977 1016
Dowlatpur 471 1413 1351 2764 956
Krishnanagar 1354 3554 3473 7027 977
Bhujanganagar 1063 2813 2722 5535 968
Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) 701 1860 1746 3606 939
Sandur (TMC) 7562 19147 18284 37431 955
Donimalai Township (CT) 1660 3447 3225 6672 936
Kodihalli 330 920 887 1807 964
Somalapur 153 460 403 863 876
Hulikunta 73 273 829 821 1650 990
Chikkakeriyaginahalli 414 1107 1164 2271 1051
Hirekeriyaginahalli 690 1993 2010 4003 1009
Kalingeri 469 1369 1310 2679 957
Yerriahanahalli 680 1714 1758 3472 1026
Jiginahalli 264 748 669 1417 894
Thippanamaradi 146 372 385 757 1035
Sovenahalli 675 1849 1728 3577 935
Agrahara 674 2029 1901 3930 937
Genatikatte 196 558 527 1085 944
Chornur 1349 3692 3729 7421 1010

Bommagatta 706 2043 1903 3946 931
Buffer Zone 25011 66990 64658 131648 965
Bellary District 489118 1236954 1215641 2452595 983
Projections 2021
Buffer Zone 30260 80916 78362 159278 968
Bellary District 504339 1261849 1242237 2504085 984
Table 3.36B: Survey population in buffer zone villages, Survey 2021.
Number of Sex ration/(F/M
Village Male Female Total
households per 1000)
Buffer Zone 100 223 236 459 1058
Male
49%
51% Female
Figure 3.8: Sex Ration in Survey 2021

Inferences focusing need assessment:
The female population was higher in the study (Table 3.36B). A further in-depth study revealed
that male population migrates to larger cities in search of jobs. This has led to change the gender
ratio.An attempt was also made to understand lower gender ratio in Census 2011(Table 3.36A).
In general, there were more males than females in the buffer zone during Census 2011. This was
largely due to maternal mortality in reproductive ages.
Distribution of population by age and sex:
Table 3.36C: Percentage distribution of population by age and sex in buffer zone,
Survey 2021.
Age Male Female Total
0–4 9.8 10.0 9.9
5- 9 11.0 9.8 10.4
10-14 9.5 9.9 9.7
15-19 8.9 10.8 9.9
20-24 12.2 11.2 11.7
25-29 9.8 9.5 9.6
30-34 7.5 7.9 7.7
35-39 6.9 6.8 6.8
40-44 5.5 5.6 5.5
45-49 4.8 4.9 4.8
50-54 3.6 3.7 3.7
55-59 2.8 2.6 2.7
60-64 2.9 2.8 2.9
65-69 2.0 1.8 1.9
70-74 1.4 1.5 1.5
75-79 0.6 0.7 0.7
80+ 0.7 0.6 0.6
100.0 100.0 100.0
Total
(223) (236) (459)
Inferenences focusing need assessment:

About 20 per cent of the population is in school going age (5-14) needing supportive activities
like supply of school uniforms and books, transport to school, tuitions for children having
learning deficiency and supporting mid-day meal program and the like.
About 10 per cent of the population aged 15-19 is potential entrants into labour force. They can
be trained in vocational centers taking local needs of the industry into consideration.
About 64 per cent of the population is in the working age group (15-59). Many of them are in
need of employment, especially females. Therefore, feasible welfare schemes like milk dairy,
poultry, sheep rearing, piggery and the like should be encouraged through self help groups
(SHGs).
About 8 per cent of the population is elderly (60+) needing health and other assistance like
general health checkups, eye checkups, vision glasses and old age supporting equipment like
walking sticks, and the like.
Social Status:
The percentage distribution of population by caste from census 2011 and survey 2021 has been
presented in Tables 3.36D and 3.36E.
Table 3.36D: Percentage Distribution of Population by Broad Caste Groups in Buffer Zone,
2011 Census.
Village % SC % ST % Others Total
Bandri 12.2 49.2 38.6 100.0
Nidugurthi 12.7 49.1 38.2 100.0
Mallapura 4.8 63.4 31.8 100.0
Ankammanahal 8.7 85.2 6.1 100.0
Devaramallapur 33.7 0.7 65.7 100.0
Yeswanthanagar 10.0 22.4 67.6 100.0
Suseelnagar 63.1 14.2 22.6 100.0
Dowlatpur 15.0 2.9 82.1 100.0
Krishnanagar 7.8 4.0 88.2 100.0
Bhujanganagar 30.4 4.9 64.7 100.0
Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) 23.3 18.6 58.1 100.0
Sandur (TMC) 15.5 16.1 68.5 100.0
Donimalai Township (CT) 21.9 13.6 64.6 100.0
Kodihalli 0.6 0.0 99.4 100.0
Somalapur 4.6 33.6 61.8 100.0
Hulikunta 73 22.5 52.0 25.5 100.0
Chikkakeriyaginahalli 15.7 30.6 53.7 100.0
Hirekeriyaginahalli 11.9 77.0 11.1 100.0
Kalingeri 17.9 37.6 44.5 100.0
Yerriahanahalli 9.8 55.3 35.0 100.0
Jiginahalli 12.7 17.1 70.2 100.0
Thippanamaradi 11.9 44.1 44.0 100.0
Sovenahalli 23.6 16.2 60.2 100.0
Agrahara 7.3 70.8 21.9 100.0
Genatikatte 38.7 25.9 35.4 100.0
Chornur 12.7 41.5 45.8 100.0
Bommagatta 29.2 17.6 53.2 100.0
Buffer Zone 17.5 26.6 55.9 100.0
Bellary District 21.1 18.4 60.5 100.0

Projections 2021
Buffer Zone 18.2 25.2 56.6 100.0
Bellary District 21.5 18.5 60.1 100.0
Table 3.36E: Percentage Distribution of Survey Population by Broad Caste Groups in

Buffer Zone, Survey 2021.
Village % SC % ST % Others Total
Buffer Zone 18.1 19.3 62.6 100.0
18.1
% SC
% ST
62.6 19.3
% Others
Figure 3.9: Percentage distribution of Broad Caste Groups Survey 2021
The overall percentage of SC population in the buffer zone is 18 per cent according to census
2011 and the survey, 2021. The percentage of SC population is not uniform across villages. It
varies from a minimum of 0.6 per cent in Kodihalli and a maximum of 63.1 per cent in
Suseelnagar. The SC population is less than 5 per cent in 3 villages; between 5 and 10 per cent in
4 villages; between 10 to 15 per cent in 8 villages and one town; and more than 15 per cent in 10
villages and two towns.
The percentage of ST population is higher in the buffer zone is more in Census 2011 projections
than in survey, 2021. The percentage of ST population in the buffer zone is around 25 per cent
according to census and around 19 per cent according to survey. The percentage of ST population
is not the same and varies from zero in Kodihalli to 85.2 per cent in Ankammanahal. The
percentage of ST population is less than 5 per cent in 5 villages, between 10 and 20 per cent in 5
villages and 2 towns; and more than 20 per cent in 15 villages.
Comparison with district: The percentage of SC population is lower by about 3 percentage
points in buffer zone than in the district and the percentage of ST population is higher by about 5
percentage points in buffer zone than in the district according to census.
The SC population is almost the same in buffer zone according to census and the survey.
Inference focusing need assessment: There is substantial SC and ST population in buffer zone
which require special focus on developmental activities – education, health camps, water supply
and sanitation facilities and the like.
3.8.2 Educational Status

Literacy status: The literacy rates from census 2011 and survey 2021 have been presented in
Tables 3.36F and 3.36G. The literacy rates are computed for the population age 5+.
About 68 per cent of the population is literate according to census and 71 per cent according to
survey. But, the projections indicated that the literacy rates are comparable to the survey levels.
The literacy rates vary among villages from 41 per cent in Ankammanahal to 79 per cent in
Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli).
As observed, 5 villages namely, Ankammanahal, Devaramallapur, Suseelnagar, Bommagatta and
Sovenahalli, have very low literacy rates of less than 55 per cent in buffer zone. These villages
need special attention in improving school attendance.
The literacy rates are higher among males than females. The difference between male and female
literacy rates are the same between census and the survey at about 18 percentage points. The
difference, however, varies among villages from 14 percentage points Chornur to 29 in
Ankammanahal. On an average, males and females have attended 8 years of schooling according
to survey.
Comparison with District: The literacy rates, in general, are low among females than males in
buffer zone and in district. The lower literacy rates in the district and buffer zone compared to the
state is because of high composition of SC and ST population in the district and buffer zone.
Inference focusing need assessment: The welfare programmes in support of literacy rates should
be implemented in villages, especially, where the literacy rates are low by supplying school
uniforms, books, transport and this will likely boost school attendance by decreasing school
dropout rates. Also, there is a need for introducing vocational courses suitable to mining industry
to generate employment ready labour force.
Table 3.36F: Literacy Rates in Buffer Zone, 2011 Census.
Bandri 63.9 47.6 55.6
Nidugurthi 69.4 50.1 59.7
Mallapura 78.9 49.9 64.9
Ankammanahal 55.7 26.3 41.2
Devaramallapur 58.4 42.7 50.5
Yeswanthanagar 85.3 65.4 75.9
Suseelnagar 61.5 43.9 52.7
Dowlatpur 71.1 56.1 63.9
Krishnanagar 72.9 58.4 65.8
Bhujanganagar 82.5 59.7 71.3
Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) 89.4 68.0 79.0
Sandur (TMC) 85.7 69.9 78.0
Donimalai Township (CT) 94.3 83.0 88.9
Kodihalli 75.8 52.3 64.2
Somalapur 84.8 65.7 75.9
Hulikunta 73 69.3 53.4 61.5
Chikkakeriyaginahalli 77.8 57.0 67.3
Hirekeriyaginahalli 74.4 50.9 62.6
Kalingeri 77.8 54.7 66.6

Yerriahanahalli 77.7 53.3 65.3
Jiginahalli 78.1 54.2 66.7
Thippanamaradi 73.6 44.8 59.2
Sovenahalli 64.1 44.4 54.6
Agrahara 68.8 45.6 57.6
Genatikatte 72.7 52.4 62.8
Chornur 65.0 50.9 57.9
Bommagatta 63.1 44.1 54.0
Buffer Zone 77.3 58.9 68.2
Bellary District 76.6 58.1 67.4
Projections 2021
Buffer zone 79.1 61.9 70.6
Table 3.36G: Literacy Rates in Buffer Zone, Survey 2021.

Literacy rates 79.6 62.8 71.3
Mean years of schooling 8.2 7.9 8.0
62.8 Male
79.6 Female
Figure 3.10: Percentage Literacy, Survey 2021
3.8.3 Homestead land
Of the 33,727 hectare of land area in buffer zone, 13.4 per cent is being used for homestead.
3.8.4. Employment
Employments Status: The labour force participation rates (percentage of workers to the total
population) from the census 2011 and survey 2021 have been presented in Tables 3.37A and
3.37B.
About 41 of the total population is in labour force in the buffer zone according to census against
35 pr cent in survey. The labour force participation rates vary among villages according to census
from 31.5 per cent in Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) to 58.6 per cent in Genatikatte. This variation is
due to large variation among male and female participation rates.
The male labour force participation rates vary from 45.7 per cent in Somalapur to 62.9 per cent in
Thippanamaradi, a difference of 17 percentage points.
The female labour force participation rates vary from 9.2 per cent in Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) to
58.6 per cent in Genatikatte, a difference of 49 percentage points. The levels of work participation
rates in 2021 remains the same according to census projections, excepting marginal decrease
among females.
The male work participation rates are higher (54.4 per cent) than female (26.1 per cent) in buffer
zone according to census and also survey. The high male work participation is also higher among
males than females in all villages excepting very few.
Comparison with district: The male participation rates are very similar in buffer zone between
census and survey but, female participation rates are lower in buffer zone (census and survey)
compared to the district according to census.
Inference focusing need assessment: In general, female labour force participation is lower than
males. Some welfare programs like milk dairy and poultry etc., can be designed. Villages having
low labour force participation among males/females can be selected for implementation of
welfare programs.
Table 3.37A: Labour force Participation Rates (% workers) in Buffer Zone, 2011 Census.
Bandri 56.5 44.7 50.5
Nidugurthi 53.1 53.9 53.5
Mallapura 60.9 45.1 53.3
Ankammanahal 55.7 33.9 45.0
Devaramallapur 55.9 41.6 48.8
Yeswanthanagar 49.7 15.9 33.7
Suseelnagar 53.2 26.6 39.8
Dowlatpur 60.1 21.9 41.4
Krishnanagar 56.4 16.0 36.5
Bhujanganagar 56.1 19.7 38.2
Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) 52.4 9.2 31.5
Sandur (TMC) 52.3 11.4 32.3
Donimalai Township (CT) 55.4 10.7 33.8
Kodihalli 55.9 44.8 50.4
Somalapur 45.7 18.4 32.9
Hulikunta 73 51.0 54.8 52.9
Chikkakeriyaginahalli 58.2 51.8 54.9
Hirekeriyaginahalli 56.3 50.7 53.5
Kalingeri 55.7 47.4 51.6
Yerriahanahalli 59.5 37.0 48.1
Jiginahalli 61.2 30.8 46.9
Thippanamaradi 62.9 43.4 53.0
Sovenahalli 54.6 45.8 50.4
Agrahara 55.9 51.8 53.9
Genatikatte 58.6 58.6 58.6
Chornur 52.8 25.7 39.2
Bommagatta 54.5 27.0 41.2
Buffer Zone 54.4 26.1 40.5
Projected 2021
Buffer zone 54.6 25.3 40.3
Bellary 57.1 33.8 45.6
Table 3.37B: Labour force Participation Rates in Buffer Zone, Survey 2021.
Buffer zone 53.2% 18.1% 35.2
18.1
Male
53.2
Figure 3.11: Labour-force Participation Percentage, Survey 2021

Industrial status: The local population depends upon agriculture. The percentage distribution of
workers by industry according to census 2011 and projections from census data is presented in
Table 3.37C. Of all workers, 52 per cent in buffer zone and 60 per cent in district are engaged in
agriculture sector of the economy. As per Census 2011. However this pattern has marginally
shifted towards other occupation as per projections. Agriculture is dominated by small and
medium farmers. About 90 per cent of the cultivation depends upon rain and the rest 9.9 per cent
is irrigated by small dams, tanks and bore wells. The cultivation depends upon rainfall and
vagaries of weather. So, the household income is very low.
Comparison with district: Majority population is dependent on agriculture in both buffer zone
and in the district. In the district 60 per cent of all workers are engaged in agriculture sector.
Inference focusing need assessment: There is a need to revamp agriculture by supplying high
yielding varieties suitable for dry areas. The income of the households can be improved by
providing alternate means of occupation such as small businesses, animal husbandry, cottage
industries etc.
Table 3.37C: Percentage distribution of workers in Buffer zone and in Bellary Rural by
industry, Census 2011 and 2021 (Projected).
Census 2011 Male Female Total

Buffer zone
Cultivators 27.5 22.6 26.0
Agriculture labourers 15.6 48.1 25.9
Household industry 2.2 3.2 2.5
Others 54.7 26.1 45.6
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
Bellary
Others 47.4 23.4 38.5
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
Projected 2021
Buffer Zone
Others 56.9 28.2 48.0
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
District
Others 48.3 24.7 39.6
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
Village level industrial status: The dependence on agriculture or the percentage of workers as
cultivators and agriculture labourers varies across villages and towns in the buffer zone. The
percentage of workers in agriculture sector is presented in Table 3.37D. The percentage who has
engaged in agriculture sector out of all workers varies from 1.9 per cent in Deogiri
(Subbrayanahalli) to 97.5 per cent in Hulikunta. The percentage of workers in agriculture sector is
more than 80 per cent in all the towns in buffer zone.
Comparison with district: The percentage of workers engaged in agriculture sector is higher in
buffer zone than in the district.
Inference focusing need assessment: The dependence on agriculture is considerable in buffer
zone. Some welfare programmes for farmers and agriculture labourers and vocational training for
youth should be initiated.
Table 3.37D: Percentage of agricultural workers by village, Census 2011.
Village Total
Bandri 64.5
Nidugurthi 76.9
Mallapura 93.3
Ankammanahal 75.3
Devaramallapur 68.0
Yeswanthanagar 29.1
Suseelnagar 63.3
Dowlatpur 53.6
Krishnanagar 32.1
Bhujanganagar 61.5
Deogiri (Subbrayanahalli) 1.9
Sandur (TMC) 20.0
Donimalai Township (CT) 0.8
Kodihalli 73.1
Somalapur 43.2
Hulikunta 73 97.5
Chikkakeriyaginahalli 81.6
Hirekeriyaginahalli 87.6
Kalingeri 82.4
Yerriahanahalli 56.6
Jiginahalli 64.2
Thippanamaradi 67.8
Sovenahalli 88.5
Agrahara 89.5
Genatikatte 90.9
Chornur 57.9
Bommagatta 52.9
Buffer Zone 51.9
Bellary District 59.5
Projections 2021
Buffer zone 50.1
Bellary 58.4
3.8.5 Information on agriculture situation
High dependency on agriculture is due to lack of economic opportunities outside agriculture.
Also, a high concentration of economically and socially weaker section of the population like SCs
and STs coupled with low literacy.
The percentage distribution of households by size of land holdings from the survey 2021 is
presented in Table 3.18. It can be observed that about 50 per cent of all households do not have
land for cultivation. Another 50 per cent have reported owning land. Of them, 29 per cent have
less than one hectare, followed by 17 per cent between one and 2.5 hectares and the rest 4 per
cent more than 2.5 hectares. About 45 per cent of all SCs and 55 per cent of STs have no land to
cultivate.
The Socioeconomic and caste census (SECC) 2011 also indicates that the Sandur taluka generally
depend of agriculture and dry crops. According to SECC 2011, the percentage of rural household
owning un-irrigated land is only 35.1 per cent, owning irrigated land is 16.93 per cent and owning
other land is 14.92 per cent. The percentage of landless households (29 per cent) is deriving major
part of household income from manual labour.
According to the SECC 2011, about 5.94 per cent of the total rural households in Sandur taluka is
depending upon monthly salary from government or public sector establishments and 24.33 per
cent from private sector establishments. The percentage of households living on alms is negligible
(0.05 per cent). Thus, the dependence on agriculture is considerable.
In the presence of intensive agriculture, pellet plant and other non-agriculture activities provide
major opportunity for employment. Therefore, pellet plant and allied activities will supplement
the local economy.
Inference for need assessment: The proposed plant and other supporting industry in buffer zone
will be providing direct and indirect employment for the local population.
Table 3.38: Percentage Distribution of Households by Size of Land Holdings and Caste,
Survey 2021
Land holdings SC ST Others Total
No land 55.6 45.0 50.0 50.0
< 1 Ha 27.8 30.0 29.0 29.0
1.1 to 2.5 Ha 16.7 20.0 16.1 17.0
2.5+ Ha 0.0 5.0 4.8 4.0
Total 100.0 (18) 100.0 (20) 100.0 (62) 100.0 (100)
3.8.6 Annual household income from various sources

The estimated average household income per annum is more than Rs 85,000. Of the total
household income, About 60 per cent is contributed by agriculture sector and 40 per cent by the
non-agriculture sector. According to the SECC 2011, about 61 per cent of rural households in
Sandur taluka are getting monthly income of less than rupees 5,000, about 25 per cent between
rupees 5,000 and less than 10,000 and about 14 per cent above rupees 10,000. Thus, the
household’s income is not high.
3.8.7 Information on family budget
The family expenses are mostly on food items (68 per cent), followed by schooling of children,
transport, and others (8 per cent), entertainment (7 per cent), personal hygiene (6 per cent), health
care (6 per cent), and other emergencies (5 per cent).
3.8.8 Savings
The respondents often reported that the savings are very low, lower than one percent. Often there
is a need to borrow to supplement the family expenses.
3.8.9 Family amenities and assets
Household amenities: The percentage of households having various amenities from census 2011
is presented in Table 3.39A. In general, households have good amenities in buffer zone. It is
observed that about 96 per cent of all households are living in good or livable house, 91 per cent
living in house having one or more than one room, 62 per cent living in their own house; 47 per
cent have treated tap water supply within the house, 92 per cent use electricity for lighting, 38 per
cent have latrine facility within the house, 87 per cent have bath room facility within the house,
56 per cent have drainage facility, 34 per cent use LPG/NPG for cooking. The variations in the
percentage of household amenities are significant across villages.
Comparison with district: The percentage of households having household amenities is
marginally higher in buffer zone than in the district.
Inference focusing need assessment: Generally, the living conditions of the population are better
as many households have amenities.
Table 3.39A: Percentage of households living in good house with amenities, Census 2011.
Percentage of households living in/having/using
House Any Any
Electricity
Good or having Treate type of type Any type LPG/
Village Own as main
liveable at least d tap latrine of of NPG for
house source of
house one water within bath drainage cooking
lighting
room house room
Bandri 93.0 71.9 87.5 51.7 82.1 15.2 69.9 7.6 7.8
Nidugurthi 98.3 97.3 97.8 3.1 95.2 3.6 94.5 2.9 0.0
Mallapura 100.0 98.9 95.5 0.3 88.0 4.2 83.2 33.9 0.3
Ankammanahal 97.6 100.0 96.2 0.0 84.9 2.2 84.9 1.9 3.0
Devaramallapur 82.6 93.2 94.8 0.0 74.4 0.7 68.8 26.1 0.0
Yeswanthanagar 97.0 98.5 74.5 51.3 97.6 26.0 96.1 68.5 25.4
Suseelnagar 93.3 94.2 85.2 31.8 96.9 5.6 78.7 43.7 2.0
Dowlatpur 98.0 96.1 85.9 13.9 95.4 9.8 92.4 99.8 10.2
Krishnanagar 91.4 95.5 71.3 49.7 90.5 15.7 86.7 35.9 16.0
Bhujanganagar 94.6 95.2 87.6 13.0 96.0 28.2 91.7 83.5 19.0
Deogiri
(Subbrayanahalli) 98.7 98.7 29.7 39.5 96.9 31.8 88.4 29.0 62.6
Sandur (TMC) 97.3 97.2 13.7 96.1 96.0 88.6 95.5 80.8 81.1
Donimalai
Township (CT) 97.1 93.4 60.8 70.2 94.9 53.0 94.7 91.5 47.1
Kodihalli 96.9 89.9 96.3 0.0 92.9 1.8 95.1 58.6 1.8
Somalapur 97.4 98.0 61.6 2.6 92.7 6.0 98.7 100.0 13.2
Hulikunta 73 98.5 98.8 91.9 0.0 77.3 1.2 74.6 23.8 0.0
Chikkakeriyagina
halli 94.4 100.0 95.4 0.7 89.3 1.0 86.9 10.0 1.9
Hirekeriyaginahalli 94.8 88.3 96.2 17.1 73.0 4.6 84.5 21.1 1.0
Kalingeri 94.5 98.8 93.6 0.0 74.8 2.6 74.0 56.9 2.9
Yerriahanahalli 84.0 42.8 90.5 8.0 89.3 2.3 73.7 41.0 1.8
Jiginahalli 96.6 84.1 95.1 0.0 96.2 12.5 77.3 78.4 3.0
Thippanamaradi 97.2 97.3 92.5 0.0 99.3 0.0 100.0 42.5 0.0
Sovenahalli 96.7 91.5 93.3 0.0 99.2 6.7 86.1 49.2 4.8
Agrahara 92.7 51.5 95.5 0.0 95.7 1.3 50.9 1.5 0.1
Genatikatte 99.5 40.3 95.9 0.0 98.5 4.1 93.9 8.7 2.6
Chornur 97.6 92.6 84.6 27.0 81.3 18.9 72.9 46.5 4.4
Bommagatta 96.1 80.4 85.9 19.9 91.7 14.4 66.6 62.5 17.3
Buffer Zone 95.7 91.0 61.7 47.5 92.0 38.1 86.5 56.4 34.3
Bellary 93.8 83.8 76.1 47.5 91.4 32.4 86.6 56.2 23.7
Household assets: The percentage of households having various assets from census 2011 is
presented in Table 3.39B. In general, the percentage of households in buffer zone having assets is
high. It is observed that about 58 per cent of all households have a bank account; 9 per cent have
radio or transistor, 64 per cent have television, 13 per cent have laptop with or without internet
connection, 70 per cent have landline or mobile phone; 25 per cent have bicycle, 27 per cent have
scooter or motorcycle or moped and 6 per cent have car or jeep or van. The variations in the
percentage of household assets are significant across villages.
Comparison with district: The percentage of households having any assets is marginally higher
in buffer zone than the district.
Inference focusing need assessment: The households are having better communication facilities
by having telephone or mobile phone, highly mobile by having scooter or motor cycle or moped
or bicycle, car or jeep or van, and well connected with outside world by having transistor or radio,
TV and computer with or without internet. Therefore, the population in buffer zone can easily be
integrated with many development programmes planned by project proponent.
Table 3.39B: Percentage of households having the following assets, Census 2011.
Percentage of households having
Computer
Radio
or laptop Landline Scooter or Car or
Village Bank or
Television with or or mobile Bicycle motorcycle jeep or
account tran-
without or both or moped van
sistor
internet
Bandri 45.4 11.5 40.7 0.8 56.0 13.2 9.1 1.5
Nidugurthi 30.8 5.3 29.1 0.7 51.1 22.9 5.8 2.1
Mallapura 48.7 7.0 16.2 27.2 32.0 21.0 5.9 1.1
Ankammanahal 13.7 2.4 35.0 0.5 36.7 12.1 11.3 0.5
Devaramallapur 16.0 4.9 26.5 0.2 35.4 17.8 6.6 0.5

Yeswanthanagar 52.3 2.7 70.4 4.4 78.9 18.0 17.3 2.3
Suseelnagar 8.6 1.8 69.2 3.2 37.5 7.5 9.5 1.1
Dowlatpur 33.0 1.3 64.4 0.9 72.7 38.8 20.6 1.3
Krishnanagar 32.2 7.3 69.7 16.4 69.2 28.2 15.3 1.4
Bhujanganagar 30.8 3.3 74.0 2.1 61.8 19.9 18.7 1.7
Deogiri
(Subbrayanahalli) 51.1 10.2 82.8 3.1 83.6 27.1 11.5 3.0
Sandur (TMC) 90.8 13.4 86.6 31.1 90.1 26.3 59.8 13.9
Donimalai
Township (CT) 62.2 4.5 77.4 10.9 76.5 22.6 23.9 4.4
Kodihalli 98.8 7.1 66.0 0.6 66.2 78.2 16.9 0.0
Somalapur 32.5 4.0 66.2 2.0 79.5 23.2 16.6 1.3
Hulikunta 73 54.6 4.6 20.0 0.0 36.2 11.9 7.3 3.8
Chikkakeriyagina
halli 50.4 20.0 38.9 0.7 37.9 25.8 11.2 3.4
Hirekeriyagina
halli 33.8 6.2 46.4 1.7 63.1 21.8 9.0 1.9
Kalingeri 39.3 6.2 40.7 0.7 39.5 26.9 5.5 2.6
Yerriahanahalli 27.9 8.5 44.7 4.8 56.4 38.8 8.5 1.5
Jiginahalli 57.6 3.8 47.0 1.1 63.7 33.7 25.8 0.4
Thippanamaradi 63.0 9.6 43.8 0.0 61.7 47.9 10.3 0.7
Sovenahalli 59.4 11.1 38.2 0.8 56.1 30.3 5.3 1.1
Agrahara 24.0 20.3 34.6 1.5 56.3 30.4 6.5 0.0
Genatikatte 12.2 5.1 53.1 5.6 44.4 23.5 9.7 0.5
Chornur 64.9 13.8 41.9 13.5 75.9 28.0 11.1 3.7
Bommagatta 56.6 4.4 41.6 1.9 53.4 20.5 11.7 0.9
Buffer Zone 57.7 9.2 63.7 13.1 69.9 24.9 27.0 5.6
Bellary 49.8 8.5 60.4 8.3 68.0 34.2 23.1 2.9
3.8.10 Respondent's perception about the proposed plant project

In the presence of high agriculture dependence, mining and allied industries are the only
industries creating direct well as indirect employment. The local economy will become vibrant
because of the proposed plant in terms of all round cash flow and service activity. Therefore,
proposed plant is going to be a dominant economic activity.
3.8.11 Employment and income

Occupation and income status: In general, agriculture is dominant economy in the buffer zone
as well as in district. Of the total 25,658 hectares of land area, 52% is under net area sown and 12
per cent is under forest. The agriculture is dominated by dry crops like Jowar, Maize, Bajra and
Ragi and Oil seed like Sunflower and Groundnuts. Rice is grown only in limited area.
The percentage of population in age 14+ engaged in various activities from the survey 2021 has
been presented in Table 3.39C. About 39% of females in this age group are housewives (which
is 19% of the total 14+ population) and not having any income. About 15.25 per cent of the
population are students and hence do not have any income. About 11% of the population is not
working. Therefore about 46 per cent of the population are not having earnings or income.
Remaining 44% constitute the earning population among people over 14 years.
Cultivators and agriculture labourers are about 8% and 18% respectively out of the 44 % of the
earning population. This is about 60% of the income generating population. The remaining 40%
earning population is employed in public and private sectors, banks, mining related activities like
truck drivers, cleaners, garage workers, petty shop owners, hotel owners etc.
Inference focusing need assessment: The buffer zone has a substantial female population which
is not working and thus income avenues can be developed by creating SHGs and employing in
nurseries, animal husbandry and tailoring etc. Students also constitute a sizeable population which
will soon require opportunities for employment. Vocational courses can be designed to industry
specific requirements to create an employment ready talent pool.
Table 3.39: Percentage distribution of workers (age 14+) by occupation in Buffer Zone, Survey 2021.
Industry and occupation, buffer zone Male Female Total
Housewife 0 38.8 19.4
Student 16.3 14.2 15.25
Not working 10.7 11.3 11
Disabled 0 0 0
Retired 3.5 0.5 2
Cultivators 10 6.8 8.4
Agriculture Labourers 19 18.4 18.7
Professionals 2.3 0.2 1.25
Employed (private or public) 16 7.8 11.9
Bank employee 0.9 0.5 0.7
Drivers, cleaners, garage workers 6.7 0 3.35
Truck business 4.5 1.1 2.8
Traditional occupation 0.9 0 0.45
Self-employed Hotel 2.2 0.5 1.35
Self-employed other business 2.9 0 1.45
Mine workers 4.2 0 2.1
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
3.8.12 Data relating to historically, culturally, and ecologically important places in core
as well as buffer zone.
Hampi is a historical place located 43 kms from Sandur. It was the capital city of the magnificent
Vijayanagara Empire. Founded by Harihara and Bukka in 1336, it fell to the rulers of Northern
India in 1565 after the Battle of Talikota, and subsequently lapsed into decline and abandonment.
3.8.13 Information on notified tribal settlements, if any.

Notified tribal settlements are not there in buffer zone.
3.8.14 Details of private lands with ownership in the core area indicating financial loss
annually.
The Iron Ore Processing and Pellet Plant is built in proponents own land bought long ago.
3.8.15 Health status of the population in the study area.

Morbidity status: Morbidity data have been collected from Primary Health Center in Bandri
village in buffer zone. The reference period is three months prior to date of survey. The relevant
data have been presented in Table 3.40.
Many diseases like Cholera, Tetanus, Dengue fever, Encephalitis, Malaria, Filariasis, AIDS,
Cancer, Blood Pressure, Heart disease, Pleurisy, Whooping cough Poliomyelitis Measles, Gout or
any joint problems accompanied by fever, Malnutrition, Food poisoning, Burns and Vomiting
have not been reported.
Rarely reported diseases, between one and less than 3 per cent, are Leprosy, STD, Influenza
Throat infection, Accidents, Goitre, Disease of thyroid gland, Asthma, Bronchitis, Epilepsy,
Mental disorder, Dysentery, Jaundice, Diabetes, Pneumonia, Piles, Disease of ENT, Disease of
mouth, teeth, gums, Pregnancy related diseases and Fever not classified elsewhere.
Often reported diseases, (around 5 per cent) are Gastroenteritis, Tuberculosis (TB), Disease of
eye, Arthritis, Rheumatism-pain, Skin diseases and Anaemia.
Very often reported diseases are Typhoid/paratyphoid (10.5 per cent) and Cough and cold with
fever without fever (22.6 per cent).
Inference focusing on need assessment: Iron ore does not contain toxic elements. Hence, the
possibility of health hazards due to toxic elements does not arise. The most significant
occupational health hazards are noise induced hearing loss and occupational lung diseases due to
inhalation of dust. However, management is taking enough care to minimize these occupational
health hazards. The percentage of Pneumonia episodes is 2.6 per cent. The percentage of Asthma
or Bronchitis is not high (1.6 per cent). The percentage of Asthma or Bronchitis and Pneumonia
are because of other vices like consumption of tobacco and alcohol, especially among males.
There are few cases of hearing loss mostly associated with old age. The percentage of skin
allergies cases is not high (5.3 per cent). These cases mostly are associated with personal hygiene.
Table 3.40: Number of Patients suffering from the following Diseases during previous 3
months Buffer zone and around, December 2021.
Morbidity % patients visited doctor or clinic

Cholera 0.0000
Typhoid/paratyphoid 10.5263
Gastroenteritis 5.2632
Dysentery 2.6316
Tuberculosis (TB) 5.2632
Leprosy 1.0526
Tetanus 0.0000
Dengue fever 0.0000
Encephalitis 0.0000
Jaundice 2.6316
Malaria 0.0000
Filariasis 0.0000
STD 1.0526
AIDS 0.0000
Cancer 0.0000
Goitre, Disease of thyroid gland 1.5789

Diabetes 2.6316
Blood Pressure 0.0000
Heart disease 0.0000
Asthma, Bronchitis 1.5789
Pleurisy 0.0000
Influenza 1.0526
Pneumonia 2.6316
Whooping cough 0.0000
Poliomyelitis 0.0000
Measles 0.0000
Epilepsy 1.5789
Piles 2.6316
Disease of eye 5.2632
Disease of ENT 2.6316
Gout or any joint problems accompanied by fever 0.0000
Arthritis, Rheumatism-pain 5.2632
Skin diseases 5.2632
Disease of mouth, teeth, gums 2.6316
Throat infection 1.0526
Malnutrition 0.0000
Anaemia 5.2632
Pregnancy related diseases 2.6316
Food poisoning 0.0000
Accidents 1.0526
Burns 0.0000
Mental disorder 1.5789
Vomiting 0.0000
Cough cold without fever 7.8947
Cough cold with fever 14.7368
Fever not classified elsewhere 2.6316
Others 0.0000
Total 100.0000 (190)
Medical lab status: The data on laboratory facilities are presented in Table 3.41. Medical Lab
facilities are available in Sandur which is 16 kms away.
Inference focusing need assessment: This information is useful in planning to set up health
facility for emergencies and medical tests.
Table 3.41: Distance of Medical Laboratories conducing following Tests from the Buffer
zone(collected from medical practitioner), December 2021.
Medical test Distance
X-ray Sandur (16 Kms)
Pulmonary functions test Sandur (16 Kms)
Testing of hearing Sandur (16 Kms)
Identifying tuberculosis Sandur (16 Kms)
Blood test Sandur (16 Kms)
Urine test Sandur (16 Kms)
3.8.16 Summary of socio-economic and demographic survey, and need assessment study:
Brief summary on socio-economic status is based on findings from household survey and census.
While indirect needs assessment is based findings from household survey and census, direct needs
assessment is based on finding from FGDs and in-depth interviews. The FGDs and in-depth
interviews have been focused on issues like health needs, communication needs, sanitation needs,
education needs and other social issues like tree plantation and maintenance of schools, temples
and village roads. The needs have been presented according the respondents' priority
Socio-economic and Demographic Status

Village population size varies among villages in buffer zone. There are more males than females
according to census while the survey suggests otherwise in buffer zone and in the district.
The majority population is young and healthy.
There is sizable SC and ST population both in buffer zone and in the district. The SC and ST
population varies widely across villages.
The literacy rates are not high both in buffer zone and in the district because of SC and ST
population. There is significant variation in literacy rates across villages.
Agriculture sector is important to local economy because villages depend upon agriculture in both
buffer zone and in the district.
The local economy is characterized by labour force participation in agriculture sector and
employment in mining and mining related activities.
The general morbidity pattern is studied and is found that mining related diseases are not high.
The households, in general, are having better amenities to live comfortably.
The possession of assets indicates households have good communication facilities, highly mobile
and well connected with outside.
The population in buffer zone can easily be integrated with many proposed development
programmes.
Indirect assessment of community needs.
 About 8 per cent of the population is elderly (60+) needing health and other elderly
assisting programs. Some feasible welfare programs such as general health checkup, eye
checkup, providing vision glasses and old age supporting equipment like walking sticks,
and the like can be planned.
 About 20 per cent of the population in school going age group 5-14 should be considered
for some feasible welfare programs like supply of school uniforms and books, transport,
tuitions and supporting mid-day meal program and the like.
 About 10 per cent of the population in the age group 15-19, who are going to enter into
labour market, can be made self-employable by organizing vocational training programs
through CSR activates.
 About 64 per cent of the population is in the working age group 15-59. Many of them are
in need of employment, especially females. The project proponent can formulate feasible
female oriented self-employment schemes like milk dairy, poultry, sheep rearing, piggery
and the like.
 There is a sizable SC and ST population in the buffer zone. Separate heath camps, water
supply and sanitation facilities and the like can be planned targeting these groups.
 The general literacy rates are not high in buffer zone. Some villages in buffer zone are
having very low literacy rates. School going children in these villages can be supported by
providing school uniforms, books, transport and the like to boost literacy levels and
discouraging school dropouts.
 There is unemployment in the buffer zone as elsewhere. This is because economy is
unable to keep phase with fast growing working population to provide jobs. The solution
for this is vocational training courses to meet local industrial need. Such an attempt can be
made.
 To rejuvenate primary sector, agriculture related activities like milk diary, poultry, sheep
rearing and piggery can be encouraged and farmers can be supported by supplying high
yielding varieties and the like.
Direct assessment of community needs
1) Employment
2) Health care
3) Water supply for agriculture,
4) Construction and maintenance of temples,
5) Construction village roads and maintenance,
6) Bus shelters, and
7) Tree plantation.
3.5.8.2 Employment (source of employment)
The category-wise breakup during operation ;
Sl. Category Ore Processing Pellet Plant Total
1 Senior Executive 3 3 6
2 Executives 10 10 20
3 Discipline Managers 20 20 40
4 Associate Staff 30 30 60
5 Supervisors 30 30 60
6 Skilled manning 65 65 130
7 Semiskilled Manning 65 65 130
8 Unskilled Manning* 153 153 306
Total Manpower 376 376 752
While 752 persons are directly employed and about 900 are indirect employment during operation
stage
3.9 Traffic Density Measurment:

Traffic Density
The traffic survey is essential to realistically and accurately assess the prevailing traffic volumes
and travel characteristics by undertaking classified volume count. The objective of traffic volume
count survey is to assess the traffic intensity on the most vulnerable section of the road under
question. Twenty-Four hrs. continuous volume count was manually undertaken during February -
2022 at following routes:
This road passes through Kudligi to sandur via Somalapur Village . This is a two lane road of
width approx. 9 mtrs.
The analysis of traffic counts provides an estimate of average daily traffic (ADT). In order to
convert recorded vehicles into a common scale, the passenger car units (PCU) equivalent factor as
per IRC: 64 has been adopted. The following tables reveal ADT (Average daily Traffic) in terms
of number which translates into PCU (Passengers Cars Units).
Traffic Density on Connecting plant to SH-40 Connecting at Somalapur to Kudligi
Type of Vehicle PCU Factor No. of No. PCU/ Day
Vehicles /Day
LMV(Car/Jeep/Van /Three Wheelers) 1.0 574 574
Two Wheelers 0.5 959 479.5
HMV(Two Axel Truck/Three Axle 3.0 358 1074
Truck/Bus)
More Than Three Axel Truck 4.5 0 0
Total 1891 2127.5
Traffic Density on Connecting Road from Somalapur to sandur (SH-40)

Type of Vehicle PCU Factor No. of No. PCU/Day
Vehicles/ Day
LMV(Car/Jeep/Van /Three Wheelers) 1.0 523 523
Two Wheelers 0.5 907 452.5
HMV(Two Axel Truck/Three Axle 3.0 395 1185
Truck/Bus)
More Than Three Axel Truck 4.5 0 0
Total 1825 2160.5
Road traffic (to and from) due to operation of proposed expanded plant would not be so intensive
and heavier than at present. As because main mode of transportation of the materials will be via
railways. Iron Ore is coming from closed Belt Conveyer and
As per guidelines for capacity of roads in rural areas of IRC, recommended design series volumes
for two lane roads are 15000 PCU/day. Hence the traffic is within the standard limit even if it is
80% of 15000 PCU/day (Due to reduced road condition) which is 12000 PCU/day.
Chapter-4
Anticipated
Environmental Impacts
& Mitigation Measures
4.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

4.1 Identification of Impacts
4.1.1 General
An essential step in Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is to identify all the potential
environmental impacts by the proposed mineral (iron ore) beneficiation process on the
surrounding environment. These are then examined critically and the major impacts (both
beneficial and adverse) are analyzed in detail. Of the various techniques available for impact
identification like checklists, matrices networks, cause effect diagram, computer simulation
models etc., the matrix method has been chosen for the present project impacts identifications.
4.1.2 Identification of Impact
The objective of Impact assessment process is to identify, characterize and evaluate the potential
impacts arising out of the proposed project and prioritize them, so that they can be effectively
addressed through proper Environmental Management plan.
Through this EIA/EMP Report, an attempt has been made to identify and list all possible aspects,
which could generate significant impact on different environmental attributes during various
phases of implementation of the Project. Some of these impacts are less threat or insignificant and
don't need further analysis.
The objective is to identify and list only the significant impacts, which shall require detailed
analysis to the extent of decision-making purposes. The major construction activities will be of
short duration and will have very few lasting impacts. The operation will have the potential of
major impacts, which has been analyzed in detail. Based on the impacts identified, most affected
environmental attributes have been considered for detailed evaluation.
The impacts are identified based on the possible worst case emission, effluent discharge, and
Solid waste generation from the proposed project and also taking into consideration the baseline
environmental status of the study area of proposed project site. The potentially significant
environmental impacts from the proposed project are:
 Impacts on air environment.
 Impacts on water environment.
 Impact on soil/land.
 Impacts due to disposal of solid wastes.
 Impacts on flora & fauna.
The environmental impacts can be categorized as either primary or secondary. Primaryimpacts
are those, which are attributed directly due to the project and secondary impacts are those, which
are indirectly induced. The proposed project is likely to create impact on the environment in two
distinct phases:
 During the construction phases, it may be regarded as temporary or short term effects.
 During the operation phase that would have long term effects
Methodology of impact prediction

After screening and scoping the identification of potentially significant environmental impacts
constitute one of the preliminary steps of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). There are
three principal methods of impact prediction: these are checklists, matrices, and flow diagrams.
These are supplemented by overlays and geographic information systems, expert systems etc.
Checklists
Checklists are comprehensive lists of environmental effects and impact indicators designed to
stimulate the analysts to think broadly about possible consequence of contemplated action.
Matrices
Matrices typically employ a list of human action in addition to a list of impact indicators. The two
are related in a matrix, which can be used to identify cause and affect relationships.
Flow Diagrams (Network Method)
Flow diagrams are sometimes used to identify action-effect-impact relationship. The flow
diagram permits the analysts to visualize the connection between action and impact. This method
is best suited to single project assessment and is not recommended for large regional actions.
Overlays and Geographic Information Systems
Overlays can be used to map impacts spatially and display them pictorially. Overlay technique is
an environmental suitability analysis in which data on topographic features, ecological values and
resource constraints are mapped onto individual transparencies and then aggregated into a
composite representation of potential impacts. This approach is useful for comparing site and
planning alternatives, for routing linear developments to avoid environmentally sensitive areas
and for landscape and habitat zoning at the regional level. A modern version of the overlay
method is the computer-based geographical information system (GIS). In simple terms, a GIS
stores, retrieves, interpretes and displays environmental data in a spatial format. A set of maps or
overlays of a given area provide different types of information and scales of resolution.
Expert Systems
The expert or knowledge-based systems are used to assist diagnosis, problem solving and
decision-making, viz. screening & scoping procedures have been automated using a number of
rules and a data system, which encodes expert knowledge and judgment. Expert systems are an
information-intensive, high investment method of analysis so they are limited in their current use
and application
4.2 Impacts of the Project
4.2.1 Impacts due to Project Location
The proposed project is located at Somlapur Village of Ballari district. The site does not fall
under critically polluted/severely polluted area. The proposed site is near to existing unit of
Mining projects SMIORE, VNK Menon, SKMEPL,
The ore from the mines shall be transported to the plant through closed conveyor belt, which shall
eliminate the probability of vehicular pollution due to road transportation. Further due to wet
beneficiation process, there will be minimum impact on AAQ with respect to particulate matter
dispersions.
The Tailings shall be filter-pressed and stacked in a designated area around 6km away from the
plant site with appropriate dump management and surface runoff management plan and there will
be a minimal impact on environment due to the project location as proper mitigation measures
will be adopted during construction and operation phase. There are 5 existing industries within 10
km study area.
4.2.2 Impacts due to Project design
Proposed Iron Ore Processing Plant of 5 MTPA and 3 MTPA Pellet Plant is a green field project
being envisaged based on techno-economic feasibility of the state of art technology of “Travelling
Grate” as presently available in the country and thus no adverse impacts are anticipated due to
project design. A number of environmentally friendly features at the design stage of the proposed
facilities, several available technologies have been considered to minimize emissions, increase
recycling of solid wastes and energy savings. The detailed Technology Analysis has been
discussed in Chapter-5.
As drying, preheating, indurations and cooling are done in a single grate; the chance of air
pollution is reduced. Further, emissions from the plant are maintained below 30 mg/Nm 3 by using
control equipment like ESP and bag filter. Thermal energy consumption is also less in straight
grate technology. All units are designed based on “Zero discharge” concept.
4.2.3 Impacts due to road Diversion
It is proposed to use already exisiting route. The cart road will be developed towards the project
site along the plant boundary. The Road may have adverse impact on environment hence, proper
mitigation measures will be taken up for minimizing the impacts.
 The three most damaging effects of road construction are noise, dust and vibrations. Noise
will be generated during construction phase from vehicular movement and machineries.
 Dust will be generated during the construction of gravel roads and unbound aggregate
layers.
 Removal of top soil, excavation, levelling of site will result in increase of dust in the
environment.
 Excess dust production will be mitigated by a range of means such as watering/ use of
alternative materials etc.
4.2.4 Irreversible and Irretrievable commitments of environmental components

Table 4.1: Impact checklist for plant construction
Environmental
Parameters Land Water Air Noise Solid Waste Remarks
Activities
Demolition P - T T T
Site Clearing P - T T T
Road Laying P - - T T
Foundation Works P - - T T
Concrete Works - - T T T
Mechanical Works P - T T T
Material Storage - - T T T
Material Handling - - T T -
Transportation T - T T -
Water Requirement - T - - -
Temporary Construction T - T T T
T – Temporary Impact & P – Permanent Impact
Table 4.2: Impact checklist for plant operation
Environmental
Parameters Land Water Air Noise Solid Waste Remarks
Activities
Plant Commissioning & Y Y Y Y Y
Operation
Water Requirement - Y - - -
Gaseous Emissions - - Y - -
Raw Material Handling Y - Y Y Y
Product Handling Y - Y Y Y
Spill/Leakage Y Y - - -
Start-up/Shutdown - Y Y Y Y
Equipment Failure Y Y Y Y Y
Transportation - - Y Y -
Y – Possible Impact
4.3Impact on Air Environment
4.3.1 Demolition
Impacts
The mains concerns during demolition activities will be emissions generated by the vehicles and
the machineries. Total demolition waste will be around 3250 Tonnes.
The construction and demolition waste will include debris, concrete (often recycled and reused
at the site), steel and other metals, pallets, packaging and paper products, fluorescent tubes, wood
beams, joists, studs, baseboards, cabinets and cupboards, railings, brick, doors and casings,
interior windows, bathroom fixtures, light fixtures, ceiling grid and tile, furnishings, replant trees,
shrubs.
Mitigation
Orderly deconstruction is the proper measure for reuse of the demolished matter. In contrast to
demolition, where buildings are knocked down and materials are either land filled or recycled,
deconstruction involves carefully taking apart portions of buildings or removing their contents
with the primary goal being reuse.
It can be as simple as stripping out cabinetry, fixtures, and windows, or manually taking apart the
building frame. Gross segregation of construction and demolition wastes into roadwork materials,
structural building material salvaged building parts and site clearance wastes is necessary.
Additional segregation is required to facilitate reuse/ recycling.
Disposal of excess earth that is unearthed due to the construction activity is to be properly
undertaken. Waste recycling plans should be developed for construction and demolition projects,
prior to beginning construction activity. The plans should identify wastes to be generated, and
designate handling, recycling and disposal method to be followed.
Handling of waste material requires special precautions such as personal protective equipment
and special procedures to prevent the injury.
Developers must operate safe methods for waste collection, storage, and disposal operations in a
manner to protect the health and safety of personnel, minimize environmental impact and promote
material recovery and recycling.
4.3.2 Construction Phase
Impacts
The main sources of emission during the construction period will include site clearing, the
movement of construction equipment at site and dust emitted during the leveling grading,
earthwork and foundation works. Exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment to be deployed
during the phase.
These activities will likely to result in marginal increase in the levels of Particulate Matter, SO2,
NO2 and CO. This will be mainly confined within the project boundary due to the machinery use
and to some extent outside the plant boundaries due to transportation activities. The impact will,
however, be marginal temporary and manageable in nature.
During the construction period the impacts that are associated with the air quality are:
 Deterioration of air quality due to fugitive dust emissions from construction activities
(especially during dry season) like excavation, back filling and concreting, hauling and
dumping of earth materials and from construction spoils.
 Emission of gaseous pollutants due to operation of heavy vehicles and movement of
machineries and equipment for material handling, earth moving, laying of sands, metal,
stones, asphalt, etc.
Mitigation Measures
Proper maintenance of vehicles and construction equipment will help in controlling the gaseous
emissions. Vehicles meeting PUC norms will be used to further control the gaseous emission.
Water sprinkling on roads and construction site will prevent fugitive dust. Vehicles and
machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions conform to standards of Central
Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
Prior planning, appropriate sequencing and scheduling of all major construction/erection activities
will be done, and timely availability of infrastructure supports needed will be ensured to shorten
the implementation period vis-à-vis to reduce pollution.
 Materials will be stored in covered warehouses or enclosed spaces to prevent the
windblown fugitive emissions.
 Adequate dust suppression measures such as regular water sprinkling at vulnerable areas
of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive dust during material handling
and hauling activities.
 Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during construction phase.
 Construction workers will be provided with dust masks to protect them from inhaling dust.
4.3.3 Operation Phase
Impacts
During operation phase, major sources of air pollution are:
 Raw material and product handling areas.
 Production process.
 Movement of Vehicles.
 During iron ore beneficiation process, handling of ROM iron ore fines is the major source
of dust emissions. The iron ore beneficiation will be carried out through wet process,
which will not cause any dust emissions.
 During agglomeration process green pellets need to be hardened. Travelling grate carries
the green pellets on a 30–50 cm thick bed through a furnace with updraft drying,
downdraft drying, preheating, and firing, after-firing and cooling zones. These processes
may generate carbon dioxide, sulphur compounds, chlorides, and fluorides, which are
driven off during the pellet production process. Large amounts of dust, containing metals
and other ore and additive constituents, may also be generated. These wastes are usually
collected by electrostatic precipitators.
 The operational phase of the project comprises of various activities each of which will
have an impact Air Quality. Both Dust & Gaseous emissions are likely to be emitted. The
key emissions from the proposed Project are emissions due to Particulate Matter, Sulphur
dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) & CO.
There will be some impact on the ambient air quality of the area due to the raw material
transportation as the majority of raw material transportation will be done via road but this impact
can be minimized by adopting covered transport of raw materials, keeping proper maintenance of
the vehicles to be used & also allowing only those vehicles which are meeting PUC norms.
Mitigation Measures
Installation of proper pollution control equipment like ESPs/Bag filters for arresting emissions.
Details have been provided in Table 4.2.
All the vehicles carrying materials will be covered with tarpaulin / plastic sheet. Only vehicles
with valid PUC certificate will be allowed.
Section Source Air Pollution Control

Raw material handling and storage Provision of wind breaks walls near raw
material storage area. Periodic water
Beneficiation Plant sprinkingly on raw material storage area
Belt conveyors Covering of belt conveyors. Provision of
water sprinklers at transfer points.
Raw material handling Raw material handling Bag filter
Coke Grinding Coke grinding Bag filter
Pellet Plant Proportioning system Proportioning system Bag filter
Induration furnace travelling grate Induration Furnace ESP
Hearth layer separation building Hearth layer separation building
Finished product handling Finished product handling bag filter
4.3.4 Air Quality Modeling and Impact Prediction

The AERMOD USEPA Air Quality Modelling is used for predicting the impact of Pollutants as
Ground level Concentrations due to the proposed emissions from the Plant. For model run
purposes, the emission rates for 24 hrly Period (Winter: December-February) is been estimated,
whose result sets are provided in the Detailed Result Summary Section of this report. For real
time analysis, the terrain data is been obtained from SRTM data sets and the coordinates are
chosen with UTM map Projections. The actual elevations will have a marginal error of 5-7% with
respect to the derived ground elevations from this SRTM Data sets. The modeling is run for near
field vertical distribution of pollutants like PM10, PM2.5, SO2 &NOx using Gaussian Plume
equation with plume rise calculated in numerical methods. However, the vertical wind shearing is
not considered in the model and the models are run for dry deposition in order to get maximum
impact assessment.
Figure.4.1 : Isopleth for PM10 Distribution
Figure.4.2 Isopleth for PM2.5 Distribution
Figure 4.3 Isopleth for SO2 Distribution
Figure 4.4 Isopleth for NOx Distribution
Resultant Ground Level Concentration Due to the Project:

The baseline values for the respective AAQ Monitoring Locations are added with the incremental
GLC Values as per the Model out come to predict the impact due to the project in the observed
locations as below:
Station Code Baseline Incre Result Baseline Incre Result Base Incre Result Base Incre Result
PM10 mental PM10 PM2.5 mental PM2.5 line mental SO2 line mental NO2
SO2 NO2
A1 - Within
500M from
61 1.5 62.5 32 0.8 32.8 13 0.3 13.3 16 0.1 16.1
Plant site NE
Direction
A2 –
Yeshwantha 58 1 59 30 0.5 30.5 12 0.2 12.2 18 0.06 18.06
nagar
A3 - Bandri 63 0.8 63.8 34 0.5 34.5 12 0.06 12.06 18 0.05 18.05
A4 -
51 1 52 29 0.6 29.6 12 0.2 12.2 15 0.09 15.09
Somalapura
A5 -
57 0.6 57.6 28 0.4 28.4 12 0.05 12.05 16 0.05 16.05
Dharmapura
A6 -
55 0.6 55.6 29 0.1 29.1 11 0.02 11.02 15 0.03 15.03
Ankamanahal
A7 –
Subbarayana 61 0.3 61.3 32 0.1 32.1 12 0.04 12.04 15 0.03 15.03
halli
A8 - Ramgad 58 0.5 58.5 29 0.1 29.1 12 0.06 12.06 16 0.05 16.05
A9 - Nidagutti 62 0.3 62.3 32 0.1 32.1 12 0.5 12.5 17 0.04 17.04
A10 -
53 0.5 53.5 31 0.1 31.1 13 0.08 13.08 17 0.03 17.03
Devaramallapur
A11 - Kalingeri 53 0.3 53.3 27 0.08 27.08 12 0.01 12.01 17 0.01 17.01
A12 -
54 0.3 54.3 30 0.1 30.1 13 0.01 13.01 18 0.03 18.03
Kapatrahallu
Apparently the resultant impact due to the project is well within the NAAQ Standards. With all
EPCs, the emission from the chimneys and fugitive dust emissions from the road network shall be
contained along with the intensive plantation program in-and-around the plant premises.
4.4 Impact on Water Environment
4.4.1 Construction phase
There are three seasonal nallahs one passing through the plant site, second passing in between
parking area and plant site and the third one is passing through kalingeri area. Surface water
runoff problem will be the sole impact which can affect the water quality through washing off
excavated soil or soil erosion. Only oil and grease due to vehicle movement during construction
phase may impact the surface water bodies.
Adequate drainage system for runoff water will be provided to overcome such problem. The
impacts on water quality during construction phase mainly arise due to site cleaning, leveling,
excavation, storage of construction material etc. Leveling and excavation activity normally
increases the level of suspended solids in the surface water runoff. However, for the proposed
plant, no large scale leveling is required. Excavation will also be limited. During the monsoon
season, storm water run-offs will contain large amounts of suspended solids. Efforts will be made
to reduce the suspended solids content of storm water run-offs by routing the storm water drains
through catch pits.
4.4.2 Operation phase
The net water requirement for the proposed project is 2491 KLD which will be sourced from
Tungabadra River through pipe line. The effluent from beneficiation process will be treated in
thickener and will be recycled in beneficiation process. The Domestic water consumption is 54
KLD and the sewage generated is 44 KLD, after the consumptive usage and losses are
approximately 10 %. The 54 KLD sewage effluent will be generated which will be treated in STP
of capacity 50 KLD. As the project is proposed to have Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD), no
negative impact is envisaged on any surface water bodies in nearby areas. Surface flow of water
may cause the surface water to be contaminated mainly with inorganic solids, either in suspension
or solution, e.g., oil, grease etc.
Groundwater extraction is proposed for 3 years as per the ToR conditions.
4.5 Mitigation measures for Water Environment

4.5.1 Construction phase- Control of water pollution
Quality of construction wastewater emanating from the construction site will be controlled
through temporary drainage system with sediment traps (silting basin as water intercepting ditch)
for arresting the silt / sediment load before its disposal.
 Raw sewage being discharged will be collected and brought to the sewage treatment plant
(STP).
 The sewage will be first collected in the equalization tank after passing the same through
the screen chamber.
 The equalized sewage will then be passed through oil removal tank which will be
followed by an elaborate treatment comprising of secondary and tertiary treatment.
 Secondary treatment will consist of biological treatment comprising of Single Stage
Aerobic Treatment System consisting of aerobic reactor based on MBBR system followed
by tertiary treatment system.
 Tertiary treatment will consist of pressure sand filtration and activated carbon filtration
followed by UV Treatment of underflow of activated carbon filter.
 Entry to un-authorized persons will be prohibited.
 Majority of the water used in washing/ beneficiation process, will be recycled through
thickeners, cyclones etc.
 Rainwater harvesting comprising of rainwater collection pond and ground water recharge
pits, will be implemented, to reduce the depletion of ground water sources ALARP (As
Low As Reasonably Practicable)
4.5.2 Sewage treatment Plant
A dedicated STP of 50 KLD will be eatsblished and water generation from the plant proposed.
The treatment will be done up to tertiary stage.
A typical Effluent Treatment Plant involves the following steps:
 Screen
 Primary Clarifier
 MBBR Tank
 Secondary Clarifier
 Pre filteration tank
 Final Collection tank
 Sludge Processing
Sewage treatment Process
 Raw sewage being collected and brought to the sewage treatment plant (STP).
 The sewage is being collected in the equalization tank after passing the same through the
screen chamber.
 The equalized sewage then passed through oil removal tank which will be followed by an
elaborate treatment comprising of secondary and tertiary treatment
 Secondary treatment unit consist of biological treatment comprising of Single Stage
Aerobic Treatment System consisting of aerobic reactor based on MBBR system
followed by tertiary treatment system.
 Tertiary treatment unit consist of pressure sand filtration and activated carbon filtration
WATER BALANCE FOR THE PROJECT

Water requirement for the project is 2491 KLD, which will be met out from Tungabdra River
near 33 km from the industry. Yearly requirement comes around 6500 KLD.
Fig. No. 4.6 The water Balance for the 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant is given as below:
4.6 Impact on Soil Environment

4.6.1 Construction phase
The soil at the project site is sandy loam (as per the sample analysis report from laboratory).
Sandy loam is a type of soil used for gardening. This soil type is normally made up of sand along
with varying amounts of silt and clay The construction activities will lead to loss of plantation
within plant site due to pre-constructional clearing of site which will further lead to removal of
topsoil to some extent. Apart from such Temporary & localized construction impacts, no adverse
impacts on soil in the surrounding area are anticipated.
4.6.2 Operation Phase
The soil of the area may get affected due to operational activities if proper care is not taken.
 Changes in soil texture due to settling of air borne dust or due to wash off of solid
particulates by surface water. This will lead to change in porosity, permeability and other
physical characteristics of soil of the area.
 Changes in soil chemistry due to addition of foreign material from polluted air and water
due to plant activities in the area.
4.6.3 Mitigation measures for soil environment

 Proper mitigative measures like use of efficient pollution control systems, proper stack
height, and use of top soil in plantation results in no significant impact on soil of the core
zone.
There will be no impact on soil of the study area located beyond the working area of the proposed
project. Soil samples will be collected and tested at regular intervals from the nearby areas. This
will help in mitigation of any harmful impact on soil due to the project activity, if any.
4.7 Solid Waste Management:

Anticipated Impacts:
 The major solid waste that is likely to be generated from the proposed beneficiation plant
will be the tailings.
 The expected waste generation is about 0.9 mpta, in the form of tailings. It is proposed to
store the tailings at Kalingeri site where filtered tailing cake will be stored in the
designated tailing ponds.
 There is likelihood of washing away of tailings, during monsoon.
 Collapse/ slope failure of tailings dump is anticipated.
Mitigation Measures:
 The tailings storage area will be provided with proper access.
 Care will be taken to ensure proper slope protection etc.
 Majority of the tailings generated will be sold to brick/ tile manufacturing industries and
to cement manufacturing units.
 A garland drain will be provided to collect runoff from the tailing stock.
 The stock pile will be lined with impervious material to prevent percolation of leachate to
the ground.
 Construction of retention walls and rain water drainage will be made around the tailing
dump to arrest the silt wash off and collect rain water runoff. The run-off water will be
collected in a series of settling tanks and the settled water will be used for dust
suppression and plantation.
4.8 Impact on Land use
During construction, a large amount of construction debris like surplus earth, scrap, waste
packing materials, cables etc will be generated. These will be stored in identified areas, which can
later be either used in the operational phase or sold to outside parties for reuse.
4.9 Impact on Biological Environment (Ecology)

Entire beneficiation plant 26.44 ha falls within private land owned by the company and these land
historically seasonal Agriculture land. The land remnant isolated species like Neem, Teak species.
. The core area has one seasonal Nala (natural canal) passing within the land and also one
community sacred temple observed otherwise the landscape does not fall under any wildlife
corridors and any ecological sensitivity.
Entire tailing disposal land 101.17 ha open degraded revenue land, leased from the local
authority, of which, 20.33 ha land area will be used currently for stockpiling filter cake and tailing
pond establishment, remaining land of 80.84 ha will be kept for future expansion and also forest
plantations and water conservation purposes. The complete landscape is open barren with open
rocky with remnant thorny bushes with open grassland
Aquatic
The important water body is Narihalla Reservoir is > 15 Km away. As the plant is being designed
for maximum recirculation, with “zero discharge” concept no effluent will be discharged outside.
The domestic and plant sanitary water is proposed to be disposed into septic tank-soak pit system.
Hence no adverse impact on aquatic bodies is anticipated.
Terrestrial
Air pollutants released by the beneficiation plant found to be well within the prescribed standards
and no significant impact on terrestrial flora is expected.
Mitigation Measures:
➢ Project proponent will carry out plantation in scientific way.
➢ He will choose local species in consultation with local forest department.
➢ The existing trees, will be retained to a larger extent
Mitigation Measures
 A planned 5 year Afforestation scheme shall be developed over 33% area of the plant and
Tailing disposal site with 1600 saplings/Ha.
 The maintenance such as suitable fencing, watering, replacement of dead plants etc. shall
be done for better survival rate.
 Dust suppression shall be done by regular water sprinkling to minimize the impact on
plants
4.10 Socioeconomic Impact of Benefication & Pellet Plant (Anticipated impact)

4.10.1 Impact on human habitations.
4.10.1.1 Displacement of population in the core plant area.

Population will not be displaced because of proposed pellet plant. Income from agriculture being
meager, farmers are depending on casual labour. Some male population have migrated to nearby
towns and cities in search of jobs. The proposed pellet plant will rejuvenate household income
from non-agriculture sector and also bring back the migrated population. In fact, the proposed
pellet plant project will provide direct or indirect employment for local people.
4.10.1.2 Impact on population in buffer zone.

Already, the State and the Central Governments have been implementing many rural development
and welfare programs.
The buffer zone needs welfare measures like provision of drinking water, health care like
medicines, first aid, heath camps and dispensary with a doctor and basic medicines and testing
facility, education and training by providing school uniforms, transport, notebooks etc, recreation
facilities by donating to sports and to social and cultural organizations and infrastructural
facilities like providing street light fixtures, building materials, etc.
These welfare programs may bring some changes in the community and in the individual
lifestyles. They have been listed below. The list is not complete and mutually exclusive.
• The dependency on agriculture will decline,
• Employment in non-agriculture sector will increase,
• The literacy rates will improve,
• Money circulation will increase,
• Living costs will increase,
• Aspirations among people will increase, and
• Infrastructural facilities like transport and communication will improve.
There are some aspects which will not change because of pellet plant activity. They are listed
below:
• Water quality will remain the same,
• Human settlements will not be disturbed,
• Common property resources, in particular, grazing land will not decline, and
• Land holdings will not change due to pellet plant.
4.10.1.3 Negative impact:

All the anticipated negative impacts will be mitigated.
1. Pollution.
Air, water and soil pollution are well within acceptable limits. There will not be any soil
degradation due to the project.
2. Livelihood - The positive impact is better jobs and business.

As an impact of the project, cash flow in the local market will increase. The project will
enable regular income source from direct and indirect income.
3. Economics
Local economy will become vibrant because of proposed pellet plant activities. The villages
will be rejuvenated because of money flow and monetization of village economy.
4. Infrastructure
A significant amount of money will be spent on development of infrastructural facilities and
this will have positive impact on quality of life.
5. Impact on the cropping pattern and the crop production in the buffer zone.
It is observed from the informal meetings, focus group discussions and in-depth interviews
that the proposed pellet plant will have least impact on agriculture and yield.
6. Compensation for loss of land and crops.

There are no cases of payment of compensation for loss of land or crops.
7. Impact on the community resources such as grazing land.

The pellet plant activities will have least impact on the common property resources.
4.10.1.4 Mitigation measures.

The following tentative mitigating measures will be implemented. This list is not exhaustive, but
only suggestive. Proper budget plan will be provided in due course.
• Construction and renovation of schools and hospitals buildings,
• Laying and maintenance of village roads,
• Construction of houses for economically and socially weaker sections,
• Self-employment program (such as tailoring, wire netting, doll making, cane furniture,
etc.) for women members of SHGs,
• Vocational training schools for general or self-employment,
• Afforestation or tree plantation, either fruit bearing or timber or any forest plant,
• Adoption of Sub-Center or Primary Health Center or Community Health Center,
• Health, safety and medical facilities like first aid and basic medicines provided by their
medical facility.
• Education and Training (transport facility for students, supply of school uniform,
notebooks, dictionaries and shoes for school and college students), and
• Direct employment for locals for both skilled and unskilled workers.
Table. No 4.4 Impact parameters

Sl.No Impact Positive Impact Negative Impact
Parameter (Predicted) (Predicted)
1 Human  Existing land is already converted for Nil
Settlement Industrial purpose.
 Additional land requirement
does not arise at this juncture
2 Livelihood  No loss of existing livelihoods. A moderate influx of people in
Direct or indirect employment is expected to project construction and
occur
 Additional non-agricultural operation phases
Livelihood opportunities are expected both
directly and as spinoffs.
3 Employment  No loss of existing employment due to Nil
Generation the proposed project is expected.
 Total Direct employment opportunities
of 432 indirect employments are expected
 Local people will be given preference.
 Indirect employment to during
construction as a sequel to income multiple
effect and induced growth during construction
& operation phases of the project
4 Incomes and  Improvement of incomes of locals Nil
Revenues engaged in tertiary businesses by an average
10-15 % through induced spending.
 The successful commissioning
and running of the proposed expansion project
will attract more industrial investments which
in turn will benefit the
community
5 Demographics  The population levels of the Study Nil
villages are not likely to change in any
significant manner.
 The lifestyles of people are expected to
improve in tune with the rise in incomes and
improvement in infrastructure
facilities.
 The skill sets of the local residents are
expected to improve in keeping with the
Emerging employment opportunities.
6 Community  Health of people residing in buffer  If mitigation measure
Health zone/Study area is not likely to be impacted pertaining with Pollution are
adversely considering the nature of emissions not appropriately carried out
and the state-of-theart Emission control or addressed, it may raise
systems planned. community health issue.
 Health Initiatives and Environment  Adequate health care
Management Plan are planned and will be facilities without inadequate
executed for well-being of the peripheral health workers makes the
villages community vulnerable
7 Education Initiatives pertaining with Education shall be  Child Labor
promoted partnering with Govt. of Karnataka  School Drop-out ratio
may increase
8 Physical  Road and power network in the area is  If massive Increase in

Infrastructure expected to be strengthened as a sequel to vehicular traffic may lead to
industrial development around. higher incidence of road
 Provision for Drinking Water and accidents.
Community Centre for development may be  If influx of workers
some of the Socio-Economic development from outside areas then there
initiatives of MSPL will be an increased pressure
on water supply and sanitation
in the neighborhood during
construction phase
9 Social  Improvement in housing stock Nil
Infrastructure and educational facilities could be expected in
the long run as industrialization in the area
gains acceleration.
 Quality of Life (QoL) is considered to
get boosted.
4.11 Greenbelt Development & Conseravtion Plan
➢ There are few trees existing within the plant area, in addition to some bushes and thorny
plants.
➢ It is proposed to take-up 3-tier plantation, all along the boundary of the proposed project site
and on both sides of approach road, internal roads and also in the vacant land, with trees of wide
canopy like gulmohor, neem etc
4.11.1 Greenbelt Development plan both Beneficiation and Tailing disposal site
The Greenbelt will be established during the pre-monsoon season all along benefication & Pellet
plants and also tailing waste site to avoid the dusts coming out due to wind and while material
loading and unloading on to the site. Further, ore and transportation and approaching road to the
plants tree belts are created for dust absorption and also serve as an acoustic barrier for
minimizing the noise level, besides improving the aesthetic look of the plant area. The species
will be chosen based on CPCB ‘guideline for development of green belt - 2000’. On either side of
these roads, over a width of 5 m at 2 x 2-m space, broad leaved tree species (see Annexure II))
will be planted in plant area & tailing pond. The green belt minimum plantation width 7.5 meter
will be maintained all along the plant area.
4.11.2 Soil stabilization and plantation establishment techniques
Mulching will be most critical on slopes where erosional concerns require temporary stabilisation
prior to establishment of seeds or planted vegetation. Mulching materials to be used are native
grass, . Application of straw or grass mulch should be performed in low wind conditions to allow
for uniform application. Further, nitrogen-fixing plants such as legume species should be sown
(e.g . Stylosanthes Hamata / local grass species). Precaution should be taken for a year to prevent
noxious and nonnative weeds that invade an area of vegetation out-competing the native species,
thereby replacing valuable native vegetation with useless weedy vegetation.
Such a mulching method will also prevent water erosion by reducing wind erosion, reducing soil
crusting, and decreasing rainfall impact, insulating the soil surface and decreasing evaporation.
Only after initial establishment of grass and legume species, afforestation can be carried out.
4.11.3 Road side plantations measures

New approaching roads around the beneficiation plants and tailing disposal site could also
potentially establish native forest. and all along the core area and landfilling which largely
address with dust, noise and soil erosion by establishing forestry activity, green belt development
and siltation tank and garland pits within the ML boundary.
4.11.4. Plantation management
Native species should be preferred for afforestation and reforestation measures in the region. It is
very important to promote native species during reforestation/afforestation. With the onset of
monsoon, green belt created all along the inactive dump area and waste land use and degraded
open areas. The plantation may consider an interval of 2 × 2-m in 60 × 60 × 60-cm size pits filled
with topsoil, Farm Yard Manure (FYM) and vermin-compost.
Preference will be given to fruit-bearing trees/shrubs. The list of species (Annexure II) is almost
a comprehensive list of species adapted for this region (As CPCB guidelines). Highest priority for
choice of trees was based on locally adapted ecological services that they provide, particularly in
attracting other species of birds, insects and bats increasing biodiversity.
Tree species that are adapted to dry-decidous to semi-arid conditions will be chosen. We will
maximize the diversity of trees to include the following criteria: 1. Large canopies and moderate
sized trees, 2. Short and long lived trees, 3. deciduous trees, 4. Fast and moderate growing, 5.
Trees that attract birds and bats, 6. Trees that provide leaf manure and fix nitrogen.
Large canopy long-lived trees will be spaced 20 m apart with the moderate/small-sized canopy
trees in between in relatively dense spacing depending on species. Some species for instance
grow well in close proximity to other individuals of the same species. The large canopy species
will be distributed so that no two adjacent trees are the same. Both short-lived fast-growing and
long-lived trees of moderate size will be planted together. Short-lived trees may last 10-20 years.
Tree species that are adapted to arid conditions will be chosen therefore its water requirements
can be met by the less rainfall in this region, and they will grow reasonably well under the eco-
climatic conditions of Bellary district.
Fig. 4.5 Schematic representation of planting sapling/seeds based on the its growth
characteristics canopy growth and lifespan.
Young plantations need to be properly tended for obtaining uniform growth and better survival
rate. During the first year itself, there are chances of casualty due to heavy downpour, wind
damage, etc. Adequate number of seedlings will be kept ready in stacks for gap filling. For the
first 5 years, all maintenance works of the plantations will be carried out. In case of dump area
plantations, terraces will be repaired along with gully plugging for preventing rill formation. In
addition to this, landslides will be contained by stone pitching; check dams and terrace benches
will be regularly monitored for de-siltation. Organic fertilizer, vermin-compost and FYM will be
used along with bio-pesticides. Weeding, soil working, and mulching will be carried out as per
necessity.
According to time, planting is of following types:
Pre-monsoon planting: When irrigation is possible or where summers are accompanied by fairly
good showers, pre-monsoon planting can be done.
Advance Planting: During pre-monsoon showers, i.e., just before onset of monsoon, broad-leaved
species can be planted. Avoid planting of thorny species if rains are less.
Early planting: Necked or poly-bag seedlings, root-shoot cuttings, branch cuttings planting should
be completed as early as possible (within 7 to 10 days) so that whole growing period can be
utilized by the seedling for growth.
Late planting: During rains, seasonal streams become fluvial. Early planting is sometimes not
possible in such streams. After water recedes, slightly late planting can be done in the streams.
Retreat planting: In many pockets of South India, retreating monsoon can be used for casualty
replacement or even for fresh planting.
Post-Plantation Care
This will include the following measures:
 Protection from grazing, fires and human pressure (minimum 10 years)
 Watering at least once a week during dry spells
 Organic fertilizer and manuring
 Weeding thrice in the first year and twice a year, during the subsequent two years and soil
working
 Plugging and mulching
 Protection from pests
 This post-plantation care is undertaken at least for three years after the plantation.
 Pruning: Removal of side branches of lower one-third height is called pruning. It should
be done between saplings to pole stage.
 Thinning: Removal of extra plants is called thinning. To maintain proper space between
trees, judicious thinning is done.
 Exotic or invasive species such as Prosopis juliflora, Parthenium spp, Lantana camara
and Chromolenia sp., should be removed from the afforested land use.
Annexure-II - Table 4.5. A list of native species proposed for afforestation and green-belt
and avenue plantations.
landfill
Sl. site/green Frugivore attracts /local
Species name Family Life forms
No belt& importance
avenue tree
Native to India, and grow locally
Tree, moderate
1 Acacia nilotica Mimosaceae both very well; fuel wood species
canopy
locally
2 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae landfill Pre monsoon food/shelter/ nesting
3 Butea monosperma Fabaceae landfill Pre monsoon shelter / nesting
Civet and bear food resource
4 Cassia auriculata Fabaceae both Shrubs
tree; Butterfly plant
Butterfly plant ; bear eat the
5 Cassia fistula Caesalpiniaceae both Small canopy
fruits
Small tree and
6 Cassia siamia Caesalpiniaceae both Butterfly plant
canopy
7 Cordia wallichii Boraginaceae both sub-canopy Food
8 Emblica officinalis Phyllanthaceae landfill sub-canopy food / shelter
9 Erythrina indica Fabaceae landfill canopy nectar birds/ shelter /
10 Ficus benghalensis Moraceae both Tree, big canopy Birds, mammals
11 Ficus glomerata Moraceae landfill Tree, big canopy food/shelter/ nesting
Birds, mammals; religious
12 Ficus religiosa Moraceae both Tree, big canopy
important species
Locally abundant and native to
13 Hardwickia binata Fabaceae both Tree
that habitat
Adapted to grow in arid/dry land
14 Jatropha gossypifolia Euphorbiaceae landfill Shrubs
use
Greenbelt &
15 Madhuca indica Sapotaceae Tree, big canopy Food, shelter
avenue tree
16 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae both Tree, big canopy Food / shelter / nesting
Nitrogen fixing and grow in arid
17 Pongamia pinnata Fabaceae both Tree
land use
Tree, moderate
18 Syzgium cumini Myrtaceae both Birds, mammals; medicinal use
canopy
Small tree, sub
19 Trema orentalis Ulmaceae both Birds, mammals
canopy
20 Zizyphus jujube Rhamnaceae both Shrub, sub canopy Butterfly plant
21 Anogeissus latifolia Combretaceae both Shrub, sub canopy
22 Phoenix sylvestris Arecaceae Canopy Native landscape species
23 Wrightia tinctoria Apocynaceae Sub canopy Economic value at craft making
NOTE. Please refer Annexure II – List of tree species cleared from the Core Area.
4.12 Wild Life Conservation Measures for Schedule-I species

Conservation and management of wildlife are complex system which deals with ecosystem
management and other anthropocentric such as socio-ecological aspect of community live in.
Wildlife management is the complex and need to be considered multifaceted factors such as food-
web, resources competitions, anthropogenic, forest fragmentation, and sociological issues such
community livelihood, culture, ethics and forest dependency etc. total 5 species of fauna falls
within the category of Wildlife Protection Act 1972 under Schedule I .The details of each species
ecology and conservation issues given below.
Table 4.6 List of Scheduled I Wildlife species
Sl. WPA-
Local Name Scientific name Family
No Schedule
1 Common leopard Panthera pardus Felidae Sch-I
2 Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus Phasianidae Sch-I
3 Indian Rock Python Python molurus molurus Pythonidae Sch-I
4 Cobra Naja naja Elapidae Sch-I
5 Crimson rose Pachiopta hector Papilionidae Sch- I
1) Common Leopard
Scientific Classification
Kingdom Animalia
Phylum Chordata
Class Mammalia
Order Carnivora
Family Felidae
Genus Panthera
Local Names
Kannada Chirathe, Kiruba, Honigya
English Indian Leopard, Panther
Description of Indian Leopard:
The Indian Leopard (Panthera Pardus fusca) is widely distributed in the Indian Sub- continent.
This is one of the five big cats found India. (other big cats: Asiatic Lion, Bengal Tiger, Snow
Leopard and Clouded Leopard). There are 27 sub species of leopards exist in the world. The one
in India is the sub species fusca. Their population is estimated about 12,000 in 2014 in India.
Food habits:
 Basically carnivore, feeds upon the meat.
 Leopards are versatile and opportunistic hunters and have a very broad diet from fowls to
ungulates, dogs to cattle. The diet includes herbivores like axis deer, Sambar deer, Nilgai,
(not in the project area) wild boar, Spotted deer, Langur, Macaque, Hare, Peafowl, Spur
fowl etc.
 The Leopard that lives in the scrub and grasslands chiefly depends upon the dogs and
livestock.
Strikes the prey in a lightning speed and drags the hunt into the thick bush, into a cave or upon a
tree to feed leisurely
Habitat Loss: Leopards are facing the threat of habitat loss by the stone quarries, urbanization,
encroachment etc. Most of the Leopards take shelter in the rocky caves of hillocks that belong to
revenue land. When the same revenue land is leased out for stone quarrying, the Leopards are
forced to leave their age old natural shelters. Such leopards go in search of new habitat and face
threat of killing by the people out of fear. The fragmentation of the natural habitat resulted in loss
of prey base.
The loss of prey base: The loss of habitat is resulted in loss of natural prey base of Leopards.
Hence they depend majorly on feral dogs, live stocks and minor prey animals only.
Vengeance Killing: In some cases the when a leopard kills a sheep or goar and any other
livestock; the people sometimes poison the same and kill the leopards. These retaliatory killings
go unnoticed generally.
CONSERVATION MEASURES:
Proposed measures for mitigation of Man-Leopard conflict:
Habitat enrichment:
Enrich the habitat by following conservation measures:
 Plant the endemic / local wild species of fruiting trees in forest outside the project area.
This will attract the Bonnet macaque and Hanuman Langur, Wild boars etc., which are the
food base for Leopards.
 Enrich the ecosystem by Soil and moisture conservation activities, this helps the
enrichment of the habitat and help growth of floral diversity.
 Provide artificial waterholes in the Leopards habitat away from human settlements, so as
to provide them water during all seasons. This measure will prevent them from roaming
around human habitation for water.
Awareness:
 Create awareness among the people of villages within 10 kms from the Project area about
the importance of Leopards, reasons for conflicts and preventive measures etc.
 Install sign boards along the mining / civil roads in the wildlife landscape about cautioning
the divers to go slowly and watchfully to prevent hitting the wildlife.
 Install the sign boards / Posters about importance of wildlife and how to prevent any
instances of attack.
Monitoring and facilitating:
 Identify the Leopards regular path or movements in different seasons and alert the people
in this corridor.
 Establish a network of informers / watchers to monitor the movement of wildlife including
Leopards; provide communication gadgets such as walkie-talkie to them.
 Appoint the watchers or facilitators to help the victims of attack get suitable treatment or
compensation. In case of attack on livestock, help the People to get suitable compensation
for loss of their livestock / domestic animals in Leopard attack.
 Clear the thick bushes and weeds of Lantana, Ipomoea, Eupatorium etc., in and around the
villages to prevent the leopards from hiding in it. Also clear the bushes along the roads
side in the Leopard corridor
 Establish a rapid response team to rush to the spot of Leopard attack and help the victims
to get first aid and suitable treatment.
 Use camera traps to monitor the regular movement of Leopards.
2) Indian Peafowl
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Aves
Order: Galliformes
Family: Phasianidae
Subfamily: Phasianinae
Genus: Pavo
Species: Pavo cristatus
Common name Indian peafowl or peacock
This species has an extremely large range, and hence does not approach the thresholds for
Vulnerable under the range size criterion (Extent of Occurrence <20,000 km 2 combined with a
declining or fluctuating range size, habitat extent/quality, or population size and a small number
of locations or severe fragmentation).
Food:
It is an omnivorous bird. It’s diet consist of small mammals (Mice), reptiles (Lizards and snakes),
amphibians (frogs), arthropods, insects, termites, ants, locusts and scorpions. It also feeds upon
seeds, fruit, vegetables, flowers, leaves, and minnows in shallow streams and so on. With its
strong bill it is able to kill a snake, Around cultivated areas, peafowl feed on a wide range of
crops.
Threat:
Poaching of peacocks for their meat, feathers and accidental poisoning by feeding on pesticide
treated seeds are known threats. Feathers are decorative and associated with religious
importance. However, presently, there is no severe threat to this species, primarily for its status
as a National bird and secondarily due to religious belief this species is protected. Since its
feathers are in great demand for commercial purpose, its main threat to its survival. Their loud
calls make them easy to detect. In natural habitats, panther and tigers are major predators.
Conservation Plan:
Following activities will be done to assist conservation of the species in the area:
 Walkie-talkie will be provided to the watch and ward persons
 Awareness program will be run with the help of experts
 Strict vigil on trade of feathers
 Creating green belt and water harvesting structures so that it will increase its food in the
natural habitat.
3) PYTHON: Python molurus
Python molurus is a large non venomous python species found in many tropic and subtropic areas
of the Indian python, black-tailed python and Indian rock python. The color pattern is whitish or
yellowish with the bloteched patterns varying from shades of tan to dark brown. Pythons inhabit
a wide range of habitats including wetlands, open forest, scrublands, harsh desert, rainforests,
woodlands, grassy marshes, river valleys, rocky slopes, and grasslands.
Habitat:
Python occurs in wide range of habitats including grasslands, swamps, marshes, rocky foothills,
woodlands, open jungle and river valleys. Sometimes they can be found in abandoned mammal
burrows, hollow trees, dense water reeds and mangrove thickets.
Food:
Like all snakes, the Indian python is carnivorous. Its diet consists primarily birds and mammals.
Python uses its sharp rearward pointing teeth to seize its prey, then wraps its body around the
prey, at the same time contracting its muscles, killing the prey by constriction. Sometimes
Pythons are found near human habitation due to the presence of rats, mice, and other vermin as a
food source. This also leads to python preying on poultry. Exceptionally large pythons may even
require larger food items such as pigs or goats, and are known to have attacked and eaten
crocodiles and dear.
Conservation Measures:
Pythons have historically been slaughtered to supply the world teather market, as well as for folk
medicines, and captured for the pet trade. Python is killed for extracting fat. Some of the species
like Burmese python have been declared as “Vulnerable”, by IUCN, reflecting its overall
population decline. Important reasons for the decline are trade for skins and for food. In some
places, habitat degradation is cause for their decline.
Conservation Plan:
Conservation plan include educational materials, signs, and install pride amongst the local as
caretakers of the last population of python in their habitation.
 Public awareness will be created
 Strict vigil will lead to reducing incidences of poaching and hunting
 Awareness will be created in local communities so as to not to harm the python and report
any cases of poaching.
Effective communication network will be developed between local people, forest officers and
conservation experts to reduce the risk of the human conflict with python, hunting and poaching
activities.
MEASURES FOR CONSERVATION OF WILD LIFE:
(i) WATER HOLES FOR HABITAT IMPROVEMENT:
Animals and birds need a regular water source for their daily consumption. As the area receives
copious amount of Avg. 840 mm rainfall annually, rain water which is accumulated in pit shall be
used for dust suppression and afforestation purposes. During hot summer wild animals and birds
stay outside forest in search of water source for quenching thirst. It is therefore proposed to
construct water holes in the plant & tailing area at convenient points. These water holes would be
sufficient to store the water to meet drinking requirement of animals and birds. The water holes
should be provided with cement concrete bedding, side walls with stone pitching and grass should
be grown in gap for gripping while animals enter into the water holes. These water holes are
cleaned at regular intervals to remove leaf litter, de-silting and refilling water by pumping water
from pits. Few shades are provided around water holes for animal resting during summer season.
Fruit bearing trees shall be grown around water holes to nesting and food for birds and shade for
wild animals.
(ii) Noise levels
During plant operation noise levels will increase due to loading and unloading operations and
transportation of mineral on the haul roads. Wild life is sensitive to higher noise levels like
human beings. To reduce the noise levels during mining operations the following steps are
proposed.
i) Use of well maintained loading machines with sharp bucket teeth
ii) Well maintained roads with gentle gradient (1 in 16). No over speeding of
vehicles
iii) No transportation activity during night hours to maintain peace and tranquility.
(iii) Air Quality:
The ambient air quality in the buffer zone shall be maintained within the CPCB limits in respect
of SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx and CO emissions. For this the following steps are proposed.
i) Regular sprinkling of water on roads
ii) No overloading to avoid spillage, trucks covered with tarpaulins.
iii) Creation of green belt around the ultimate pit limit and avenue plantation with
thick foliage to arrest dust.
(iv) Training & Awareness Activity :
All the plant workers and staff shall be trained in conservation of wild life and develop a liking
for wild life conservation by celebrating Vanamahotsva and Environment day involving local
village people and students. The drivers shall give be trained to way for wild life.
The villagers are also made aware of wild life conservation by conducting meetings using
pamphlets, audio & video means. Importance of plants and wild life will be informed through
conducting quiz, drawing & painting competitions & essay writing for students.
Prizes shall be distributed to the winners; Women participation in conserving the forest plants
shall be rewarded.
Villagers are awarded for protecting & preventing wood theft tree cutting helping Forest Dept.
Guards in catching Poachers. Conservation activities for protection of flora & fauna shall be
implemented in consultation of Forest Department officials.
(v) Guards :
One machan (watch tower) shall be erected near the water reservoir with two nos. of anti-
poaching guards to prevent any poaching in the plant & tailing area. They shall be provided with
walkie-talkie to inform the forest authorities and plant authorities in case of sighting any
intruders. They shall also inform them of any forest fires flaring up to take preventive steps.
(vi) Fund for wild life conservation:
It is proposed to conduct the above activities in a time bound manner. The budgetary allocation is
as given in the Table.no 4.7 below. The lessee proposes to spend Rs. 20 lakhs for wild life
conservation during plant operation.
Table : 4.7 YEAR-WISE BUDGET FOR WILDLIFE CONSERVATION MEASURES
AT PLANT AREA
Rs In lakhs
Sl. 2023- 2024- 2025-
Particulars 2022-23 2026-27
No. 24 25 26
1 Construction of water
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6
holes and maintenance
2 Fruit bearing and shade
giving trees around water 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.0 1.2
holes
3 Erection of watch towers 1.3 1.2 1.0 1.0 1.2
4 Provision of salt licks 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
5 Anti-poaching guards 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Total 4.8 4.7 4.7 4.5 5.0
The habitat management in and around the plant area must be adopted by planting suitable fodder
species to enable wild herbivores to thrive upon. Following suggestions, if implemented will
encourage the native fauna to return to the areas cleared for mining:
 A dense green belt consisting of shrubs and trees of different species must be created
around the plant & tailing areas and also along the roads which will act also as a dust and
noise barrier.
 Awareness programs amongst the local people as well as plant staff, regarding the
importance of wild life, their habits and habitats, should be organized so that stray and
displaced fauna (due to degradation and de-fragmentation of their habitat) is not killed.
 Rock fill dams and check dams should to be constructed in the plant & tailing areas to
prevent the soil erosion. This will be able to store sufficient quantity of filtered water in
the area and will act as water holes for the faunal life present in the region.
 The green cover loss due to construction of haul roads and heavy vehicular movements
will restrict the animal movements to the adjoining areas. Therefore, development of a
green belt and massive afforestation program of fruit bearing and shade giving plant
species around the plant & tailing areas will provide food and shelter for them.
 Intense campaign amongst the local people as well as project staff should be carried out
regarding the importance of regional biodiversity and need for their conservation for
posterity.
 Fire Lines hazardous role in the destruction of habitat. It is suggested that PP should take
keen interest to protect the forests from fire. It is suggested that the PP should take
preventive measures in 2 sq.km area around the plant. It is also suggested that fire
preventing squad should be formed to fight the fire. Training should be provided to the
squad members through the State Forest Department.
 All the transportation operations after the sunset should be stopped.
 Bright lights should not be used after 6 pm.
4.13 Impact on local transport infrastructure due to the Project Project Proponent shall
conduct Impact of Transportation study as per Indian Road Congress Guidelines.
The total product will move towards Yeshwantnagar railway siding and also towards NH between
Kudligi and Sandur for road transport. For road transport the connecting from plant to National
highway of 1.2 kms shall be made by the plant authority meeting at somalapur village which will
be a concrete/tar road of two way facility. The carrying capacity shall be 1200 PCU as per Indian
Road Congress
4.13.1 Impact of Tailing Disposal and Mitigation Measures
The disposal of tailings above the ground level has a likelihood of following Impacts:
1. Likely to cause Soil pollution due to contamination of local soil by either dumping
practices or by airborne emissions from the dump top.
2. During Rainy season, any leachate transportation into the Ground water level may
contaminate GW conditions.
3. During the time of operation any operational hazard due to slope failure, rill erosion,
mechanical accidents etc.
Considering these aspects, the following mitigation measures are proposed to be followed.
1. The tailings shall be stacked in the form of Cakes having 9-10% moisture content. Hence
there won’t be any surface fugitive emissions from the dump surfaces.
2. The Tailing area will be lined with Polycline sheets for making the bottom impervious.
Thereby there can not be any soil or ground water contaminations due to the Tailing Stack
Yard.
3. As the Tailings will be stacked in benches, the slopes of the older benches will be
stabilized by grass turfing and latter by plantations.
4. The Tailing area shall have a boundary wall to prevent any trespassing as well as contain
the area from the outer environment.
5. Proper Toe walls and Retaining walls shall be constructed around the dump site to divert
the runoff water and collect the runoff in a separate pit for settling and reuse in the Plant
operation.
6. Plantations around the dump site with a berm of 15 mt width shall be carried out to
prevent the air borne dust and pollutants to migrate outsideth area as well as act as a
environmental barrier for the operation.
Chapter-5
ANALYSIS OF
ALTERNATIVES
(TECHNOLOGY & SITE)
5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

5.1 ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGIES
Alternative analysis is the process of analyzing the proposed location for suitability for basic
necessities to operate the plant safely and for any alternate technology. This analysis also covers
the environmental aspect of pollution prevention and improvement in quality of life in the project
vicinity. The project alternative is the course of action in place of another, that would meet the
same purpose and need, but which would avoid or minimize negative impacts and enhance
project benefits. Such projects may result in specific impacts which can be avoided or mitigated
by adherence to certain predetermined performance standards, guidelines or design criteria.
Alternative approaches may therefore be more effective in integrating environmental and social
concerns into the project planning process.
5.2 ALTERNATIVE SITES
The proposed plant site is connected from the captive mine of M/s.MSPL i.e., Narasimha Iron
Ore Mine using a downhill pipe conveyour. As such no other site is suitable as an alternative
taking into account cost and environmental considerations.
There are two sites initially chosen for disposal of the Tailings in the form of Cakes. Considering
all advantages and disadvantages for these two locations, the site closest to the plant area within 6
km radius is chosen for the Tailing Disposal.
Chapter-6
ENVIRONMENTAL
MONITORING
PROGRAMME
6.0 GENERAL
The monitoring and evaluation of the management measures envisaged are critical activities in
implementation of the proposed project. Monitoring involves periodic checking to ascertain
whether activities are performed according to the plan. This provides necessary feedback for
project management to check the efficacy of environmental performance. The purpose of the
environmental monitoring plan is to ensure that the envisaged purpose of the project is achieved
and accrues desired benefit.
To ensure the effective implementation of the proposed mitigation measures, the road objectives
of monitoring plan are:
 To evaluate the performance of mitigation measures proposed in the EMP.
 To evaluate the adequacy of Environmental Impact Assessment
 To suggest improvements in environmental management plan, if required
 To enhance environmental quality.
 To undertake compliance monitoring of the proposed project operation.
A separate department, the "Environment Management Department (EnMD) has been constituted
to carry out day to day environmental monitoring/ inspection requirements at the project site.
6.1 TECHNICAL ASPECTS
6.1.1 METHODOLOGIES
Environmental monitoring is required to know the Quality of Ambient Air, Water and Noise
Levels during the operation phase of the proposed project and take required corrective measures,
in case of any non-compliance with the norms stipulated by regulatory authorities. The
methodologies adopted for environmental monitoring will be in accordance with the CPCB and
SPCB requirement.Environmental Monitoring shall be done as per National Ambient Air Quality
Monitoring Series: Naaqs/2003-04, Guidelines for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring, Central
Pollution Control Board, April, 2003, Guidelines For The Measurement Of Ambient Air
Pollutants Central Pollution Control Board May, 2011, Minars/27/2007-08, Guidelines For Water
Quality Monitoring, Pollution Control Board Methods of Monitoring and Analysis Annex IV of
guidelines. Planned monitoring program shall be carried out to evaluate the effectiveness of
various / specific aspects of technological / mitigation measures. Monitoring shall be conducted
by the environmental management cell by engaging a lab recognized by MoEF&CC .
6.1.2 Frequency & Locations of Environmental Monitoring
A comprehensive monitoring programme is given under
Table 6.1: Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters
Frequency of Parameters Required
S.No. Particulars Sampling
Monitoring to be Monitored
Air Quality
1 Ambient Air quality in and around Twice a month 24 hours continuously PM2.5, PM10,SO2 &
the plant & tailing NO2
Water Quality
2 Water Quality around the plant & Once in a Month Grab Sampling IS 2296 and as per IS:
tailing (Surface & Ground Water) 10500
Frequency of Parameters Required

S.No. Particulars Sampling
Monitoring to be Monitored
Noise Level Monitoring
3 Ambient Noise levels & work Once in a Quarter Continuous for 24 hours Noise Level
place Noise monitroing with 1 hour interval
Soil Quality
4 Soil Quality around the plant & Once in a year Grab Sampling IS: 2720
tailing
6.1.3 DATA ANALYSIS
The procedures that will be followed for analyzing the parameters are indicated below.
 Water samples will be analyzed for various parameters as per IS: 10500
 PM2.5& PM10 will be analyzed as per IS: 5182 Part IV, SO2 & NO2 as per IS: 5182 Part II
Part VI respectively using APM 550 dust sampler or equivalent.
 SO2 samples will be analyzed using improved West-Gaeke method for air samples with
the help of spectrophotometer.
 NO2 samples will be analyzed using Jacob and Hocheiser modified (Na-As) method for air
samples with the help of spectrophotometer.
6.1.3.1 MICROMETEOROLOGY
A micro-meteorological station will be setup at an approximately central location of the plant
area. The site shall be free from obstructions to ensure free air movement. An "Automatic
Weather Station" will be installed at least 5 m above the ground. The following attributes will be
measured at one hour intervals continuously round the clock:
 Wind Speed
 Wind Direction
 Air Temperature
 Relative Humidity
Precipitation will be recorded on daily basis.
The data will be recorded automatically on a data logger.
6.1.3.2 Ambient Air Quality
Monitoring of ambient air will be done for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, NH3, O3, Pb, Ni, As,
C6H6, BaP, and CO. Locations of monitoring stations will be determined based on the receptors
in the airshed, and a network of monitoring stations will be set up to determine the exposure
levels. Test method adopted for monitoring result analysis will be Gravimetric method (IS 5182:
Part 23), Gravimetric (EPA 1998), Improved West & Geake method (IS 5182 Part 2 RA2017),
Modified Jacob & Hochheiser method (IS 5182 Part 6 RA 2017), AAS method after sampling on
EPM 2000 Filter Paper IS 5182 (Part-22):2016, Absorption & Desorption followed by Gas
Chromatography, Solvent Extraction followed by Gas Chromatography, and Non-Dispersive
Infrared method (IS 5182 Part 10: 1999) respectively.
6.1.3.3 Work Zone Air Quality

Work-zone quality shall be monitored at various strategic locations (plant, loading-unloading
points, haulage road. 8 hourly samples shall be collected at each of the locations twice a month.
6.1.3.3 Surface Water

Similar to Ambient Air Monitoring, monitoring locations and stations will be setup to determine
the quality. But the number of parameters to be observed will be higher in case of Surface water.
A battery of tests will be performed for various parameters which have been listed below:
Table 6.2 – Surface Water monitoring parameters with Testing Methods
Sl.No. Parameter Testing Methods
1 Colour Visual Comparison Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2120 B, C
2 pH at 250C pH Meter,APHA 23RD Ed,2017 4500H+ B
3 Dissolved Oxygen (min) Modified Winkler Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2540 C
4 Turbidity Nephelometric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2130 B
5 Chloride (max) Titrimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500Cl- B
6 Total Dissolved Solids Gravimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2540 C
7 Oil & Grease (max) Gravimetric Method (Solvent Extraction),APHA 23RD
Ed,2017:5520-B
8 BOD(3)days at 270C (max) Oxygen Depletion Method,IS 3025(P-44): 1993 RA 2003
9 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) Open Reflux Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 5220 C
10 Arsenic as As By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3114 B
11 Lead as Pb By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017 3111 B
12 Cadmium as Cd (max) By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 B
13 Copper as Cu (max) By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 B
14 Zinc as Zn(max) By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 B
15 Selenium as Se (max) By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500 Se C
16 Cyanide as CN (max) Distillation followed by Spectrophotometric Method.
APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500 CN- C, D
17 Fluoride as F (max) Distillation followed by SpectrophotometricMethod.
APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500F- C
18 Sulphates (SO4) (max) Turbidimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500 SO42- E
19 Phenolic Compounds as C6H5OH Chloroform extraction by Colorimetric Method
(max) APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 5530 B, D
20 Iron as Fe (max) By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500Fe, B
21 Nitrate as NO3 (max) By UV-Screen Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500 NO3- E
22 Anionic Detergents (max) Anionic Surfactants as MBAS,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 5540 C
23 Total Coli form By Multiple Tube Fermentation Technique, APHA 23RD Ed,2017:
9221 B
24 Hexavalent Chromium (Cr+6) Diphenyl Carbazide Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500Cr B
6.1.3.4 Ground water levels
Water levels in wells at varying distances all around the project area shall be monitored every-
month.
6.1.3.5 Ground water quality
Ground water samples shall be collected at varying distances wrt the plant site. Samples will be
collected once a month. The parameters listed in IS: 10500 shall be monitored.
Table 6.3 – Surface Water monitoring parameters with Testing Methods
Sl.No. Parameter Testing Methods
1 Colour Visual Comparison Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2120 B, C
2 Odour Threshold Odour Test,APHA 23RD Ed,2017 :2150 B
3 Taste Flavor Threshold Test,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2160 C
4 Turbidity Nephelometric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2130 B
5 pH at 250C pH Meter,APHA 23RD Ed,2017 4500H+ B
6 Total Hardness (as CaCO3) EDTA Titrimetric method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2340 C
7 Iron as Fe (mg/l) By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500Fe, B
8 Chloride as Cl (mg/l) Argentometric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500Cl- B
9 Residual Free Chlorine Iodometric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500Cl, B
10 Total Dissolved Solids Gravimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 2540 C

11 Calcium as Ca EDTA Titrimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500Ca B
12 Magnesium as Mg Calculation Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500Mg B
13 Copper as Cu By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 B
14 Manganese as Mn Persulfate Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500Mn B
15 Sulphate as SO4 Turbidimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500 SO42- E
16 Nitrate as NO3 By UV-Screen Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500 NO3- E
17 Fluoride as F Distillation followed by SpectrophotometricMethod.
APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500F- C
18 Phenolic Compounds as C6H5OH Chloroform extraction by Colorimetric Method
APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 5530 B, D
19 Mercury as Hg AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3112 B
20 Cadmium as Cd By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 B
21 Selenium as Se By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3500 Se C
22 Arsenic as As By AAS Method.APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3114 B
23 Cyanide as CN Distillation followed by Spectrophotometric Method.
APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 4500 CN- C, D
24 Lead as Pb By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017 3111 B
25 Zinc as Zn By AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 B
26 Mineral Oil Partition-Gravimetric Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 5520 B
27 Alkalnity as CaCO3 Titration Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017:2320 B
28 Aluminium as Al AAS Method,APHA 23RD Ed,2017: 3111 D
29 Boron Curcumin method ,APHA 23rd ED, 2017: 4500B, B
6.1.3.6 Ambient Noise Monitoirng
Ambient noise levels shall be monitored at all the locations where ambient air quality has been
carried out during EIA study. In addition, ambient noise levels shall also be monitored at villages
along the transportation route. Noise levels shall be recorded at one hour intervals continuously
for 24 hours at each of the locations once in a season..
6.1.3.7 Work zone Noise
Work-zone noise levels shall be monitored at various strategic locations (plant, loading-unloading
points, workshop(s), Plant office, etc.).
Noise levels shall be recorded at one hour intervals continuously for 8 hours at each of the
locations once a month.
6.1.3.8 Occupational health and safety
An Occupational Health Centre (OHC) for Plant shall be proposed . A systematic programme for
medical check-up at regular intervals will be followed at the Occupational Health Centre (OHC)
for all workers to ascertain any changes in health condition due to the working conditions.
All workmen employed in hazardous working conditions will be provided with adequate
personnel safety appliances.
6.1.3.9 Plantation and green belt development
Green belt development vis-a-vis safety zone management and progressive plantation in and
around the project site shall be developed. The data on area of green cover, survival rate etc. shall
be compiled for periodic review.
 Annual plans for tree plantation with specific number of trees to be planted shall be made.
The fulfillment of the plan shall be monitored by the EnMD every six months.
 A plan for post plantation care will be reviewed in every monthly meeting. Any abnormal
death rate of planted trees shall be investigated.
 Watering of the plants, manuring, weeding will be carried out for minimum 5 years.
6.1.3.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
CSR activities proposed are expected to play a significant role in the peripheral development of
the region. The project will improve the infrastructure & economic conditions leading to overall
socio economic development of the region. The communities, which are likely to be benefited by
the project, are thus one of the key stakeholders for the mining project.
MSPLL has planned structured interactions with the community to disseminate the measures
taken by MSPL and also to elicit suggestions for overall improvement for the development of the
area.
6.1.4 REPORTING SCHEDULE
After completion of analysis, the results of analysis will be sent to Karnataka State Pollution
Control Board on a monthly basis and MoEF&CC & CPCB on a six-monthly basis. Copies of the
reports will be maintained at the Plant and will be made available to the concerned inspecting
authorities like KSPCB and MoEF&CC etc.
6.1.5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
As there is no point source of emission and no generation of any industrial effluent, the possibility
of emission/waste water discharge exceeding the norm & leading to emergency situation is not
envisaged.
6.1.6 DETAILED BUDGET & PROCUREMENT SCHEDULES
The budgetary allocation for Environmental monitoring is Rs 15 lakhs per annum. A third party
recognised by MoEF&CC shall be engaged to monitor all the environmental parameters. Hence,
no procurement of any monitoring equipment is required.
Half yearly compliance report in respect of stipulated prior environmental clearance terms &
conditions are being submitted on 1st June and 1st Dec of each calendar year to MoEF&CC,
Bengaluru Office.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 Public Consultation
This EIA & EMP Report has been prepared in compliance with the EIA Notification dated 14th
September 2006 and the Terms of Reference (ToR) issued by the Ministry of Environment,
Forests & Climate Change (vide letter No IA-J-11011/329/2021-IAII(IND-I) dated 15th Nov,
2022) & Aamendment to TOR Dated 14th Feb, 2022 . The input on various parameters, Plant
area, production levels, engineering technology, waste generation, handling & storing etc. for the
preparation of the EIA & EMP Report. After completing the process of public consultation, the
proceedings of the same, as recorded by Karnataka Pollution Control Board will be incorporated
along with proposed action plan with the budget, to comply with points raised in public
consultantion with respect to Environmental Aspects, in the Final EIA Report. Then the Final EIA
Report will be submitted for appraisal by the Expert Appraisal Committee of MoEF&CC to get
the Environmental Clearance for the project under the provisions of EIA notification, 2006.
7.2 Rehabilitation and Resettlement plan
No rehabilitation or resettlement plan is proposed as there are no habitations in the Plant site.
During the due course of the Socio-Economic Assessment (SEA), No additional or private Land
Acquisition is proposed by MSPL Limited as the proposed installation/expansion/Operation shall
be within the site land of 126.44 Ha. Moreover, the Site allotted to MSPL doesn’t have any
human settlement. Furthermore, it was concluded that there are no, National Parks, Wildlife
Sanctuaries, and Biosphere Reserves within a 10 km radius.
7.3 Risk Assessment & Disaster Management Plan
7.3.1 Risk Assessment & Damage Control
A risk assessment is a careful examination of consequences resulting from the undesired events
that could cause harm to people or property, so that sufficient precautions can be taken. Workers
and others have a right to be protected from harm caused by a failure to take reasonable control
measures.
Industrial activities, which produce, treat, store and handle hazardous substances, have a high
hazard potential endangering the safety of man and environment at work place and outside.
Recognizing the need to control and minimize the risks posed by such activities, the Ministry of
Environment & Forests have notified the “Manufacture Storage & Import of Hazardous
Chemicals Rules” in the year 1989 and amendments thereof in 2000 to make it more stringent.
For effective implementation of the rule, Ministry of Environment & Forests has provided a set of
guidelines. The guidelines, in addition to other aspects, set out the duties required to be performed
by the occupier along with the procedure. The rule also lists out the industrial activities and
chemicals, which are required to be considered as hazardous.
The assessment has been made in a systematic manner covering the requirements of the above-
mentioned rules. Accordingly, subsequent sections have been divided as follows:
 Description of hazardous chemicals
 Hazard identification
 Hazard assessment
 Consequence analysis
 Brief description of the measures taken and
 On site emergency plan
7.3.2 Hazard identification and risk analysis (HIRA)
A Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment (HIRA) assist emergency managers in answering
these questions. It is a systematic risk assessment tool that can be used to assess the risks of
various hazards. There are three reasons why a HIRA is useful to the emergency management
profession:
 It helps emergency management professionals prepare for the worst and/or most likely
risks.
 Allows for the creation of exercises, training programs, and plans based on the most likely
scenarios.
 Saves time and resources by isolating hazards that cannot occur in the designated area.
In many cases, the measures to control and mitigate hazards and risks are simple and obvious and
involve modifications to conform to standard practice.
The general hierarchy of risk reducing measures is:
 Prevention (by distance or design)
 Detection (e.g. fire and gas, Leak detection)
 Control (e.g. emergency shutdown and controlled depressurization)
 Mitigation (e.g. firefighting and passive fire protection)
 Emergency response (in case safety barriers fail)
The main objective of the Quantitative Risk Analysis (QRA) study is to identify the potential
hazards, assess the effect/consequence of all probable accidental releases and risk mitigating
measures to reduce hazards of the proposed facilities.
Risk Analysis broadly comprises of the following steps:
 Identification of Hazards and Selection of Scenarios
 Effects and Consequence Calculations
 Likelihood Estimation
 Risk Summation
 Risk Mitigation Measures
Sl.No. Area/Activity Hazard Impact

1 Storage and Handling of Fire may occur in case of direct Fire may propagate to
FO/LDO contact with flame, heat or spark the nearby area
2 Storage and Handling of Fire may occur in case of direct Fire may propagate to
Coal contact with flame, heat or spark the nearby area
3 Transformer oil Fire may occur in case of electrical Fire may propagate to
voltage surging/Fault/ short circuit the nearby area
7.3.2.1 Exposure to high temperature
The principal exposures to heat in this sector occurs operation of pelletization in Induration
system (Straight/Grate Kiln Process) & PGP unit. Recommended prevention and control
techniques include the following:
 Shielding surfaces where workers’ proximity and close contact with hot equipment is
expected.
 Using personal protective equipment (PPE), as needed (e.g. insulated gloves and shoes).
 Minimizing the work time required in high temperature environments by implementing
shorter shifts at these locations.
7.3.2.2 Physical hazards
Injuries during Project operation are typically related to slips, trips, and falls; contact with falling/
moving objects; and lifting / over-exertion. Other injuries may occur due to contact with, or
capture in, moving machinery (e.g. dump trucks, front loaders, forklifts). Activities related to
maintenance of equipment, including fans and belt conveyors, represent a significant source of
exposure to physical hazards. Such hazards may include the following:
 Falling / impact with objects
 Hot surface burns
 Transportation
 Contact with allergic substances.
Management measures to prevent the physical hazards in the plant are as follows:
 Any person working on equipment with moving parts will personally ensure the
equipment is de-energized, isolated and locked/tagged out.
 Any person doing flame welding, cutting or brazing in the proximity of any flammable
material will use PPE.
 Safety helmets to be used to protect workers below against falling material.
 Barriers like a toe boards or mesh guards will be provided to prevent items from slipping
or being knocked off the edge of a structure.
 An exclusion zone will be created beneath areas where work is taking place.
 Danger areas shall be clearly marked with suitable safety signs indicating that access is
restricted to essential personnel wearing hard hats while the work is in progress. In case of
any accident immediate and proper medical care shall be provided at the plant site
7.3.2.3 Events pertaining to manufacturing process

There may be generic failures caused by mechanisms as corrosion, vibration or external impact
(mechanical or overpressure). A small event (such as a leak) may escalate to a bigger event, so
that maintenance of machines will be checked periodically.
I. Handling of Coal
 The coal will be received and stored in Covered Stockpile. The possible hazards are
envisaged
 Due to the slipping of trucks during unloading.
 During summer season, there is chance of coal catching fire due to spontaneous heating.
 Effective sprinkling systems will be provided all-round the coal storage yards.
II. Handling of pellet Dust
In Pelletization process the fine dust which requires proper care in handling and re-used to avoid
any health hazards.
7.3.2.4 Fire
The fire and health hazards are also categorized based on NFPA (National Fire Protection
Association) classifications, described below.
Table 7.1: Hazard Identification as per NFPA
Sl.No Petroleum product Nh Nf Nr
1 FO/LDO 0 2 0
Nh -NFPA health hazard factor
Nf -NFPA flammability hazard factor
Nr- NFPA reactivity hazard factor
Table 7.2: Explanation of NFPA Classification
Health Hazard
Classification Definition
4 Materials, which on very short exposure could cause death or major residual injury even
though prompt medical treatments were given
3 Materials, which on short exposure could cause serious temporary or residual injury
even though prompt medical treatments were given.
2 Materials, which on intense or continued exposure could cause temporary incapacitation
or possible residual injury unless prompt medical treatment is given.
1 Materials, which on exposure would cause irritation but only minor residual injury even
if no treatment is given
0 Materials, which on exposure under fire conditions would offer no hazard beyond that
of ordinary combustible material.
Flammability
4 Materials which will rapidly or completely vaporize at atmospheric pressure and normal
ambient temperature, or which are readily dispersed in air and which will burn readily
3 Liquids and solids that can be ignited under almost all ambient temperature conditions.
2 Materials that must be moderately heated or exposed to relatively high ambient
temperatures before ignition can occur
1 Material that must be preheated before ignition can occur.
0 Materials that will not burn.
Reactivity
4 Materials which in themselves are readily capable of detonation or of explosive
decomposition or reaction at normal temperature and pressures
3 Materials which in themselves are capable of detonation or explosive reaction but require a
strong initiating source or which must be heated under confinement before initiation or
which react explosively with water.
2 Materials which in themselves are normally unstable and readily undergo violent chemical
change but do not detonate. Also materials which may react violently with water or which
may form potentially explosive mixtures with water
1 Materials which in themselves are normally stable, but which can becomeunstable at
elevated temperature and pressures or which may react with water with some release of
energy but not violently.
0 Materials which in themselves are normally stable, even under fire exposure conditions,
and which are not reactive with water.
 The following points are relevant with respect to toxic, flammable and reactivity criteria.
 FO/LDO is not rated as a reactive chemical
7.3.2.6 Risk analysis calculation
Risk Evaluation
Environmental risk assessment evaluates the quantitative and qualitative characteristics of the
environment, in order to highlight the risk on environment and human health due to the potential
presence or use of specific pollutants. Risk is a probability of an adverse direct or indirect effect,
on the environment or human health. It is a combination of the probability of occurrence of an
event and the possible extent of that event’s adverse effects and consequences, in terms of adverse
effects on the ecosystem and human injury.
Risk is defined as the probability of an event to occur, related to the seriousness and extent of its
consequences. Risk is the determination of likelihood and severity of the credible accident/event
sequences in order to determine magnitude and to priorities identified hazards
Table 7.3: The likelihood of occurrence & Severity of consequence
Likelihood (L) Descriptions Rating
Most likely Expected in normal circumstances 5
Likely Likely to occur in normal circumstances 4
Possible May occur in normal circumstances 3
Unlikely Remote chance of occurrence, but conceivable 2
Inconceivable Not conceivable even in future 1
Severity (S) Description Rating
Catastrophic Casualties, Major Damage, Losses to property (more 5
than 1000 Cr)
Major Major injuries & Environmental damage, Losses to 4
property (more than 100 Cr)
Moderate Moderate injuries & Environmental damage, losses 3
to property( more than 10 Cr)
Minor Minor Injuries & some damage losses to property 2
(>1 Cr)
Insignificant No injuries or damage, losses to property (>10 lakhs) 1
Likelihood Serverity(S)
(L) 1 2 3 4 5
5 5 10 10 20 25
4 4 8 12 16 20
3 3 6 9 12 15
2 2 4 6 8 10
1 1 2 3 4 5
High Medium Low
The relative risk potential can be used to prioritize necessary actions to effectively manage
hazards as per the risk value defined below:
Risk Risk Priority Action

15-25 High Requires immediate action
5-12 Medium Requires planned approach for
mitigation the risk
1-4 Low No requirement of immediate action
but requires attention or attention to
avoid future
A summarized list of environmental risk potential for the likely events is presented in Table 7.4
below
7.4 Environmental risk potential for the likely events
Risk Ranking
Event Nature of Risk Mitigation Measures
L S RP
Fire in LDO tank Fire 3 3 9  Proper implementation of fire prevention
Fire in Furnace Oil Fire 4 3 12 methods and an appropriate fire fighting service
Fire in Transformer Oil Fire 3 3 9  Maintain collection of data on accidents
Storage Tank with a view to takecorrective, remedial and
preventive action.
 Automatic fire detectioncum-alarm
system shall be provided
Chemicals/Oil spillage Corrosive 2 3 6  Periodical inspection and testing to
identify spillage.
 Disaster Controller in plant to ensure
inspection of affected areas to get first- hand
knowledge of damages occurred
Cloud burst/lightning Fire 2 4 8 Automatic fire detectioncum- alarm system shall
be provided
Food poisoning Health 3 3 9 Facilities for immediate first aid
Contamination by Toxic 2 3 6 Storage in containers over the concrete floor
hazardous waste under- ventilated covered shed followed by sale to
actual users having valid authorization from
KSPCB, Karnataka
Occurrence of fire due Fire 2 3 6 Fire alarm & Foam based Firefighting system
to static
From the above table it can be concluded that there is a moderate risk potential associated with
the activities
7.3.2.7 Electrocution
Fatal Accident due to carelessness during working hours may lead to electrocution. Probable
areas where chances prevail are enlisted in Table- 7.3.
Table - 7.5 Possible Hazardous Locations onsite
Sl.No Hazardous Area Likely Accident
1 Electrical rooms Fire and electrocution
2 Transformer area Fire and electrocution
3 Cable tunnel Fire and electrocution
4 Storage yard Sliding
5 Beneficiation & Pelletization unit Fatal accident
6 Chimney Air pollution
7 Coal/ fuel storage area Fire and spillage
7.3.2.8 Fire Fighting Arrangements
Suitable type of fire extinguishers in suitable numbers will be placed at strategic locations. Types
of fire extinguishers, its capacity and total numbers proposed in the plant of Sri Channakeshava
Industries are as under:
Table-7.16 Details of Fire Extinguishers
Sl. Type of Fire Extinguisher Capacity Quantity
No.
1 Dry Chemical Powder 10 kg each 05 Nos.
2 - Do - 22.5 kg each 02 Nos.
3 CO2 Extinguishers 9 kg each 10 Nos.
4 - Do - 2 kg each 15 Nos.
5 Water with CO2 cartridge 9 litre 05 Nos.
6 Foam type 50 Litres 02 Nos.
7 - Do - 9 Litres 05 Nos.
8 ABC Type fire Extinguisher 2 kgs 10 Nos.
7.3.2.9 Measures for control of Occupational Health Hazards
• Dust Exposure level of shop floor workers is to be appropriately monitored.
• Check of the effectiveness of preventive and control measures on regular basis.
• Adequate supplies of potable drinking water are to be provided. Water supplied to areas of Plant
food preparation or for the purpose of personal hygiene (washing or bathing) is to be according to
drinking water quality standards.
• Where there is potential for exposure to harmful dusts, ingestion arrangements are to be made
for clean eating areas, where workers are not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances.
• Periodic medical hearing checks are to be performed on workers exposed to high noise levels
• Provisions are to be made to provide OHS orientation training to all new employees to ensure
that they are apprised of the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal protection and
preventing injury to fellow employees.
• Contractors that have the technical capability to manage the occupational health and safety
issues of their employees are to be hired, extending the application of the hazard management
activities through formal procurement agreements.
• Ambulances and First aid treatment facilities are to be made available for any emergency
situation.
7.3.3 Disaster Management Plan

7.3.3.1 Objective
A situation will be called a `Disaster' if it entails any one or more of the following factors:
 Risks of loss of human lives - ten or more in one single situation.
 Loss of property as a consequence of the incident is over Rs.1 crore and/or bears a
potential to the above.
 A situation apparently may not have much loss but its long-term severity can affect loss of
life, production and property.
 The types of possible disaster are given below:
 Type of disasters
Disaster due to emergencies on account of:
• Fire
• Explosion
• Oil spillage
• Spillage of toxic chemicals
• Electrocution
• CO gas leakage
 Disaster due to natural calamity on account of:
• Flood
• Earth quake / cyclone / Storm / Cloud burst / lightning
 Disaster due to external factors on account of:
• Food poisoning / water poisoning
• Sabotage
 Objectives of disaster control/management plan for proposed Pellet Plant are:
• To identify type of major disasters, this may occur in the proposed plant.
• To collect data on type of disasters this has happened already in other pellet plants.
• To prepare an action plan to handle disaster
7.3.3.2 Onsite Disaster Management Plan
Onsite Disaster management Plan objectives are-
• Provide necessary protective equipment, safety appliances e.g. safety helmet, goggles, welder’s
equipment for eye and face protection, earplugs, safety belt, hand gloves, safety shoes and
clothing, and to ensure their proper use.
• Create awareness of employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their work,
which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety.
• Keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making necessary changes
from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and up-to-date knowledge.
• Provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and illness.
• Proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate fire fighting service.
• Maintain collection of data on accidents with a view to take corrective, remedial and preventive
action.
7.3.3.3 Disaster Control Management System
If any disaster takes place, it is not easy to control if contingency plans are not available. For
effective control of disaster adequate manpower, technical know-how, alertness and internal
help are necessary. It always betters to take preventive measures to avoid any disaster. In
proposed plant following prevention measures will be taken to prevent disaster.
Plant layout:
• Design, manufacture and construction of all plant and machinery’s and buildings will be as per
national and international codes as applicable in specific cases and laid down by statutory
authorities.
• Provision of adequate access ways for the movement of equipment and personnel are kept.
• Minimum two numbers of gates for escape during disaster shall be provided.
• Sitting of fuel oil storage shall be in protected fenced area inside tank bund.
• Water spraying in coal storage area.
7.3.3.4 On-Site Emergency Control Plan (ECP) Objectives of ECP are-
• Proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate firefighting service.
Maintain collection of data on accidents with a view to take corrective, remedial and preventive
action.
• Regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all buildings,
equipment.
• Training to all occupiers for different type of emergencies.
• Periodic maintenance and checking of all equipments.
Roles and Responsibility
The proposed contingency plan is prepared from the experiences of accidents that have occurred
in various other Pellet plants. The contingency plan being a dynamic plan will need periodical
reviews and modifications with new experiences. Even with all precautionary measures taken to
avoid disaster, disaster may occur. To tackle situations during and after disaster, a well-defined
contingency plan is a must. A Disaster Control Room (DCR) will be set up having links with all
plant control rooms. An officer will be manning the DCR. On getting information about any
accident, the officer will verify from the affected plant control room and inform the Disaster
Controller (DC) and/or other coordinators immediately.
The responsible officers of Disaster Control Group will assemble in the DCR and formulate
control procedures as per the contingency plans. The functions of the various officers of the
Disaster Control Group will be as follows:
Functions of Disaster Controller
• To declare "Disaster Emergency" after consulting the Sr. Officer available and inform Fire
Station Control Room to sound the sirens accordingly and arrange to convey the message in
public addresses system
• To report to DCR immediately.

• To receive messages from the communication centre.
• To take decisions in consultation with the Commanding Officers of different services and
convey them to the disaster point. - To be responsible for planning and provisions of assistance
from township and from local authorities.
• To keep higher authorities informed about the situation.
• The decision of the Disaster Controller on any matter to meet the objective of disaster control
plan will be final.
Functions of Officer In-charge:
Disaster Controller will nominate an officer whose functions will be as follows:
• To be responsible for the operation of DCR and for the dispatch of messages.
• To decide on the priority of dispatch of messages.
• To keep liaison with all activities and give up to date and accurate appreciation of the situation.
• To be responsible for the efficient organisation of the Disaster Control Room.
Functions of Commanding Officers of various services:
• The Commanding Officers of various services are designated Coordinator (services),
Coordinator (Operation) and Coordinator (external services).
• The following are their functions:
• To report to the Control Post immediately on hearing "Disaster Siren".
• To keep Disaster Controller posted with the up-to-date information regarding manpower
and material available concerning their respective services.
• To advise Disaster Controller on all matters arising out of disaster.
• To assist Disaster Controller for provision of material and man power concerning his service.
• To convey message to his service teams through communication centre after consulting
Disaster Controller.
• To consult between themselves on matters related to more than one service and to decide on the
action to be taken.
Casualty services
The Commanding Officer of Casualty Services will be medical officer.
Functions:
• First aid service by first aid parties on the spot.
• Ambulance service for transport of casualties from the spot to township hospital and from
township hospital to outside, if required.
7.3.3.5 Roles and responsibilities
A team of following Essential persons shall be taking necessary action during the event of
emergency. The roles and responsibilities of these personnel are defined subsequently:
A. Head of the Department / Section In-charge or Incident Controller
• Quickly assess cause/source of the hazards and its effects.
• Discuss with the Site Controller and coordinate the necessary action required to
control/contain the emergency situation.
• Continuously monitor the work of firefighting personnel and other persons engaged in the
emergency actions so that all actions are carried out safely.
B. Site Controller –VP (Works)
 Responsible for the overall control of the emergency situation.
 Discuss with the Incident Controller about the situation and evaluate the Major
Emergency situation. The initial assessment of the situation is done by the concerned
HOD immediately after the incident happens.
Ensure communication to the following authorities if necessary: -
a) Fire Brigade
b) Local Hospitals
c) Civil Authorities
d) Electricity Board
• Ensure communication to the neighboring industries of the incident, if required.
• Maintain a speculative continuous review of possible developments and assess these to
determine most probable course of events.
• Ensure proper preservation of evidence for subsequent investigation. Inform the Company
Officers at the Corporate Office.
C. Safety Officer
• Ensure overall safety of the Emergency Operations.
• Assist in controlling the Emergency.
• Keep Central Control Center (CCC) informed of the developments from time to time.
• Mobilize all available resources for controlling the incident.
• Help in carrying out search and rescue operations, if required.
D. Security Officer
• Ensure that unauthorized persons do not enter the emergency area.
• Ensure cordoning off the prohibited area.
• Ensure availability of the firefighting personnel.
• Act as per the instructions of the Incident Controller.
E. Process & Maintenance Personnel of Affected & Non-Affected Areas
• Persons of the unaffected area shall ensure the smooth operation of their own areas and shall not
create a crowd at the emergency site. They are to extend their full co- operation to the staff
fighting with the emergency, if the need arises.
• Persons of the affected area shall not create hue and cry and before arrival of the Security Staff,
should initiate first aid action against the emergency. They shall extend help to the firefighting
staff as per their requirement. The maintenance staff shall ensure availability of crane, gas cutting
and welding facilities to meet any emergency requirement.
The electrical staff shall ensure electrical isolation of the area, if required, and shall
arrange emergency lights to lighten the area.
• Persons are to remove the materials from emergency area prone to fire / explosion etc.
• Conduct emergency control operations as per the instructions of the Incident Controller
F. Role of the Store Personnel
• The Store Department shall ensure that in emergency situation it is open to issue Personnel
Protective Equipment (PPEs) and other materials required to tackle the emergency.
7.3.3.6 Evacuation Plan
A. General Building Evacuation Procedure
At recognition of Fire / hearing the shouting “Fire”, it is the responsibility of all building
occupants to evacuate immediately and proceed to predetermined assembly points, away from the
building. Building occupants are also responsible for ensuring that their visitors/customers follow
the evacuation procedure described herein, and leave the building along with all other occupants.
Designated essential personnel needed to continue or shut down critical operations, while an
evacuation is underway, are responsible for recognizing and/or determining when to abandon the
operation and evacuate themselves. Contract workers will be made familiar with the procedures
outlined herein, and are expected to leave the building when the alarm sounds.
• RELOCATE– If it is safe to do so, Relocate people. Instruct others to report to their
designated gathering areas. Be aware of persons who may need assistance.
• ALARM – Sought “FIRE” to alert all occupants. Move to a safe location. Call Security & Fire.
• CONFINE- Close all doors, windows and other openings to confine the fire, if this can be done
safely.
• EVACUATE - Evacuate from building & assemble at assembly point.
B. Evacuation Instructions
On ringing of the building alarm or upon information of a general building emergency, following
instructions are to be followed:
• Do not be panic.
• Do not ignore alarm.
• Leave the building immediately, in an orderly fashion.
• Follow quickest evacuation route from where you are (see posted floor evacuation
diagram/map).
• Do not go back to your office area for any reason.
• Proceed to the designated emergency assembly point for your area. If the designated assembly
point/area is unsafe or blocked due to the emergency, proceed to the alternate assembly point.
• Report to your Work Area Reporting officer at the assembly point to be checked off as having
evacuated safely; also report any knowledge you may have of missing persons.
• Return to the building only after emergency officials or building monitors give the all-clear
signal. Silencing the Alarm doesn’t mean the emergency is over.
C. Emergency Evacuation Personnel

For the purpose of this Plan, Emergency Evacuation Personnel, and their alternates are regular
employees who have been selected to ensure that building evacuation is carried out as planned,
evacuated building occupants are directed to assigned assembly points where they will be
accounted for, and persons needing assistance to evacuate are attended to. Building emergency
evacuation personnel and their alternates shall be selected among building occupants and on a
voluntary basis.
7.3.3.7 Fire Fighting Equipment
All the fire extinguisher system will be controlled by the Security Department. Safety
department will consist of qualified safety manager, safety officer and supporting staff.
 Portable fire extinguishers
 Fire Hydrant system
 Sprinkler system employed near fire prone areas
 Fire Buckets
Fire Hydrants
The security guards on duty should rush at the fire place immediately after collecting the hoses &
Nozzles from the fire store at main gate. Connect the male coupling of the hose to the hydrant and
spread the hose. Connect the nozzle to the other end of the hose. Hold the nozzle firmly, and ask
the other man to inform the pump operator to start the fire hydrant pump and then open the
hydrant valve slowly. Direct the nozzle towards the base of the fire. In case of one hose length is
found insufficient another hose should be connected to the first hose and at the end of second
hose the nozzle should be connected. Fire hydrant points will be provided throughout the
premises. Automatic high velocity spray system will be provided for protection of
transformers and cable galleries. Manual medium velocity spray system will be provided for
protection of fuel oil and turbine oil storage tanks and coal conveyor galleries. Water for hydrant,
spray and sprinkler system will be supplied from the firewater pumps located in firewater pump
house adjacent to Raw Water Reservoir. Adequate number of portable and mobile chemical fire
extinguishers will be provided at strategic locations throughout the plant.
Fire detection and alarm system will be provided at strategic locations throughout the plant. Fire
detection and alarm system will be provided to detect fire/ smoke in vulnerable areas of the plant
through smoke /heat detectors.
7.3.3.8 Alarm System
A siren (with 5 km range) is provided under the control of time office in the plant premises to
give warning. The warning signal for emergency follows:
• Emergency Siren: Waxing and waning sound for 1.5 minutes.
• All clear signal: Continuous siren for one minute.
7.3.3.9 First Aid

First aid centre with adequate facilities are provided. It is to be maintained round the clock by a
by a compounder cum dresser and a doctor. An ambulance is to be made available for emergency
scenario. It is to be used at site to carry affected people to hospital.
7.3.3.10 Mock Drill
As per the Industrial Major Accident Hazard Rules,
• The plant is to ensure that a mock drill of the on-site emergency plan is conducted every six
months.
• A detail report of the mock drill conducted is to be made immediately available to all the
concerned authority
• Onsite disaster mock drills are conducted once in six months.
• Also, Major Fire and Minor Fire mock drills are conducted once in three months and one month
respectively.
7.3.3.11 Training
On job training to the engineers on various stages of risk analysis and preparedness during
emergency to reflect in the operation of terminal, especially from the safety stand point. The fire
teams belonging to the firefighting department are to be intensively trained for the use of all
equipment and in various firefighting methods for handling different types of fires.
7.3.3.12 Off-site emergency plan

The main objectives of the off-site emergency plan are:-
• To save lives and injuries.
• To prevent or reduce property losses and
• To provide for quick resumption of normal situation or operation.
The off-site emergency plan is an integral part of any hazard control system. It is based on those
accidents identified by the works management, which could affect people and the environment
outside the works. Thus, the off-site plan follows logically from the analysis that took place to
provide the basis for the on-site plan and the two plans therefore complement each other.
The roles of the various parties that may be involved in the implementation of an off-site
plan are described below.
The responsibility for the off-site plan will be likely to rest either with the works management or
with the local authority. Schematic representation of various organization involved during
emergency. Either way, the plan must identify an emergency coordinating officer who would take
overall command of the off-site activities. Consideration of evacuation may include the following
factors:
• In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage tank), only houses
close to the fire are likely to need evacuation.
• If fire is escalating very fast, it is necessary to evacuate people nearby as soon as possible.
• In acute emergency people are advised to stay indoors and shield themselves from the
fire.
7.3.3.13 Organization
The off-site emergency plan is an integral part of any major hazard control system. It is based on
those accidents identified by the works management, which could affect people and the
environment outside the works. Thus, the off-site plan follows logically after on-site plan and the
two plans therefore should complement each other. The key feature of a good off-site emergency
plan is flexibility in its application to emergencies other than those specifically included in the
formation of the plan. The roles of the various parties that may be involved in the implementation
of an off-site plan are described in this section. The responsibility for the off-site plan is likely to
rest either with the works management or with the local authority. Some of the aspects included
in off-site emergency plan are as follows:
• Organizational details of command structure, warning systems,
implementation procedures, emergency control centres include name and appointments of
incident controller, site main controller, their deputies and other key personnel involved during
emergency has been given in District Disaster management Plan.
Communications
• Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network, list of
telephone numbers.
Special emergency equipment
• Details of availability and location of heavy lifting gear, bulldozers, specified
firefighting equipment, fireboats.
Voluntary Organizations
• Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources, etc.
Meteorological information
• Arrangements for obtaining details of weather conditions prevailing at the time and weather
forecasts. The Environment Control Department (ECD) of BSL will coordinate the
same.
Humanitarian arrangements
• Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first aid, ambulances,
temporary mortuaries.
Public information
• Arrangements for dealing with the media-press office and informing relatives etc.
Assessment of effectiveness of the emergency plan
• Arrangements for collecting information on the causes of the emergency, reviewing the
efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.
Role of the emergency co-coordinating officer
• The various emergency services shall be coordinated by an emergency coordinating officer
(ECO).
• The ECO will liaise closely with the site main controller. Again depending on local
arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site consequences, the
external control will be passed to a senior authority/ administrator.
Role of major hazard works management
• The role of works management in off-site emergency planning is to establish liaison with those
preparing the plans and to provide information appropriate to such plans. Information will be
provided by works management to all the outside organizations, which involve in handling the
emergency off-site and which are familiarized with the technical aspects of the works
activities, e.g. emergency services, medical departments etc.
Role of the Fire Extinction authorities
• The control of a fire is normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade officer, on arrival at
the site. The senior fire brigade officer also has a similar responsibility for other events, such as
explosions and toxic releases. Fire authorities get familiarized with the location on site of all
stores of flammable materials, water and foam supply point and fire-fighting equipment.
Role of the health authorities
• Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances and so on, have a vital
part to play, following a major accident and they form an integral part of any emergency plan. For
major fires, injuries will be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a varying degree and
the knowledge and experience to handle this is essential for all available nearby hospitals.
Role of the Government safety authority
• The factory inspector will visit and may check off-site plan and the arrangements made for
handling all types of emergencies including major emergencies. The advice of factory inspector to
be incorporated from time to time. The Disaster /Emergency Management Policy in the above
lines shall be prepared.
Role of Police
The police may assist in controlling of the accident site, organizing evacuation and
removing of any seriously injured people to hospitals:
• Co-ordination with the transport authorities and home guards
• Co-ordination with state fire services
• Arrange for post mortem of dead bodies
• Establish communication center with easy contact with ECC.
Role of Fire brigade
The fire brigade is to be organized to put out fires and provide assistance as required during
emergency.
Role of Media
The media should have ready and continuous access to designated officials with relevant
information, as well as to other sources in order to provide essential and accurate information to
public throughout the emergency and to avoid commotion and confusion.
• Efforts are made to check the clarity and reliability of information as it becomesavailable, and
before it is communicated to public.
• Public health authorities are consulted when issuing statements to the media concerning health
aspects of any material/ chemical.
• Members of the media are to facilitate response efforts by providing means for informing the
public with credible information about accidents involving hazardous substances.
Role of Health Care authorities
Hospitals and doctors must be ready to treat all type of injuries to causalities during
emergency.
• Co-ordinate the activities of Primary Health Centers and Municipal Dispensaries to ensure
required quantities of drugs and equipment’s.
 Securing assistance of medical and paramedical personnel from nearby
hospitals/institutions
Figure No- 7.1: Various Organizations Involved During Emergency
7.4 Care and maintenance during temporary discontinuance
a) Precautions to be taken
An emergency plan for the situation of temporary discontinuance due to court order or due to
statutory requirements or any other unforeseen circumstances may indicate measures of care,
maintenance and monitoring of status of discontinued mining operations expected to re-open
in near future.
Although no temporary closure is planned or expected, the following protective measures would
be taken to deal with the unforeseen circumstances which may be created due to temporary
closure of the plant.
i) All heavy earthmoving mining machineries deployed at plant area will be withdrawn and
brought to the safe place so that these do not get buried due to material collapse, if any, and get
damaged. These will be subjected to preventive maintenance.
ii) At the entrance and strategic points in the plant areas, sentries and watchman would
be deployed to guard the sensitive/important plant area, and other sensitive stores and
services. They would be provided with mobile phones/ walky - talkies to contact plant
authorities/police/fire station etc. for help during emergency.
iv) Audible warning sirens would be established at strategic points to be used during emergency
so that prompt help can be received from proper sources and protective measures are immediately
taken by all personnel available.
v) Managerial, supervisory and competent persons of the plant would be engaged elsewhere in
other mines of the company as per the needs
7.5 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
The local areas are getting benefited by way of generation of employment opportunities,
increased demand for local products and services. There is an overall improvement in the income
level of the local people.
The proposed plant will provide employment for around 752 people by direct employment and
900 by indirect employment which includes skilled and semi-skilled, in contractual works &
transport. Priority will be given to locals for Semi-Skilled and Unskilled workers. There will be
an enhancement of educational and medical standards of people in the study area.
There will be generally positive and beneficial impacts by way of economic improvements,
transportation, and business generation. There will be an overall upliftment of socio-economic
status of people in the area.
7.6 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY
The construction of civil structures are envisaged in the proposed plant , the Occupational Health
and Safety related issues are restricted to operational stage only. The practices with regard to
Occupational Health & Safety will be ensured for the proposed plant construction and operations.
The Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) Plan aims to
 ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in the operation and
maintenance of HEMM and trucks
 allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions at work place
 ensure that adequate OHS knowledge is imparted to all employees
 provide necessary protective equipment and safety appliances and ensure their proper use
 make the employees aware of the plant operations and the potential hazards
 train the employees to take preventive steps in a proactive manner and execute the work
safely and understand occupational health issues.
 review all operations and methods of work for making necessary changes from the safety
point of view in the light of experience and up to date knowledge
 provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and illness at
work
 ensure that adequate publicity is given to OHS matters
 ensure proper precautions are taken to prevent fire and provide appropriate fire fighting
facilities
 publish instructions and notices in the local language to employees
 prepare safe operating procedure for all operations
 ensure regular inspection by a competent person at regular intervals for identifying any
deviations in safety and occupational health related matters
 provide relaxation facilities to workers with good ventilation & air circulation
 ensure Good Housekeeping practices
 provide enclosure for noise generating sources
 isolate diesel and explosives storage areas
 rotate employees in specific areas to avoid continuous exposure
7.6.1 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH RISKS
The principal Occupational Health Risks associated with are likely incidence of tuberculosis,
silicosis, hearing loss, accidents due to plant operations and fire. The order of severity on health
status of workers in mining is tuberculosis, silicosis, respiratory diseases and hearing loss.
7.6.2 PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
a. Dust
As dust is a major pollutant, that can cause a heath disorder, the following precautionary
measures are followed.
 Sprinkling of water on the haul roads and working places
 Maintenance of the plant machinery and vehicles used as per the manufacture
specifications to ensure their efficient operation
 Ensuring use of Personal Protective Equipment like respiratory masks, ear plugs, helmet,
safety shoes by the employees
 Development of wide green belt proposed to attenuate the spread of dust and also the
noise generated from plant operations
b. Noise
Workmen and staff exposed to higher sound levels will be provided with ear plugs/mufflers of
approved type by authorities to guard them against any hearing impairment is being followed to
ensure noise and vibration levels are within limits.
c. Injuries
By ensuring that all employees are following safe operating procedure and using the required
Personal Protective Equipment, the risk of injuries due to accidents can be prevented.
7.6.3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
The following Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) are provided to the employees
 Industrial Safety Helmets
 Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends
 Cylindrical type earplugs/Earmuffs
 Industrial safety shoes with steel toe
7.6.4 TRAINING
All the workers are being given initial vocational training (Induction) as per the statute to make
them familiar with their jobs covering the occupational hazards involved, need to use Personal
Protective Equipment, following safe operating procedures and the safety precautions to be taken
while doing their jobs. Awareness programme for the workers on work related health hazard, HIV
prevention etc are being conducted.
7.6.5 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH SURVEILLANCE
Impact of plant operations on health is assessed by the trained doctor in occupational health and
the tests conducted include general health checkup, spirometry, audiometry and vision test in
addition to X-ray and ECG examination.
In order to evaluate the impacts of plant operations on the health of workers, baseline health
studies is being carried out on every worker at the time of joining duty. Medical examinations
will be conducted for employees every year.
7.6.7 BUDGET
An annual budget of Rs 15.0 lakhs has been allocated for safety and occupational health
activities.
CHAPTER-8
Project Benefits
PROJECT BENEFITS
8.1 SOCIO- ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
Though the plant area falls close to forest area, it falls under the mixed deciduous sub-
classification, without any large size trees which gives shelter and fodder to wildlife.
The PP shall provide social benefits like drinking water, health care measures, educational
benefits to the neighboring villagers in addition to his own employees. Further, this project is
expected to yield a positive impact on the socio-economic front of the region. It helps in
sustainable development of this area including further development of physical infrastructural
facilities. By the proposed plant the production of iron and steel which is the chief raw material
which is essential for economic growth of the country. A number of steel plants including the
public sector are coming up in Ballari, which require more pellets etc from this area.
Also by this plant, the country achieves the revenue in terms of taxes on pellets produced.
The revenue generated from these sources will be placed under a special purpose and will be used
for developing infrastructure in three iron ore mining districts – Ballari, Chitradurga and Tumkur.
No Rehabilitation or Resettlement is involved and there are no human settlements or PAPs within
the plant area which requires Rehabilitation and Resettlement. There are about 25 villages and
one town which fall within the buffer zone. Due to the proposed plant activity, no significant
adverse changes are visualized in the traditional way of life of the people residing in the villages
in the buffer zone. Further people residing in the nearby villages are to be benefited by the direct
and indirect employment opportunities created by the plant activities.
Facilities like construction of roads, medical facility; vocational training provided by the lessee
will augment the socio-economic status of the villagers residing nearby. Harmony among the
people will improve as they come closer by arranging cultural activities, safety weeks,
environmental protection weeks etc. by the company. Plant activity shall contribute towards
economic upliftment by creating job opportunities in the region
The Eco-development & management plan shall increase the forest cover and provide congenial
environment for immigration of wildlife.
Corporative Social Responsibility (CSR) Budget ( 1st to 5th Year in Lakhs)

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Total
Sl.No Sector /Activities
Year Year Year Year Year amount
A Health and sanitation
1 Free Doctor Consultation and medicine 10 10 10 10 11 51
Health Awareness program on Eye screening camps
2 20 20 17 15 16 88
& operation camp and other general health camps
3 Artificial limbs and calliper camp ( Jaipur foot camp) 10 10 10 13 14 57
4 Construction of school toilets 5 5 5 7 22
Sub total 45 45 37 43 48 218
B Education
School infrastructure development Projects
1 ( Smart class, science lab, Distribution of furniture, 20 15 15 15 15 80
teaching and learning materials for schools)
2 Scholarship program for higher education 10 13 15 15 16 69
3 Support to reduce the school dropouts 5 5 3 3 4 20
Special tuition classes for 10th standard students of
4 5 5 5 7 8 30
Near by villages through hiring teacher for 4 months
Improvement in basic amenities & teaching learning
5 5 4 3 4 4 20
materials in Anganwadi centre
Sub total 45 42 41 44 47 219
C Infrastructure development
1 Providing drinking water facilities 10 10 10 3 3 36
Development of Park &maintenance, Road
20 10 5 50 5 90
2 development
3 Construction of Community Centre 20 20 20 7 8 75
Development of existing Playground in Village
20 10 5 3 4 42
4 Panchayat
5 Electrification including solar power, Street light 10 5 5 5 25
Sub total 80 55 45 63 25 268
D Skill Development
Vocational Skill Training for like Computer training,
1 Tailoring training, Spoken English, Beautician, 5 7 7 8 10 37
driving, other skills.
Sub total 5 7 7 8 10 37
Ensuring environmental sustainability, Ecological
E
balance
Plantation and Greening Drive in village and school
1 5 5 5 6 8 29
premise
2 Soil water conservation project 20 15 10 7 7 59
Promotion of horticulture and training for farmer for
3 5 7 5 4 7 28
enhancement of crop productivity
Sub total 30 27 20 17 22 116
F Protection of national heritage, art and culture 10 10 10 10 10 50
Sub total 10 10 10 10 10 50
G Women empowerment
1 Women empowerment 10 10 10 7 8 45
2 Establishment of production centre 10 10 10 30
3 Promotion of animal husbandry through SHGs 5 5 5 5 5 25
25 15 25 12 23 100
H Support for sports
1 Support for sports 5 5 5 3 3 21
Supports to sports meet organising by education
2 5 5 5 3 3 21
department
Sub total 10 10 10 6 6 42
Grand total 250 211 195 203 191 1050
CHAPTER-9
9. Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis if
recommended at the Scoping stage
NOT APPLICABLE
Chapter-10
Environmental
Management Plan
Environmental Management Plan

10.1 Objectives of Environment Management Plan
The objective of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is to identify administrative aspects
for ensuring that mitigation measures are implemented, and their effectiveness is monitored.
The EMP focuses on direct impacts, which are identified as having the potential to cause
significant impacts on the environment and identifies the following objectives:
 Specific measures that will be taken to prevent, reduce or manage the
environmental impacts during construction and operation; and
 Objective of EMP is to identify the level of environmental performance that will be
expected during the operation.
M/s. MSPL Limited will be committed to comprehensive Environment Management Plan for
environmental protection and conservation for the proposed project. Based on the evaluation
of impacts and baseline conditions, an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) has been
delineated to mitigate the adverse impacts on environment of the area.
The environmental management plan consists of the set of waste minimization, impact mitigation,
management, monitoring and institutional measures to be taken during implementation and
operation to eliminate adverse environmental impacts or reduce them to acceptable levels. The
present environmental management plan addresses, the components of environment affected
during construction of the project and by the different operations in the Iron Ore,
Beneficiation Plant & Pelletization plant.
The objectives of EMP are:
 Overall conservation of environment.
 Minimization of waste generation and pollution.
 Judicious use of natural resources and water.
 Safety, welfare and good health of the work force and populace.
 Ensure effective operation of all control measures.
 Vigilance against probable disasters and accidents.
 Monitoring of cumulative and long time impacts.
 Ensure effective operation of all control measures.
Environmental Management Plan which will be implemented is detailed under the
following heads:
 Air Environment Management
 Noise Environment Management
 Water Environment Management
 Land Environment Management
 Biodiversity management
 Solid Waste management
 Energy Conservation
 Socio Economics Environment

 Occupational Health and Safety Measures
 Greenbelt Development and Plantation Program
10.2 Environment Management During Construction Phase
10.2.1 Air Environment Management
The major pollutants of air from the Proposed Plant will be the Particular matter, SO2 & NO2
from the vehicular transportation for construction material and workers movement and material
loading/unloading. Also demolition of existing structures will generate dust.
Demolition
The waste generated will be utilized for land filling in low lying areas within the site. Major dust
generating sources will be-
 Loading & unloading activities-demolition waste
 Incoming / outgoing vehicles
 Due to machinery used demolition operations
Dust abatement - Dust from loading / unloading operations
• Areas will be earmarked for delivery / deposition of demolition waste
• A sheet cover over the debris- over designated transport vehicles at waste processing sites
• Sign boards will be displayed indicating do’s & don’ts
• Dust suppression systems will be in place. Water will be sprayed at all unloading points.
Dust abatement - due to vehicle movement
Transport movement: Dust abatement due to transport activities arising due to vehicles movement
(operation of vehicles within, entering or leaving the site) can also include the following:
• Monitor movement of vehicles (incoming / outgoing) carrying demolition waste
• Transportation of demolition waste should be done in covered vehicles to prevent
fugitive dust emission.
• Regular checking and maintenance of vehicles should be ensured (valid PUC)
• Earmark areas for parking vehicles
• Smooth movement of incoming & outgoing vehicles / trucks
• Roads within premise tarred
• Dust suppression systems in place (fugitive emissions): regular water sprinkling on internal
road will suppress the dust.
Dust abatement – due to machinery used in Demolition operations
The demolition operations include
• Crushing / hammering etc from machineries deployed at site causing dust emissions from
machineries / equipment.
• Water sprinkling is a good practice to suppress dust emission.
Transportation
Movement of heavy trucks/vehicles on the un-metalled road generates substantial quantity of dust
emission. This is due to the presence of dust over the road, which is carried away by wind. To
control the generation of dust, all the roads inside the premises will be blacktopped/concreted.
Regular sweeping of all the roads will be done by vacuum sweeper & it will be continued in
doing so. Water spray through tankers will be done on bare lands and internal roads. Trucks will
be covered during the transportation of material. Green belt development along the road side will
trap and minimize the fugitive emission.
Material Loading/Unloading
During the loading/unloading of construction material, fugitive emission will be generated. Water
sprinkling at loading/unloading section, storage of materials under cover, will be adopted. The
workers will be provided dust masks & safety goggles during the work.
10.2.2 Noise Environment management

Demolition of structures will generate noise by Machineries deployed, vehicle movements &
operation of genset & air compressors. This noise will be temporary in nature however proper
mitigation measures will be taken to combat such noise.
There will be noise due to heavy earth moving machinery / crushing etc. which depends on extent
of mechanization & machinery deployed in demolition activities: The dominant source of
noise from most construction equipment is the engine, usually a diesel, without sufficient
muffling (acoustic provision).
Noise control: To control the noise regular preventative maintenance of equipment to be carried
out. Regular and proper maintenance of noise generating machineries to avoid noise increase
 Periodical monitoring of noise will be done to adopt corrective actions wherever

needed.
 Ear plugs to be made available to workers during the operational hours.
 High noise generating activities will be conducted during day time only.
 Besides the operators prepare Noise Mitigation Plan (NMP) which addresses
management and mitigation strategies to prevent an environmental nuisance caused by
construction / demolition / recycling activities impacting ambient noise levels.
10.2.3 Water Environment management
During construction phase, there will be negligible effect on the water quality of the vicinity.
Proper maintenance will be taken to check the leaching of oil and grease spilled out during the
vehicular movements. Storm water run-off during rainy season will be collected in settling tanks
through a network of storm water drains and the collected water will be used for
construction, dust suppression & plantation
10.2.4 Land Environment Management

The land use will be changed from existing to industrial purpose. During construction phase there
will be some temporary & localized changes in the soil due to removal of topsoil to some extent.
There will be no adverse impact on the landuse outside the plant premises because of the
construction work. Pollution control measures for air and water would ensure low risk of
land contamination. Materials will be stored on concrete floor or floor with liners. In Material
storage area, garland drains will collect the surface run-off and routed to settling tanks and clari-
flocculator and then reused in construction activities.
10.2.5 Biodiversity Management

The proposed plantation of trees which will be fallen for establishing plant facilities. Around
1600 trees present along the boundary of the project site will be preserved for greenbelt in
addition to 33% greenbelt/plantation area.
10.2.6 Socio-Economics Development
Employment
The labor strength 1500 engaged in the construction will depend upon construction activities,
since many items of construction are labor intensive. Most of the unskilled and semi-skilled labor
will be employed from the nearby villages and towns. Thus, impact on the physical and aesthetic
resources will be minimal. Further local skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled laborers will get
indirect employment during the construction phase.
10.3 Environment Management during Operation Phase
10.3.1 Air Environment Management
The major pollutants of air from the Proposed Plant will be the Particular matter, SO 2 & NO2
from the stacks and fugitive emissions due to material handling
Gaseous & Particulate Emissions
There will be generation of Gaseous emissions due to burning of fuel in Pelletization plant due to
moving of vehicles for the transportation of Raw material & employees.
Particulate Emissions will be generated from both Pelletization & Beneficiation plant.
In Pelletization Plant, particulate emissions will mainly be generated from Induration system
(Straight/Grate Kiln Process), screening & handling activities whereas in Beneficiation plant PM
emissions will mainly be generated from size reduction (grinding) activities & material handling
(loading, unloading)etc.
Adequate measures will be taken to reduce the impact & these are as follows:
 Pollution control equipments (ESP / Bag filter) will be installed wherever required &
maintained properly. Details have been provided in chapter 2 section 2.6.
 Stack with adequate height will be provided & its emissions will be regularly
monitored. Sampling ports, opacity monitor and analyzers shall be provided in the stacks
as per the CPCB guidelines.
 Some of the gases can be recovered & can be used further for energy generation.
 Maintenance of vehicles will be done on regular basis.
 Only those vehicles will be allowed which will be following PUC norms
 Personal protective equipments like dust mask, ear plugs, helmets etc, will be
provided to the employees/workers.
 Adequate Green belt/plantation will be developed all around the boundary &
within the plant premises so as to attenuate the gaseous emission impact.
 Regular ambient air monitoring around the plant & nearby villages will be done.
 CPCB Guidelines will be followed.
Fugitive emissions, sources and control technologies
A) Fugitive Emissions
Fugitive emissions are the air pollutants released in the air other than those from stacks or vents;
any chemical or mixture of chemicals, in any physical form, which represents an unanticipated or
spurious leak from anywhere on an industrial site
Moisture content of the material
• Type of material processed
• Type of equipment
• Operating practices employed
B) Fugitive Emissions in proposed plant and its Mitigation Measures
1) Transfer Points:
At the discharge point, dust is emitted due to free fall of product and wind carry over. To control
the dust emission from dropping/transfer points covered belt conveyors will be provided for raw
material transfer to avoid the dust emission.
2) Storage of raw materials:
Dust will be generated here due to carryover by wind. However to avoid this, material will be
kept under covered shed. Proper water sprinkling will be done for dust suppression in open yards
& internal roads.
3) Transportation
Movement of heavy trucks/vehicles on the un-metalled road generates substantial quantity of dust
emission. This is due to the presence of dust over the road, which is carried away by wind. To
control the generation of dust, all the roads inside the premises will be black topped/concreted.
Regular sweeping of all the roads and floors will be done by vacuum sweeper & it will be
continued in doing so. Water spray through tankers will be done on bare lands and internal roads.
Green belt development along the road side will trap and minimize the fugitive emission generate
from the unit operation.
4) Material Transfer Points:
Dust generates from all transfer points of conveyors. This will be controlled by providing mist
spray system at all transfer points where dry material is being handled.
Detailed Pollution Control Equipments for Proposed Plant are given in Table no. 10 .1.
Table 10.1: Proposed Pollution Control Equipments
Section Stack attached to Air Pollution
Control
Induration FurnaceExhaust ESP
Indurance feed end Bag Filter
Pellet Plant Indurance discharge end Bag Filter
Coke stone Grinding Bag filter
lime stone Grinding Bag Filter
Proportioning system Bag filter
Following measures will be implemented in the plant to control the generation of fugitive
emissions:
a) Enclosures will be provided for unloading operations.
b) Water will be sprayed during unloading of materials.
c) Covered conveyer belt will be used for material transportation.
d) All transfer point locations will be fully enclosed.
e) Mist spray system will be provided at all the transfer points as per the requirement.
f) Regular Maintenance of Bag filters:
Maintenance of the Bag Filter includes replacement of bags, checking the performance of the
Bag Filter, maintenance of ID fans etc.
g) The information on performance of Bag Filter in relation to the process/ production conditions
will be collected to optimize the efficiency of Bag Filters.
h) All the roads inside the premises will be blacktopped/ concreted.
i) Regular cleaning of roads and Unit area by vacuum cleaning machine will be done.
j) Fines collected from air pollution control equipment will totally be used in the pellet plant
k) Dense green belt within the premises and along the roads to control the fugitive
emission from vehicular movement.
Storage of materials
Proper storage facilities will be established for Raw material Storage in the Plant. These are as
given in table 10.2.
Table No. 10.2: Proposed Storage Facilities of materials

S.
Type of Material Proposed Storage Facility
No.
1. Iron Ore Fines Covered Shed & Open Yard
2. Coke Breeze Covered Shed
3. Bentonite Covered Shed
4. Limestone Covered Shed
5. Coal Covered Shed
6. FO/LDO. Tank
10.3.2 Noise Management
Noise in the plant will be generated from various sources mainly due to running equipments like
ID-fans, crushers, compressors, Ball mill etc. Other than this noise can be generated from other
ancillary activities and movements of vehicles on roads, highways etc.
Exposure to such high noise level to workers for long duration may lead to certain occupational
diseases. To control the high noise level, following steps will be adopted.
• Proper noise abatement measures will be taken and persons working just close to machine and
machine operators will be provided with personal protective equipment viz. Ear plugs /
Ear muffs etc. for further protection.
• Various measures proposed to reduce noise pollution likewise reduction of noise at source,
provision of acoustic lagging for the equipment & suction side silencers, selection of low noise
equipments.
• Proper maintenance, oiling and greasing of machines at regular intervals will be done to reduce
generation of noise.
• Properly insulated enclosures will be provided to equipments making excessive noise.
• Walls and ceilings of the concerned buildings will be lined with sound absorbing materials.
• Improved silencers are provided in the machineries generating high noise.
• Green belt/plantation will be developed all along the project boundary.
• Regular monitoring of noise level will be carried out and corrective measures in concerned
machinery will be adopted accordingly.
10.3.3 Water Environment Management
10.3.3.1 Water Requirement
Water requirement for the Unit is 2491 KLD which will be sourced from Tungabadhra dam
10.3.3.2 Waste Water Management
There will not be any effluent discharge outside the plant as the plant will work on Zero discharge
principle & hence there will not be any adverse impact on the water quality.
Following mitigation measures will be followed:
• Waste water generated from process will be treated in STP of 50 KLD Capacity.
• Domestic waste water generated from office area & canteen will be treated in STP.
• Treated water will be reused for Green Belt Development & dust suppression.
• All the water collected from process of filter press will be recycled in the process.
• Rain water harvesting system will be provided for storm water drains and rooftop.
10.3.4 Solid Waste Management

The following measure will be taken for the solid waste generated from the operation of the plant.
• Tailings will be generated from the proposed Iron ore Beneficiation Unit. These rejects
will be sold to cement industries, brick manufacturers or will be used for construction sites as
filling material and in landfills.
• Fines collected from ESP/Bag filters will be re-used in pellet plant.
Table No 10.3 Solid Waste Generation & Management
Beneficiation Plant
Solid waste MTPA Disposal
Tailing Disposed to outside parties for use in cement plants,
brick manufacturing/ landfill/ Construction fillings.
Pellet Plant
Solid waste TPA Disposal
Fines collected from Will be recycled in pellet plant along with concentrate
ESP/Bag filters
10.3.5 Energy Conservation
Manufacturing of Pellets & Beneficiation process is an energy-intensive process.
The following measures will be followed for reduction in specific energy consumption:
• Installation of energy efficient lightings & energy saving light fittings
• Installing low watt tube lights / LED bulbs
• Installation of solar street lights
• Procurement of energy efficient machineries
• Minimizing idle running of vehicle, machines and electrical appliances
• Optimizing loads and periodic preventive maintenance and lubrication
• Prevention of leakages of compressed air
• Periodic energy audits
• Training, awareness and motivational programmes.
10.3.6 Green Belt/Plantation Development
33% of the plant area i.e. 8.72 Ha out of 26.44 Ha of Plant area and for 101.17 Ha of tailing area,
the green belt area will be 33.56 Ha at Kalingeri will be developed as green belt/plantation all
around the plant boundary, roadside, office, building & stretches open are within the premises.
Local plant species will be preferred as per the CPCB guidelines in consultation with Local Forest
Department.A green belt of tree plantation around the project site of MSPL Limited will helps to
arrest the particulate matter & control the noise emissions in the area and hence attenuate the
pollution to a great extent.
The following characteristics will be taken into consideration while selecting plant species for
green belt development and tree plantation.
 They should be fast growing and tall trees.
 They should be perennial and evergreen.
 They should have thick canopy cover.
 The planting should be in appropriate alternate rows around the site to prevent lateral
pollution dispersion.
 The trees should maintain regional ecological balance and conform to soil and
hydrological conditions. Indigenous species should be preferred.
10.3.6.1 Proposed Plantation Scheme
Out of the total area i.e. 26.44 Ha of plant area and 101.17 Ha of Tailing pond area at Kalingeri,
the Company will be developing green belt/plantation in an area of around 42.28 Ha(~33 %).
Given Below are the Action plan for the proposed Green belt development & details of Proposed
Plant species that will be grown at the site.
Table.No.10.4 : Proposed Green belt plan & plan is shown vide MES/DWG/GB/22-15
Greenbelt No. of Spacing of Budgetary
Sl. Area to be Saplings Plantation Allocation (In
No. Year developed Proposed to Species Name (m x m) Rs.)
be Planted
Neem, Radha Chuda, Kadamba,
st
1 1 Year 8.20 2200 Bellary Jali, Champa, Mango, 2345200
Mahagoni, Karijalli, Banyan tree,
2 2nd Year 8.15 2350 Bellary Jali, Champa, Mango, 2489825
2642250
3rd Year 8.13 2500 Bellary Jali, Champa, Mango,
3 2x2
2189200
4th Year 8.42 2000 Bellary Jali, Champa, Mango,
4 Mahagoni, Karijalli, Banyan tree,
2560740
5 5th Year 9.38 2100 Bellary Jali, Champa, Mango,
10.3.6.2 General Guidelines for Green Belt Development

Following guidelines will be followed for the Green Belt Development Plan in the
proposed plant.
 All the barren areas will be vegetated. Soil and other environment are very
encouraging and the expected growth rate would be more than 90%. Saplings will be
purchased from the local Forest Department and plantation preparations will be taken
up before every monsoon. Suitable people having track record in such a field are
entrusted with the nursery job and plantation after care as well.
 Trees growing to a height of 5m or more would be planted.

 Plantation of trees should be undertaken in around the area in alternating rows to prevent
horizontal pollution dispersion.
 Trees would be planted along roadsides, to arrest auto-exhaust and noise
pollution, and in such a way that there is no direct line of sight to the installation when
viewed from a point outside the foliage perimeter.
 Since tree trunks are normally devoid of foliage (upto 3 m), it should be
appropriate to have shrubs in between these trees to give coverage to this portion
 Fast growing trees with thick perennial foliage would be planted, as it will take many
years for trees to grow to their full height.
In order to facilitate proper growth of vegetation, proper measures involving preparation of
seedbed with suitable amount of fertilizers and treatment with mulches will be taken.
Vegetation covers in and around the plant workings generally helps in:
 Stabilizing erodible slopes to minimize soil erosion.
 Control of dust.
 Enhancement of aesthetic value.
 Maximizing evapo -transpiration, which helps minimizing run off.
 Reducing noise.
Plantation to absorb Sulphur dioxide (SO2 Emissions): It is found that about, 500 m 2
greenery detoxifies the 70% of the SO2; from the atmosphere, which acts as a pollutant. For
removal of suspended particulate matter:
 Height & spread of crown
 Leaves supported on firm petioles
 Abundance of surface on bark & foliage, through
 Roughness of bark
 Epidermal outgrowths on petioles
 Abundance of auxiliary hairs
 Hairs or scales on laminar surfaces
 Stomata protected
Plantation to Reduce Noise Pollution
Trees having thick and fleshy leaves with petioles flexible and capacity to withstand
vibration are suitable. Heavier branches and trunk of the trees also deflect or refract the sound
waves. The density, height and width are critical factors in designing an adequate noise
screen plantation. Combination of trees and shrubs together with suitable landforms and design
appears to be the best system for combating noise pollution.
10.4 Corporate Environment Policy

The company commits itself to the protection of environment. It is MSPL policy to maintain
pollution free, healthy environment in its activity of manufacturing and handling of Iron pellet.
The purpose is to outline the policy and procedures effective throughout the Company,
concerning environmental protection.
10.4.1 Environmental Principles

Realizing that the world's natural resources are limited and fragile, the Company considers
environmental protection to be consistent with its overall goals and values and an important
consideration in its total activities. This commitment to environmental protection is reflected
in the company’s policies, programs and practices for conducting operations in an
environmentally as well as economically responsible manner. Furthermore, the Company
recognizes that an effective environmental management system can positively impact corporate
profitability in several important ways. First, programs designed to make efficient use of natural
resources often minimize operating costs. Second, environmental quality programs help sustain
and enhance the Company's presence and reputation in domestic and international markets.
Third, compliance programs minimize risk and potential legal liability.
In these ways and more, environmental protection is viewed by the Company as important to the
economic well-being of the Company.
In light of the above principles, the following corporate environmental policy has been
established.
10.4.2 Environmental Policy Statement
MSPL is committed to environmental stewardship and believes that environmental protection is a

management responsibility as well as the responsibility of every employee of the Company. This
policy concerning environmental protection addresses aspects of the Company's operations which
can potentially impact the environment.
The Company shall seek to:
 Conduct its operations in compliance with applicable laws, regulations and
standards concerning environmental protection and provide a mechanism for self
monitoring to ensure compliance and continual improvement.
 Establish corporate environmental objectives and targets relevant to the

environmental impacts of its activities and a means to measure progress against these
objectives. These objectives and targets shall be reviewed and revised as necessary
on an annual basis
 Continually improve our environmental management system and related policies,

programs, and performance, based on the results of our periodic reviews and taking into
account regulatory changes, technical developments, scientific understanding, and
community expectations.
 Minimize the environmental risks to our employees and the communities in which we
operate.
 Promote employee awareness of environmental concerns, actions and
responsibilities.
 Operate facilities and conduct the Company's activities taking into consideration the
efficient use of energy and materials.
 Reduce and where possible eliminate waste through recycling and handle and dispose of
all waste through safe and responsible methods.
 Establish a better environment for future generations.
 To be prepared with fast responses for any emergency arising out of our operations
and posing risks to environment.
 Ensure that the Board of Directors is fully informed about pertinent
environmental issues and the Corporation's environmental policy.
The corporate responsibility and sustainability activities are managed under the guidance of the
management of MSPL. The corporate responsibility and sustainable committee comprises of all
senior management responsible for the company’s corporate responsibilities policies and
practices.
This policy is made available to the public, all the stake holders and interested parties and is
consistent with general corporate policy.
10.5 Infrastructure Facilities
Facilities like Rest room, drinking water, Primary health Centre, Canteen, Washroom etc. will be
developed within the premise. Guest house and quarters will also be constructed for the
employees. The health centre will be manned all the time for any kind of emergency. First Aid
Box will be provided at important sections all over the plant for easy access.
A well equipped laboratory will be established for conducting the basic testing/experiments.
10.6 Reporting of Non-Conformance & Management Review

10.6.1 Administrative Set Up
 The Executive Director is looking after all the operations including implementation of
various EHS & sustainability initiatives for the control of pollution and protection of
environment and leading to achieve the sustainable goals as per Corporate Environment
Policy (CEP). The day-to-day work, is assisted by Head (Operation), who is also
responsible for all operation, maintenance and project related activities. All HODs of
Plant operation, Mechanical maintenance, Electrical maintenance, Projects reports
issues related to Environment, Safety and associated compliances/deviations to HOD
(Operation). He is reporting to Executive Director.
 Head (Environmental Department) is responsible to monitor all environment related
activities related to operation and projects in the plant. He is primary responsible for
heading Environment Department (ED) of Plant operation and is also responsible for
protection and control of pollution.
 Head (OHS) is responsible for all matter related to Health and Safety in Plant
(Operation) and is reporting to Executive Director.
 All issues related to Environment, Safety and associated compliances/deviations
thereof are appraised to ED, after discussion made with Head (Operations) & HODs of
various departments.
 Weekly and Monthly management information system is sent from unit level to the apex
management i.e. Directors of MSPL through Corporate Environment and Occupational
Health & Safety Department for necessary review. For development and maintenance of
jobs like drainage, settling tanks etc. assistance from the projects civil engineering
department are taken.
 The organizational chart of ED (Proposed) at MSPL to deal with the environmental issues
and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions, defined as per
Corporate Environment
The elaborate system of handling non-compliances at MSPL has been detailed in subsequent
paragraphs. In order to take care of the administrative aspects for implementation of various
mitigation measures, sustainable initiatives and monitor its effectiveness an Environmental
Management Cell (EMC) will be constituted along with Environment Department under the
Chairmanship of ED, Operation which will be strengthened further to take care of the proposed
plant. Hierarchy of EMC:.
Cost of Environment Management Plan

The details of estimated capital and recurring cost of the proposed environmental
management plan during construction and operation phase are as per given in Table - 10.5.
Implementation of following EMP will be carried out along with installation of plant and
completed prior to commissioning except for the Occupational health & Green Belt.
Table - 10.5: Cost of Environment Management/ CER
Sr.No Activity/Items Rs. In Lakhs

Capital Cost Recurring Remarks
expenses/year
1 Air Pollution Control 960 22
a Fixed water sprinklers at raw 20 2
material, roads
b Road Sprinking Tankers with Spray 40 8
fittings
c Concreting/Blacktopping of internal 900 20 Assumed 6 Km CC
roads road
2 Water Pollutuon Control 100 5
a Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) 50 5
3 Solid Waste Management 15 5
a Tailing bricks manufacturing unit 15 5
4 Pollution Monitoring 100 10
a Periodic environmental monitoring 100 10 Assumed Installing
through NABL/MoEFCC Accredited the Online AAQM
laboratory (Ambient air quality
mgt.) Instrument.
5 Plantation 20 3
a Development of green belt 20 3
plantation
6 Occupational health 117 34
a Personal Dust sampler@ Rs2 Lakh, 5 1
Noise dosimeter@ Rs 2.0 lakh,
Noise level meter@Rs.1 lakh
b Personal Protection Equipment 30
c Fire extinguishers 12 3
d Fire Hydrant with pipe line 100
7 ESP & Stack 1200.00 120
8 Bag filter system (PP+IOBP + 190.00 19
IOGS)
9 Any Other pollution control Eqp. 300.00 30
Total 3002 248
10.6.1 Expected Implementation Period (Time Frame) during Construction phase

The EMC, during construction phase, looks after the implementation of the envisaged
environmental mitigation measures by the concerned contractors. EMP matrix during
construction phase of the project is provided in Table 10.6 below.
Table.No.10.6 : EMP matrix
S Component Monitoring/
Aspect Potential impacts Impact Mitigation measures
n Responsibility
evaluation
Fugitive dust emissions Temporary Use of covered trucks

1 Air Air quality from construction Continuous
impacts confined Regular water
activities like Operation daily monitoring
to construction sprinkling at vulnerable
of heavy vehicles, and supervision
dumping of materials site. areas of Construction,
by MSPL.
etc. site and roads
Monitoring of
Regular maintenance pollutants on
of Vehicles and monthly basis as
machineries to proposed in
monitoring
conform to CPCB
program.
standards
Increase in noise levels Monthly

Increased noise Provision of PPEs -
due to Operation of monitoring of
levels However, no earplugs, earmuffs etc.
construction equipment for construction Noise level
2 Noise Noise long duration
& Vehicular traffic for personnel. during
levels exposure
carrying construction envisaged. construction by
material MSPL
Monitoring of
Increase in suspended No large scale Storm water drainage pollutants on
Surface solids from Storm water levelling & system with sediment monthly
3 Water water run-offs during heavy excavation is
traps for arresting the basis by
required for
rain & flooding completion of the silt / sediment load MSPL as
situations carrying loose balance work. All washable proposed in
soil/ construction construction material environment
material from site will be stored under monitoring
sheds or enclosed program.
space to prevent
spillage into the
drainage network
Clariflocculator is
established to treat
surface runoff.
Continuous
Soil Contamination Construction waste
Solid Temporary storage. daily visual
4 Soil due to Solid wastes generated will be
waste construction & inspection by
quality generated during
implementation disposed by use for trained
construction
will be managed levelling of pre- Staff of
properly. identified low lying contractor.
areas within the Weekly
plant. monitoring and
supervision by
MSPL
10.6.2 Expected Implementation Period (Time Frame) during operation phase

During operational stage, different issues/components involved in the environmental management
and monitoring is supervised b y the EMC. ED, Operation and Environment Cell comprising
of head of all departments and senior management level officers periodically assesses and
monitor the implementation of mitigation. EMP matrix during operation phase of the project is
provided in Table Below
Table.no 10.7 EMP matrix during operation phase
Sn Component Aspect Impacts Mitigation measures Monitoring / Responsibility
1. Air Air quality Degradation of AAQ i n ESP for control of main process Responsibility EMC,
the plant & vicinity due to emissions from the stack. MSPL.
Stack emissions (mainly Bag filters in other sections to Monitoring of process
PM). Vehicular traffic control stack emissions stacks (of ESPs) through
may result in increased air All APCDs designed / upgraded to OCEMS.
pollution in nearby meet PM emissions of < Hourly continuous
habitations. 30 mg/Nm3 ambient air quality
Fugitive emissions Dust suppression consisting of monitoring by Continuous
from material handling, water sprinkling facilities, dry fog Ambient Air Quality
transfer, loading and and De dusting systems. Monitoring Stations
unloading operations. Control of fugitive emissions (CAAQMS)
Plain water type dust suppression Monitoring in the plant and
systems consisting of water nearby area as proposed in
sprinkling systems is provided all environment monitoring
around the raw material stockpiles program.
to suppress fugitive dust. EMC will use the data to
analyze performance of the
plant equipment.
periodically
2. Noise Noise levels Main noise Heavy noise generating equipment Work zone and ambient
generating sources are like – blowers/fans, crushers, noise monitoring will be
much away from the compressors provided with conducted periodically.
plant boundary. acoustic barriers/ enclosures. Noise level Monitoring in
Proper grouting of equipment to the plant and nearby area as
avoid rattling and vibrations. proposed in environment
Regular monitoring and preventing monitoring program.
maintenance to avoid pneumatic
(air) leakages in lines
Provision of PPEs, ear plugs/muffs
provided to personnel working
close to the noise generating
equipment.
All rotating equipment / parts
lubricated and provided with
enclosures as far as possible to
reduce noise transmission.
Isolation of equipment to the extent
possible.
3. Water Surface Fresh water withdrawal Extensive recycling & water reuse is Monitoring by MSPL.
from Tungabhadra River Envisaged in the present proposal, to
water 2491 KLD for the minimize fresh water withdrawal.
resources proposed project.
Decrease in flow of
water in the river.
Surface Contamination of Process effluent from Water and wastewater

surface water due to Beneficiation plant is recycled and
water quality flow of effluents and kept in closed circuit through Monitoring will be
surface runoff. thickeners, so that there is no conducted periodically.
discharge of wastewater. Monitoring as proposed in
Dedicated STP of 50 KLD will be environment
provided to treat water generation.
STP based on MBBR technology for monitoring program.
treatment of domestic
wastewater.
ZLD systems will be implemented in
the proposed plant.
4. Solid waste Soil quality/ Deteriorating ground Recycling of all the solid waste Monitoring by MoEF&CC
water quality & Soil generated in which thickener & accrediated lab
Ground filter press is vital equipment.
quality, due to leaching
water quality All dust generated from ESP, and
of chemicals.
bag filter are converted to the
slurry and put into the process
thickener for reutilization which
results in zero solid waste
discharge.
ESP & bagfilter dust will be reused in
the process.
Tailings will be sold to cement
plant, brick manufacturers or
construction sites as filling material.
5. Ecology Terrestrial Activities will take place All technological measures to Horticulture
only within the plant minimize air emissions, generation of
ecology/ premise. effluents (including contaminated Department,MSPL
Aquatic No discharge of storm water) and noise generation will
effluents. Negligible be incorporated in the design of the
ecology impact on ecology.The proposed units.
boundary of the 33% of the plant area i.e. 8.72 Ha out
project site will be of 26.44 Ha of Plant area and for
preserved for greenbelt 101.17 Ha of tailing area, the green
in addition belt area will be 33.56 Ha at Kalingeri
to33%greenbelt/plantatio .The detailed greenbelt development
n area. No cutting plan is mentioned in Chapter 2
of trees required
outside plant
premises.
Chapter-11
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
ENGAGED
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 Ha,
Integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha of M/s. MSPL limited has
been prepared by ‘Mineral Engineering Services' vide their QCI no. ORG000756 for Iron ore
processing unit & Ardra consultancy services vide QCI no. ORG000683 for Pellet plant ,
accredited by QCI/NABET for preparing EIA-/EMP in the sectors . The details of Experts
accredited and pooled for the purpose of carrying out EIA Study are given below.
Disclosure of Consultants engaged
Sl.
Name of EC Coordinator Sector
No.
1 M. S. Raju Iron Ore processing unit
2 Ratikanta Mohanty Pellet Plant
Sr. Name of Functunal Functional Functional Area Approved

No. Area Expert Area Code
1. M.S.Raju GEO  Geology
SHW  Solid & Hazardous Waste Management
NV  Noise & Vibration
RH  Risk Assessment & Hazard Management
2. M. Sachin Raju AP  Air Pollution, Prevention
AQ Monitoring & Control
WP  Metrology, Air quality Modelling &
prediction
 Water pollution Prevention,
 Control & Prediction of Impacts
3. Marappareddy HG  Hydrology, Ground Water
Chandrasekhar & Water Conservation
Reddy
4. Kanikipati SE  Socio-Economics
Narayanamurthy
Raju
5. B.C. Nagaraja LU  Land use
SC  Soil Conservation
6. H.C. Chetan EB  Ecology & Bio-diversity'
Quality Council of India
National Accreditation Board for NAB ET
· Education & Training
'\F1C~TE··or·~1'ecR
Mineral Engineering Services, Bellary
25/XXV, Club Road, Bellary, Karnataka, 583103
Accredited as Category - A organization under the QCl-NABET Scheme for Accreditation of EIA
Consultant Organizations: Version 3 for preparing EIA-EMP reports in the following Sectors:
SI. Sector (as per)

Sector Description Cat.
No. NAB ET MoEFCC
Mining of minerals including open cast/ underground
1 1 1 (a) (i) A
mining
2 Mineral beneficiation 7 2 (b) A
... . ...
Note: Names of approved EIA Coordinators ancJ.Functionill:/AreaExperts are mentioned in RAACminutes
dated Jan 17, 2020 posted on QCl-NABETwebsite. -t:
....... :
The Accreditation shall remain in force subject to SA?finl)eq compliance to the terms and conditions
mentioned in QCl-NABET'sletter of q~creditation bearing,qq. BCl/N~BET/ENV/AC0/20/1276 dated March
17, 2020. The accreditation needs to be/re.newed b(;!fo.re the e.xpiryda.te l)y Mineral Engineering Services,
Bellaryfollowin due process of assessment.
Certificate No. Valid till

NABET/ EIA/1922/ RA 0158 Oct 22, 2022
For the updated List of Accredited EIA Consultant Organizations with approved Sectors please refer to QCl-NABET
website.
ANNEXURE NO. 1
F. No. lA-J-11011/329/2021-IAll(IND-J)
Government of India
Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change
(Impact Assessment Division)
Indira Paryavaran Bhawan
Jor Bagh Road, Aliganj,
New Delhi - 110003
E-mail: r.sundar@nic.in
Tel: 011-24695304
Dated: l 51h November, 2021
To
Dr. Meda Venkataiah,
Executive Director (Mines),
Mis. MSPL Limited,
Baldota Bhavan, 117, Maharshi Karve Road,
Mumbai (MH) - 400 020
Email: medaoba@yahoo.com; Tel: 08394-232002
Subject: 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of
26.44 ha, integrated with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis.
MSPL Limited located at Somalpura Village, Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karnataka. - Prescribing of Terms of Reference - regarding.
Sir,
1. This has reference to online application of M/s. MSPL Limited, made vide proposal no.
IA//KA/fND/225939/202 I dated 09/10/2021 along with the application in prescribed format
(Form-I), copy of pre-feasibility report and proposed ToRs for undertaking detailed EIA
study as per the EIA Notification, 2006 for the project mentioned above. The proposed
project activity is listed at S. No. 2(b) Mineral Beneficiation and 3(a), Metallurgical industries
(ferrous & non-ferrous) under Category "A" of the schedule of the EJA Notification, 2006
and appraised at Central Level.
2. The proposal cited above was considered in 47111 meeting of Reconstituted Expert Appraisal
Committee (Industry I sector) held on 28-291h October, 2021. The EAC proceeding of the
said meeting is furnished as below:
Details submitted by Project proponent

3. The project of Mis. MSPL Ltd., located in Somalapur Village, Sandur Tehsil, Ballari District,
Karnataka State is for setting up of a new Beneficiation Plant & Pellet Plant integrated with
Downhill Pipe Conveyor for production of 5.0 million Tons Per Annum (MTPA) oflron Ore
Processing Plant & 3 .0 MTPA of Pellet Plant.
4. E nvironmen t a 1 stite se tt mgs:

SNo Particulars Details Remarks
I. Total land 26.44ha Land use:
[Private: 26.44ha]
Terms of Reference forproject filled '"5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plan! & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Pion/ over an area of 26.44 ha, integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL Limited located at Somalpuro Village. Sandur Taluka. Bellary District
Karnataka.
Pagel of 14
SNo Particulars Details Remarks
Description of the Area
unit in Ha
Iron Ore Processing 1.68
Pellet Plant 1.88
Green zone 9.82
Water storage 0.85
Raw material yard 4.56
Office space & 5.95
Ancillary
Slime (tailing reject) 1.70
storage &
Management in
Plant
Total 26.44
11. Existence of habitation Not applicable
& involvement of R&R
if any.
...
111. Latitude and Longitude Latitude: 15° 0 I '26.00" N to
of the project site 15° 01' 57.3" N
Longitude:
76° 29' 47.10" E to 76° 30'
12.0" E
IV. Elevation of the project 630 m AMSL
site
v. Involvement of Forest Status of stage I Forest For Downhill pipe
land if any. Clearance: application conveyor from mine -
submitted vi des File. no. 16.58 ha
FP/KA/MIN/144985/2021
dated 19/07 /2021
VI. Water body exists within ;rroject site: Nil Authenticated HFL data
the project site as well as of the water body shall
study area Studi area: be furnished in the EIA
Tungabhadra River: 0.2 km/ W report.
Water Reservoir: 3.0km/ NW
Ankamanhalli lake: 3.7Km/SE
Bandri lake: 6.4Km/SW
VII. Existence of ESZ/ ESN Nil.
national park/ wildlife However, following forests are
sanctuary/ biosphere present within study area;
reserve/tiger reserve/ Kumaraswami Betta RF:
elephant reserve etc. if 0.68Km/ East,
any within the study area Ramgarh RF: 2.3Km/North,
Somalapura RF: 0.47Km/ SW
5. Th e unit con fiiguration an d capaciity o f propose d project is given as b e I ow:

SNo Unit Detail Unit Production Capacities
Confisuration
I. I.ron ore Beneficiation 5.0 MTPA 5.0 MTPA (through output)
(Beneficiated ore)
Terms of Reference forproject titled ..5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of-16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL limited located at Somalpura Village. Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karnataka.
Page 2of14
~, SNo Unit Detail Unit Production Capacities
Confizuration
2. Pellet Plant (Pellet) 2x0.8 MTPA 1.6 MTPA
6. The details of the raw material requirement for the proposed project along with its source and
mode of transportation is given as below:
s Raw Quantity Source Distance from Mode of
No Material (TPA) site (Km) Transportation
1 Iron ore 5 MTPA NIOM Captive & -- Through DHPC
fines Other Mines & By road.
2 Bentonite 36000 TPA Gujarat 2000 Km Rail/ Road
3 Coke breeze 24000 TPA Imported from -- Rail/ Ship
Australia I Russia
4 Limestone 24000 TPA Lokapur, Karnataka 350 km Rail/ Road
5 Dolomite 24000 TPA Lokapur, Karnataka 350km Rail/ Road
7. The water requirement for the project is estimated as 2491 KLD, Total water requirement
will be obtained from the existing groundwater. The permission for the drawl of groundwater
will be obtained from Karnataka Ground Water Board. The alternative source of water for
domestic & Processing, from Tungabhadra dam is sought from State High level Clearance
~r?-v 8.
Committee, Directorate of Industries & Commerce.
The power requirement for the project is estimated as 40 MW, out of which 40 MW will be
obtained from the Karnataka State Electricity Board, Kudligi Substation. ;
9. The capital cost of the project is Rs 1316 crores and the capital cost for environmental
protection measures is proposed as Rs.7.0 Crores. The employment generation from the
proposed project will be 432 persons.
I 0. It has been reported by PP that, there is no violation under EIA Notification, 2006/court
case/show cause/direction related to the project under consideration.
11. Name of the EIA consultant:

A. For Mineral Beneficiation: M/s. Mineral Engineering Services [S. No. 58, List of
ACOs with their Certificate no. NABET/EIA/1922/RA0158, valid up to 22/10/2022;
Rev. 15, October 11, 2021]. .
B. For Pellet Plant: M/s. Ardra Consulting Services Pvt. Ltd [S. No. 94, List of ACOs
with their Certificate no. NABET/EIA/1922/IA0055, valid up to 29/12/2022; Rev. 15,
October 11, 2021].
12. Proposed Terms of Reference (Baseline data collection period: March, 2021 to May,
2021):
Attributes Parameters Sampling Remarks
No. of Frequency
stations
A.Air
a. Meteorological Temp, RH, Wind 1 Hourly for 3
parameters direction, Wind speed months
Terms of Reference for project titled "5. 00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3. 0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL Limited located al Somalpura Village, Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karna/aka.
Page 3 of14
Attributes Parameter
s Sampling Remarks
No. of Frequency
stations
b. AAQ parameters S02, N02, PM10, PM2s, 9 2 days/
NH3, C6H6, Pb, Ni, As, week
BaP, CO, 03
B. Noise Lmin, Lmax, Leq 9 Once
C. Water Once
Surface water IS:2296 7
Ground water quality IS: 10500: 2012 8
parameters
D. Land
a. Soil quality a. Physical, Chemical and 8 Once
M icronutrients
b. Land use b. Land use pattern based Core&
on Satellite Imagery Buffer
E. Biological Flora-Core & Buffer Core & Once
a. Aquatic Zones Buffer zones
b. Terrestrial Fauna-Core & Buffer
Zones
F. Socio-economic Random sample survey of Once
parameters I.Total Population/
Household Size /Age
2.Gender Composition
3.S.C I S.T
4.Literacy Level
5.0ccupational Structure
6.ln depth interviews and
Focus Group
Discussions (FGDs).
Data on Morbidity
pattern, Minimum needs
of community for CSR
activities
Observations of the Committee

13. The EAC noted the following:
1. ToR is being sought for undertaking EIA study for the green field project of 5.00
MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of26.44 ha,
integrated with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha at Somalpura
Village, Sandur Taluka, Bellary District Karnataka.
11. Project is proposed in 26.44ha area and involvement of forest land is 16.58 ha for
downhill pipe conveyor from mine.
111. A seasonal nallah passes through the plant site. Land scapmg is planned with
assurance that natural contours shall not be disturbed.
iv. SH-49 passes 1.5 km and nearest railway station is Yashwant Nagar 1 km from site.
Yashwant Nagar village is 1.5 km from site.
v. There are two RFs within 600 m distance from site at Kumaraswami and Somalapur.
Terms of Reference for project titled "5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of26.44 ha, integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL limited located at Somalpura Village. Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karnataka.
Page 4of14
vi. Tailings shall be dewatered and stored in a 1. 7 ha area for sale to cement plants, road
making and tile manufacturing. Further, the tailings shall be alternately pumped to a
plot of 20.33 ha of Ankammanahal/ somalapura village at a distance of 1 Km to 7
Kms through pipe lines and dewatering shall be done there. Recovered water will be
recycled to the plant.
v11. PP has proposed for 2491 KLD of ground water abstraction for the project.
Alternatively, PP is reportedly pursuing the matter with SHLCC for withdrawal of
water from Tungabhadra dam.
Recommendationsof the Committee

14. After deliberations, the Committee recommended the project proposal for prescribing
following specific ToRs for undertaking detailed EIA and EMP study in addition to the
generic ToR enclosed at Annexure-1 read with additional ToRs at Annexure-2:
1. Action plan to limit the dust emission from all the stacks below 30 mg!Nm3 shall be
furnished.
11. Action plan for fugitive emission control in the plant premises shall be provided.
111. The seasonal nallah passing through the project site shall not be disturbed.
Landscaping shall be done on both embankments, with green belt covering 10 m land
on both sides of the nallah.
rv. Action plan for green belt development covering 33% of the project area all along the
periphery of the project site with a density of 2500 trees per hectare shall be
submitted. This shall include 30-meter-wide green belt development within the
project area towards Yashwant Nagar village.
v. Action plan for 100 % solid waste utilization shall be submitted.
vr. Action plan for rain water harvesting shall be submitted.
v11. Action plan for the stock piles with impervious floor, provision of garland drains and
catch pits to trap run off material shall be submitted.
v111. 2491 KLD water shall be sourced from Tungabhadra dam. Ground water abstraction
is not permitted.
rx. Status of forest clearance for diversion of 16.58 ha forest land shall be submitted.
x. Action plan for treatment, storage and utilization of tailings shall be submitted.
xi. Hydrological study of the watershed around the Tungabhadra River shall be carried
out.
xii. HFL details of Tungabhadra River from the concerned Competent Authority and
impact on riverine ecology due to the proposed project shall be submitted in the EIA
report.
Decision of MoEF &CC

15. The undersigned is directed to inform that Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate
Change has examined the proposal in accordance with the Environment Impact Assessment
(EIA) Notification, 2006 & further amendments thereto and after accepting the
recommendations of the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry- I) hereby decided to accord
above-said specific ToRs, in addition to the standard ToRs and Sector Specific ToRs as
enclosed at Annexure I read with additional ToRs at Annexure-2 for carrying out detailed
EIA/EMP for the above project.
16. ft is requested that the draft EIA Report may be prepared in accordance with the above-
mentioned specific ToRs and enclosed generic ToRs and additional ToRs and thereafter
further necessary action including conduct of public consultation may be taken for obtaining
Terms of Reference for project titled '"5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Peller Pla111 over an area of 26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPl limited located at Somalpura Village, Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karna/aka.
Page 5of14
Environment Clearance in accordance· with the procedure prescribed under the EIA
Notification, 2006 as amended.
17. The ToRs are valid for a period of four years from date of issue of this letter as per the
Ministry's Notification S.O. 751 (E) dated 17/02/2020.
18. This issue with the approval of the Competent Authority.

24.
(S~~ar Ramanathan)
Scientist 'E'
Copy to: -
1. Secretary, Department of Environment, Government of Karnataka, Secretariat,
Bangalore-560 001.
2. Chairman, Karnataka State Pollution Control Board, No. 25, 6- 9th Floor, Public Utility
Building, M.G. Road, Bangalore- 560 001.
3. Regional Officer, Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Integrated
Regional Office, Kendriya Sadan, 4th Floor, E&F Wings, 17th Main Road, Koramangala
II Block, Bangalore - 560034
4. Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board, Parivesh Bhawan, CBD-Cum-Office
Complex, East Arjun Nagar, New Delhi-l IO 032.
5. Member Secretary, Central Ground Water Authority, A-2, W3, Curzon Road Barracks,
K.G. Marg, New Delhi-110001.
6. Chief Wildlife Warden, Govt. of Karnataka, Aranya Bhawan, l 81h Cross, Malleswaram,
Bangalore - 560 003
7. District Collector, Ballari District, Karnataka.
8. Guard File/Record File/Monitoring File.
9. MoEF&CC Website
{M
(Sundar Ram(o'athan )
Scientist 'E'
Terms of Reference for project rilled .. 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Peller Plant over an area of26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL Limited located at Somalpura Village. Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karna/aka.
Page 6of14
ANNEXURE-1
GENERIC TERMS OF REFERENCE (ToR) IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR
1. Executive Summary
2. Introduction
1. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation
11. Information about the project proponent
111. Importance and benefits of the project
3. Project Description
1. Cost of project and time of completion.
11. Products with capacities for the proposed project.
111. If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and whether
adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if any.
IV. List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of transportation.
v. Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities
vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their management.
vii. Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water
balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract)
v111. The project proponent shall furnish the requisite documents from the competent
authority in support of drawl of ground water and surface water and supply of
electricity.
rx. Process description along with major equipment and machineries, process flow
sheet (Quantitative) from raw material to products to be provided
x. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.
xi. Expansion/modernization proposals:
a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments thereto
obtained for the project from MoEF&CC/SEIAA shall be attached as an
Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the Regional
Office of the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change as per
circular dated 301h May, 2012 on the status of compliance of conditions
stipulated in all the existing environmental clearances including Amendments
shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of Consent to Operate for
the ongoing /existing operation of the project from SPCB/PCC shall be attached
with the EIA-EMP report.
b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental clearance, reasons
for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification 1994 and/or EIA
Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of Consent to Establish/No
Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units operating prior to
EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the
SPCB shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of
consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.
4. Site Details
1. Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State,
Justification for selecting the site, whether other sites were considered.
u. A toposheet of the study area of radius of 1 Okm and site location on
1 :50,000/1 :25,000 scale on an A3/ A2 sheet. (Including all eco-sensitive areas and
environmentally sensitive places)
111. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site.
Terms of Reference for project titled "5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plan/ & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area o/26.44 ha. integrated
Karnataka.
Page 7 of14
iv. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site.
v. Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating storage
area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an Industrial
area/Estate/Complex, layout oflndustrial Area indicating location ofunit within the
Industrial area/Estate.
vi. Photographs of the proposed and existing (ifapplicable) plant site. If existing, show
photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.
v11. Land use break-up of total land of the project site (identified and acquired),
government/private - agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc
shall be included. (Not required for industrial area)
viii. A list of major industries with name and type within study area (lOkm radius) shall
be incorporated. Land use details of the study area
rx, Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area shall be included.
x. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area. If the site is within
I km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood
occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of
Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be
provided. (Mega green field projects)
xi. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of the acquisition
process and expected time of complete possession of the land.
xii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy.
. 5. Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):

1. Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and
recommendations of the State Forest Department. (If applicable).
11. Land use map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site
delineating the forestland (in case of projects involving forest land more than 40
ha).
111. Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry clearance along
with latest status shall be submitted.
iv. The projects to be located within I 0 km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries,
Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project proponent
shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these
features vis-a-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the
Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon.
v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden of the
State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the study
area.
vi. Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act,
1972, to the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife.
6. Environmental Status
1. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and site-specific
micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed
and direction and rainfall.
11. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.s, S02, NOx, CO and
other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations
shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-dominant wind
direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests.
Terms of Reference for project titled "5.00 !vffPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area o/26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL limited located at Somalpura Village. Sandur Taluka, Beflary District
Karnataka.
Page 8of14
111. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as per frequency
given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with - min., max., average
and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ stations
should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.
iv. Surface water quality of nearby River (60m upstream and downstream) and other
surface drains at eight locations as per CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.
v. Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by the
CPCB/MoEF&CC.
vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be included.
v11. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area.
v111. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines.
tx. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for transportation
of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project, parking arrangement etc.
x. Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study
area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species.
If Schedule-I fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan
shall be prepared and furnished.
xi. Socio-economic status of the study area.
7. Impact Assessment and Environment Management Plan

1. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission
based on site-specific meteorological features. In case the project is located on a
hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain
characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ.
Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the
AAQ of the area shall be well assessed. Details of the model used and the input data
used for modelling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted
on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive
receptors, if any.
11. Water Quality modelling- in case, if the effluent is proposed to be discharged in to
the local drain, then Water Quality Modelling study should be conducted for the
drain water taking into consideration the upstream and downstream quality of water
of the drain.
iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding
environment shall be assessed and provided. In this regard, options for transport of
raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail-cum
road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.
rv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, extent recycled
and reused for different purposes shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent
treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed
standards of discharge under E (P) Rules.
v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to meet standards.
vt. Measures for fugitive emission control
v11. Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and disposal.
Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous waste shall also be
included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization,
recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource
conservation.
v111. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A
Terms of Referencefor project titled "5.00 1\fl'PA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 ha. integrated
with downhillpipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL Limited located at Somalpura Village, Sandur Taluka. Bellary District
Karnataka.
Page 9of14
detailed plan of action shall be provided.
ix, Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less
than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning
schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the project boundary
and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be
incorporated.
x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be submitted to
harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground
water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh
water and reduce the water requirement from other sources.
xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control
measures shall be included.
xii. Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be submitted.
xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and Emergency
Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster
management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management Plan.
8. Occupational health
1. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of
above mentioned hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level
(PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to
keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved,
11. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers'
health is being evaluated by pre-designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry,
Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular
defect) ECG, during pre-placement and periodical examinations give the details of
the same. Details regarding last month analysed data of abovementioned parameters
as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise.
111. Annual report of health status of workers with special reference to Occupational
Health and Safety.
iv. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract
and casual workers.
9. Corporate Environment Policy

1. Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board
of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.
11. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process I procedures
to bring into focus any infringement I deviation I violation of the environmental or
forest norms I conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA.
iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with
the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental
clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.
rv, Does the company have system of reporting of non-compliances I violations of
environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and I or shareholders
or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA
report
10. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided
to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers
Terms of Reference for project lilied ''5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Peller Plant over an area of26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL Limited located at Somalpura Village. Sandur Taluka. Bel/my District
Karnataka.
Page 10of14
during operation phase.
11. To address the Public Hearing issues, provisions contained under Ministry's Office
Memorandum vide F.No. 22-65/2017-lA.lII dated 30/09/2020 shall be complied.
12. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of
Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received
any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of
Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/A TR to the notice(s) and present
status of the case.
13. A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above ToRs.
14. The ToRs prescribed shall be valid for a period of three years for submission of the EIA-
EMP reports along with Public Hearing Proceedings (wherever stipulated).
The following general points shall be noted:

1. All documents shall be properly indexed, page numbered.
11. Period/date of data collection shall be clearly indicated.
111. Authenticated English translation of all material in regional languages shall be provided.
rv. The letter/application for environmental clearance shall quote the MOEF&CC file No. and
also attach a copy of the letter.
v. The copy of the letter received from the Ministry shall be also attached as an annexure to the
final EIA-EMP Report.
vi. The index of the final EIA-EMP report must indicate the specific chapter and page no. of the
ElA-EMP Report
v11. While preparing the EIA report, the instructions for the proponents and instructions for the
consultants issued by MOEF&CC vide 0.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-IA.ll (I) dated 4th
August, 2009, which are available on the website of this Ministry shall also be followed.
v111. The consultants involved in the preparation of EIA-EMP report after accreditation with
Quality Council of India (QCl)/National Accreditation Board of Education and Training
(NABET) would need to include a certificate in this regard in the EIA-EMP reports prepared
by them and data provided by other organization/Laboratories including their status of
approvals etc. Name of the Consultant and the Accreditation details shall be posted on the
ElA-EMP Report as well as on the cover of the Hard Copy of the Presentation material for
EC presentation.
ix. ToRs' prescribed by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) shall be considered for
preparation of EIA-EMP report for the project in addition to all the relevant information as
per the 'Generic Structure of EIA' given in Appendix III and IIIA in the EIA Notification,
2006. Where the documents provided are in a language other than English, an English
translation shall be provided. The draft EIA-EMP report shall be submitted to the State
Pollution Control Board of the concerned State for conduct of Public Hearing. The SPCB
shall conduct the Public Hearing/public consultation, district-wise, as per the provisions of
EIA notification, 2006. The Public Hearing shall be chaired by an Officer not below the rank
of Additional District Magistrate. The issues raised in the Public Hearing and during the
consultation process and the commitments made by the project proponent on the same shall
be included separately in EIA-EMP Report in a separate chapter and summarized in a tabular
chart with financial budget (capital and revenue) along with time-schedule of implementation
for complying with the commitments made. The final EIA report shall be submitted to the
Ministry for obtaining environmental clearance.
********
ANNEXURE-2
Terms of Reference for project titled "5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pelle/ Plant O\ler an area o/26-44 ha, integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over on area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL limited located at Somalpura Village. Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karnataka.
Page 11of14
ADDITIONAL ToRs FOR
ADDITIONAL ToRs FOR PELLET PLANT
1. Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with the status of environmental clearance of iron
ore and coal mines
2. Quantum of production of coal and iron ore from coal & iron ore mines and the projects
they cater to. Mode of transportation to the plant and its impact
3. Recent land-use map based on satellite imagery. High-resolution satellite image data
having Im-Sm spatial resolution like quickbird, lkonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened etc. for
the 10 Km radius area from proposed site. The same shall be used for land used/land-
cover mapping of the area.
4. PM (PM10 and PM2.s) present in the ambient air must be analysed for source analysis -
natural dust/RSPM generated from plant operations (trace elements) of PM10 to be carried
over.
5. All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to
ground water.
6. Plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the steel plants in the
CREP guidelines.
7. Plan for slag utilization
8. Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke oven, blast furnace)
9. System of coke quenching adopted with justification.
10. Trace metals Mercury, arsenic and fluoride emissions in the raw material.
11. Trace metals in waste material especially slag.
12. Trace metals in water.
*****
Terms of Reference for project titled "5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 ha, integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPL limited located al Somalpura Village, Sandur Taluka, Bellary District
Karna/aka.
Page 12of14
ADDITIONAL ToRS FOR BENEFICIATION PLANT
1. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes and operations,
along with material and energy inputs & outputs (material and energy balance).
2. Details regarding pollution control measures to be adopted in the mineral handling area,
loading and unloading areas including all transfer points shall be submitted.
3. The Project proponent shall submit action plan for conditioning of the ore with water
to mitigate fugitive dust emission, without affecting flow of ore in the ore processing
and handling areas.
4. Treatment details regarding effluent generated from the ore beneficiation plant and the
mode of transportation of tailing slurry shall be submitted.
5. Separate chapter on design of the tailing/slime pond by considering the rainfall in the
area, proximity of the tailing/slime pond to the nearby water bodies and safety etc., shall
be submitted.
6. Action plan for regular monitoring of ground water level and quality in and around the
project area of beneficiation plant and tailing/slime pond shall be submitted by
establishing a network of existing wells and constructing new piezometers.
7. Details regarding establishment of garland drain around the tailing/slime pond and the
quantity of decanted water to be re-circulated from the tailing/slime pond shall be
submitted along with complete water balance.
8. Technology to be adopted for maximum recovery of ore in order to reduce slurry

discharge and to increase the life of the tailing/slime pond shall be submitted.
******
Terms of Referencefor project titled "5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of26.44 ha. integrated
Karnataka.
Page 13of14
Executive Summary
Executive summary of the report in about 8-10 pages incorporating the following:
1. Project name and location (Village, Dist, State, Industrial Estate (if applicable)
11. Products and capacities. If expansion proposal, then existing products with capacities
and reference to earlier EC.
111. Requirement of land, raw material, water, power, fuel, with source of supply
(Quantitative)
rv. Process description in brief, specifically indicating the gaseous emission, liquid effluent
and solid and hazardous wastes. Materials balance shall be presented.
v. Measures for mitigating the impact on the environment and mode of discharge or
disposal.
vi. Capital cost of the project, estimated time ofcompletion
v11. Site selected for the project- Nature of land -Agricultural (single/double crop), barren,
Govt./private land, status of is acquisition, nearby (in 2-3 km.) water body, population,
with in 1 Okm other industries, forest, eco-sensitive zones, accessibility, (note - in case
of industrial estate this information may not be necessary)
v111. Baseline environmental data - air quality, surface and ground water quality, soil
characteristic, flora and fauna, socio-economic condition of the nearby population
rx, Identification of hazards in handling, processing and storage of hazardous material and
safety system provided to mitigate the risk.
x. Likely impact of the project on air, water, land, flora-fauna and nearby population
xi. Emergency preparedness plan in case of natural or in plant emergencies
x11. Issues raised during public hearing (if applicable) and response given
xiii. CSR plan with proposed expenditure.
xiv. Occupational Health Measures
xv. Post project monitoring plan
******
Terms of Reference for project titled "5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of26.44 ha. integrated
with downhill pipe conveyor over an area of 16.58 ha by Mis. MSPl limited located at Somalpura Village, Sandur Taluka, Bel/my District
Karnataka.
Page 14of14
ANNEXURE NO. 1A
F. No. IA-J-11011/329/2021-IA-II(IND-I)
Government of India
Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change
(Impact Assessment Division)
Indira Paryavaran Bhawan
Jor Bagh Road, Aliganj,
New Delhi – 110003
E-mail: r.sundar@nic.in
Tel: 011-24695304
Dated: 14th February, 2022
To
Dr. Meda Venkataiah,
Executive Director (Mines),
M/s. MSPL Limited,
Baldota Bhavan, 117, Maharshi Karve Road,
Mumbai (MH) – 400 020
Email: medaoba@yahoo.com Tel: +91 99002 56797
Subject: 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44
Ha, integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha by M/s. MSPL
Limited located at Village Somalapura, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka–
Amendment in Terms of Reference – regarding.
Sir,
1. This has reference to the application of M/s. MSPL Limited made vide proposal no.
IA//KA/IND/249471/2022 dated 01/01/2022 along with Form 3, revised Form-1 and PFR seeking
amendment in standard Terms of Reference accorded by the Ministry vide letter no. IA-J-
11011/329/2021-IA-II(IND-I) dated 15/11/2021.
2. The proposal cited above was considered in 52nd meeting of Reconstituted Expert Appraisal
Committee (Industry 1 sector) held on 27th, 28th and 31st January, 2022. The EAC proceeding of
the said meeting is furnished as below:
Details submitted by Project proponent

3. M/s. MSPL Limited had proposed for setting up of 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0
MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 Ha, integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area
of 16.58 Ha located at Village Somalapura, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka. Application
for ToR was submitted to MoEF&CC, New Delhi on 09/10/2021. The proposal was considered by
the EAC in its meeting held on 28-29th October, 2021 and accordingly ToR letter was issued vide
letter no. IA-J-11011/329/2021-IA-II(IND-I) dated 15/11/2021.
4. The instant proposal of M/s. MSPL Limited is for seeking following amendment in the ToR dated
15/11/2021:
Reference of Description as per Description as per proposed amendment
approved approved ToR
ToR
The serial Tungabhadra river: 0.2 km/W. Tungabhadra river is located at 22.6 Kms from the
number (vi) proposed plant site. Only a small seasonal nallah starts
adjacent to the plant area and joins Narihalla seasonal
ToR amendment for the project titled “5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area of 26.44 Ha, integrated with
Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha by M/s. MSPL Limited located at Village Somalapura, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka”.
Page 1 of 4
Reference of Description as per Description as per proposed amendment
approved approved ToR
ToR
of table given nallah/canal. Narihalla has a dam constructed
of para no. 4. downstream at a distance of 11.7 Kms In fact the HFL
of Tungabhadra dam is at 498m AMSL and the
proposed plant site has as elevation of 630m AMSL
Therefore there is no impact of flood hazards for the
plant site. Hence, this point may be removed.
The serial Unit Configuration: 2x0.8 Unit Configuration:3.0 MTPA
number (v) of MTPA Production capacities: 3.0 MTPA
table given of Production capacities:
para no. 5 1.6 MTPA
The point Tailing shall be dewatered and
M/s. MSPL identified an Alternate 101.17 Ha, of area
number (vi) of stored in a 1.7 ha area for sale to
for acquiring for future expansion of the
of para no. cement plants, road making and
project/ancillaries at Kalingeri village at distance of
13. tile manufacturing. Further, the
about 6 Kms from our proposed plant instead of
tailings shall be alternatively
Ankammanahal/somalapura of 7 Kms. We propose to
pumped to a plot of 20.33 ha of
utilize 20 Ha for stocking the filter cake out of this area
Ankammanahal/somalapura at kaligera which is 6 km away from our project site
village at a distance of 1Km to
and balance land of 81.17 Ha will be Earmarked for
7 Kms through pipe lines and
future expansion /ancillaries. The tailings will be
dewatering shall be done there.
transported in a slurry form through pipeline to this
Recovered water will be 20.0 Ha kalingeri site which is subjected to the
recycled to the plant. filtration process for de-watering and collecting the
tailings as filter cake for future stocking/disposing to
the end user’s application. Therefore, we request you to
replace Ankammanahal village with Kalingeri village
as above.
The point Action plan to limit the dust The equipment will be designed for 30 mg/Nm3 But the
number (i) of emission from all the stacks prescribed norms of 50 mg/Nm3 may be permitted to
para no. 14. below 30 mg/Nm3 shall be adhere as per GSR 894 (E) dated 04/12/2019
furnished
The point Ground water abstraction is not Allotment of surface water from Tungabhadra
number (viii) permitted Reservoir. The Directorate of Industries & Commerce
of para no. and Karnataka Water Resource Department is
14. considering the allotment, but the time taken for final
grant and execution is more than 2 to 3 years subject to
availability of surplus water. Hence, requesting to grant
the usage of the ground water until the surface water
drawl permission is granted, with a detailed
Hydrogeological Study of the area and determining the
GW Potential with appropriate GW Recharge.
Assessment of Ground Water is conducted by CGWB
and it is concluded that the area falls in a safe zone.
The point Hydrological study of the Tungabhadra river is located at 22.6 Kms from the
number (xi) watershed around the proposed plant site. Hence, this point may be removed.
of para no. Tunganhadra River shall be
14. carried out
The point HFL details of Tunganhadra Tungabhadra river is located at 22.6 Kms from the
number (xii) River from the concerned proposed plant site Tungabhadra dam is at 498m
of para no. authority and impact on AMSL and the proposed plant site has as elevation of
14. ) riverine ecology due to the 630m AMSL Therefore there is no impact of flood
proposed project shall be hazards for the plant site. Hence, this point may be
submitted in the EIA Report removed.
Page 2 of 4
5. The proponent has submitted that there is no change in the configuration and capacities of the
facilities envisaged in the ToR dated 15/11/2021.
6. It has been reported by PP that there is no violation under EIA Notification, 2006/court
case/show cause/direction related to the project under consideration.
Observations of the Committee

7. The Committee noted the following:
i. Proposal was accorded Terms of Reference on 15/11/2021 for undertaking EIA study for
setting up of 5.00 MTPA Iron Ore Processing Plant & 3.0 MTPA Pellet Plant over an area
of 26.44 ha, integrated with Downhill Pipe Conveyor over an area of 16.58 Ha located at
Village Somalapura, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka.
ii. Instant proposal is for seeking amendment in the ToR dated 15/11/2021 as mentioned at
para no. 4.
Recommendations of the Committee

8. In view of the foregoing and after deliberations, the Committee recommended for following
amendments in ToR dated 15/11/2021. All other terms and conditions prescribed in ToR dated
15/11/2021 shall remain unchanged:
S.No. As per ToR dated 15/11/2021 Recommended amendment in the
ToR dated 15/11/2021
The serial Tungabhadra river: 0.2 km/W. Stands deleted.
number (vi) of
table given of
para no. 4.
The serial Unit Configuration: 2x0.8 MTPA Unit Configuration:3.0 MTPA
number (v) of Production capacities: Production capacities: 3.0 MTPA
table given of 1.6 MTPA
para no. 5
The point Tailing shall be dewatered and stored in a Only 20.33 ha land in Kalingeri Village
number (vi) of 1.7 ha area for sale to cement plants, road located at 6 km distance from site shall
para no. 13. making and tile manufacturing. Further, be used for tailing disposal. Total land
the tailings shall be alternatively pumped in the village Kalingeri, under project is
to a plot of 20.33 ha of Ankammanahal/ 101.17 ha.
somalapura village at a distance of 1Km to
7 Kms through pipe lines and dewatering
shall be done there. Recovered water will
be recycled to the plant.
The point Ground water abstraction is not permitted
Project proponent shall submit an action
number (viii) of plan for gradually phasing out of 2491
para no. 14. KLD ground water usage in a time
frame of three years from the date of
issue of EC for the proposed project.
The point Hydrological study of the watershed Stands deleted
number (xi) of around the Tunganhadra River shall be
para no. 14. carried out
The point HFL details of Tunganhadra River from Stands deleted
number (xii) of the concerned authority and impact on
para no. 14. ) riverine ecology due to the proposed
project shall be submitted in the EIA
Report
Page 3 of 4
Decision of MoEF&CC
9. The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) has considered the
aforesaid proposal based on the recommendations of the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry 1)
and hereby decided to grant amendment in the ToR dated 15/11/2021 as mention in tables given at
the paragraph 8 above.
10. All other terms and conditions mentioned in the earlier TOR letter no.
IA/J/11011/282/2021/IA.II(I) dated 15/11/2021 shall remain unchanged.
11. The PP shall obtain fresh Terms of Reference in case of change in scope of the project if any.
12. This issues with the approval of the Competent Authority.
Yours faithfully,
(Sundar Ramanathan)
Scientist ‘E’
Copy to: -
1. Secretary, Department of Environment, Government of Karnataka, Secretariat, Bangalore-560
001.
2. Chairman, Karnataka State Pollution Control Board, No. 25, 6– 9th Floor, Public Utility
Building, M.G. Road, Bangalore – 560 001.
3. Regional Officer, Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Integrated Regional
Office, Kendriya Sadan, 4th Floor, E&F Wings, 17th Main Road, Koramangala II Block,
Bangalore – 560034
4. Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board, Parivesh Bhawan, CBD-Cum-Office Complex,
East Arjun Nagar, New Delhi-110 032.
5. Member Secretary, Central Ground Water Authority, A-2, W3, Curzon Road Barracks, K.G.
Marg, New Delhi-ll0001.
6. Chief Wildlife Warden, Govt. of Karnataka, Aranya Bhawan,18th Cross, Malleswaram,
Bangalore-560003
7. District Collector, Bellary District, Karnataka.
8. Guard File/ Record File/ Monitoring File.
9. MoEF&CC Website
(Sundar Ramanathan)
Scientist ‘E’
Page 4 of 4
ANNEXURE NO. 2
Land details of Somlapura Village Sandur

Area
Sl.No. Sy.No. village Name of land owner
(Acres)
1 110/A2 4.35 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited
112 2.65 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited

2
153 6.58 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited
3 114 9.28 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited
150/A 0.06 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited
6 154/A 0.74 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited
155/A 0.66 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited
9 169/AB 2.76 SOMALAPUR MSPL Limited

Total 53.43
Proposed Land details of Somlapura Village Sandur
Sl.No. Sy.No. Area village Name of land owner
(Acres)
1 136 5.15 SOMALAPUR Venkatesh Rao S/O bhimasena
2 137 6.77 SOMALAPUR Mohammad haji malang
Total 11.92
Total Land in somalapur Village 65.35 Acres ( 26.44 Ha )
Kalingeri village
Dump yard Land details
Sl No. Sy No's Land owner Village
1 28 Govt. Land Kalingeri
Proposed Dump yard - 101.17 Ha in kalingeri Village

ANNEXURE NO. 3
FORM - A
Form for seeking prior approval of Central Government under section 2 of the Forest(Conservation)
Act,1980 for
Diversion of fresh forest area
PART - I
(To be filled up by User Agency)
A. General Details
A-1. Project Details

(i). Proposal No. : FP/KA/MIN/144985/2021

(ii). Name of Project for which Forest Land is required : DOWNHILL CONVEYOR SYSTEM INCULDES
SERVICE ROAD, APPROACH ROAD & DHC INFRASTRUCTURES AREA FROM NARASIMHA IRON ORE MINE
ML.No.2148 TO BP PLANT AREA OF M/s. MSPL LIMITED

(iii). Short narrative of the proposal and Project/scheme for which the forest land is required : The
approach road is the crucial component for transporting of men and machinery and it will also
facilitate the instalment of Down Hill Pipe Conveyor and its future maintenance. The profile of the
forest land from the lease to downward side is steep and installation of trusses will become difficult

(iv). State : Karnataka

(v). Category of the Proposal : Mining

(vi). Shape of forest land proposed to be diverted : Linear

(vii). Estimated cost of the Project(Rupees in lacs) : 12000

(viii). Area of forest land proposed for diversion(in ha.): 13.98

(ix). Non-forest land required for this project(in ha.): 2.6

(x). Total period for which the forest land is proposed to be diverted(in years): 50
A-2. Details of User Agency

(i). Name : MSPL LIMITED

(ii). Address1 : BALDOTA ENCLAVE, ABHERAJ BALDOTA ROAD, HOSAPETE

(iii). Address2 : NIL

(iv). State : Karnataka

(v). District : Bellary

(vi). Pin : 583203

(vii). Landmark : NEAR SAI BABA TEMPLE

(viii). Email address : email@mspllimited.com

(ix). Landline Telephone No. : 8394-232003

(x). Fax No. : 8394-232333

(xi). Mobile No. : 9900256759

(xii). Website (if any) : www.mspllimited.com

(xiii). Legal status of User Agency : Private
A-3. Details of Person Making Application

(i). First Name: MADHUSUDHANA

(ii). Middle Name: NIL

(iii). Last Name: KANNAMANENI

(iv). Gender: Male

(v). Designation: VICE PRESIDENT - MINES

(vi). Address 1: BALDOTA ENCLAVE, ABHERAJ BALDOTA ROAD, HOSAPETE

(vii). Address 2: NIL

(viii). State: Karnataka

(ix). District: Bellary

(x). Tehsil: Hospet

(xi). Pin: 583203

(xii). Landmark: NEAR SAI BABA TEMPLE

(xiii). Email Address: madhusudhan.k@mspllimited.com

(xiv). Landline Telephone No.: 8394-232003

(xv). Fax No.: 08394232333

(xvi). Mobile No.: 9900256759

(xvii). Copy of documents in support of the competence/authority of the person making this
application to make application on behalf of the User Agency:
B. Details of land required for the Project
Details of proposal seeking prior approval of Central Government under the Act for
B-1.
diversion of forest land for the Project already submitted in the past
List of proposal submitted in Past
Date of
Moef Area Proposed Date of
Proposal Proposal Area In-
S.no File for Final
Status. No. Diverted(Ha.) Principle
No. Diversion(Ha.) Approval
Approval
NIL
B-2. Details of forest land proposed to be diverted
B-2.1 Details of Divisions involved
Details of Divisions involved

Non-Forest
S.no Division Name Forest Land(ha.)
Land(ha.)
1. Bellary 13.98 2.6
Total 13.98 2.6
B-2.2 Details of Districts involved
District wise breakup

Non-Forest
S.no District Name Forest Land(ha.)
Land(ha.)
1. Bellary 13.98 2.6
Total 13.98 2.6
B-2.3 Village wise breakup
Villages wise breakup

Non-Forest
S.no Village Forest Land(ha.)
Land(ha.)
1 SM BLOCK FOREST, SOMALAPUR 13.98 0
VILLAGE, SANDUR
2 110/B, SOMALAPUR VILLAGE, SANDUR 0 2.41
3 179, SOMALAPUR VILLAGE, SANDUR 0 0.12
4 110/A, SOMALAPUR VILLAGE, SANDUR 0 0.07
Total 13.98 2.6
B-2.4 Component wise breakup
Component wise breakup
Non-Forest
S.no Component Forest Land(ha.)
Land(ha.)
1 DHC CORRIDOR, WHICH INCLUDE 10.46 2.6

SERVICE ROAD
2 DHC, INFRASTRUCTURES 0.25 0
3 APPROACH ROAD A TO B 2.89 0
4 APPROACH ROAD R1 0.18 0
5 APPROACH ROAD R2 0.2 0
Total 13.98 2.6
C. Maps of forest land proposed to be diverted
Division 1. : Bellary

(i). Area of forest land proposed to be diverted(in ha.) : 13.98

(ii). Nature of the Project: Linear

(b). No. of Segments : One

Segment wise details
Kml File of Segments

(To view KML file on google the
same
Segment
Segments may be downloaded and then open if
Area(in ha.)
in google earth install in your
computer).
1. 13.98
View File
(iii). Copy of Survey of India Toposheet indicating boundary of forest land
proposed to be diverted:

(iv). Scanned copy of the Geo-referenced map of the forest land proposed to
be diverted prepared by using GPS or Total Station:
Justification for locating the Project in forest land and details of alternatives
D.
examined:
(i). Copy of note containing justification for locating the Project in forest land:

(ii). Whether a copy of map indicating location of alternative examine is required to be provided:
No

(a). Reason for not providing such map: It is connected to Mining lease area and siding ar
E. Employment likely to be generated

(i). Whether the Project is likely to generate employment ?: Yes

(ii). Permanent/Regular Employment(Number of persons): 10

(iii). Temporary Employment(Number of person-days): 10
F. Displacement of People due to the Project, if any

(i). Whether Project involves displacement?: No
G. Details of Cost-Benefit analysis for the Project

(i). Whether the Project requires Cost-Benefit analysis?: Yes

(a). Copy of Cost-Benefit analysis:
H. Status of Environmental Clearance

(i). Whether the Project requires Clearance under the Environment (Protection) Act 1986 ? : No
I. Status of Wildelife Clearance

(i). Whether the Project or a part thereof is located in any Protected Area or their Eco sensitive
zone? : No
J. Applicability of special provisions governing Scheduled Areas

(i).Whether the Project or a part thereof is located in a Scheduled Area? : No
Status of settlement of rights under the Forest Rights Act,2006 on the forest
K.
land proposed to be diverted

(i). Whether the process for settlement of Rights under the Forest Rights Acts 2006 on the forest
land proposed to be diverted has been completed? : Yes

(a). Copy of documentry evidence in support of settlement of rights under the Forest Rights
Act,2006 on the forest land proposed to be diverted:
L. Details of land identified for Compensatory Afforestation

(i). Whether non-forest or Revenue forest land is required to be provided by User Agency?: Yes

(ii). Whether the area of non-forest land or Revenue forest land required to be provided by User
Agency for raising Compensatory Afforestation is less than area of forest land proposed to be
diverted ?: Yes

(a). Reason Category: CA Will be raised on degraded forest land as well as on land provided by User
Agency

(b). Degraded forest area on which CA has to be raised by forest department(in ha.): 13.98

(c). Area of non-forest or Revenue forest land required to be provided by User Agency for raising
Compensatory Afforestation(in ha.): 13.98

(iii). No. of districts involved for raising Compensatory Afforestation: 1

(iv). No. of patches: Three
District 1. : Chamarajanagar

(a). Village: Ponnachi

(b). Area(in ha.): 13.98

(c). Copy of KML file of the patch: View File

(d). Khasra details: 395/2B, 396/2,398/2B,399/1,392/2B,400/2,407,408/2 &
408/3

(e). Present owner: User Agency

(f). Copy of Ownership proof:
(v). Scanned copy of the map of the land identified for creation of Compensatory Afforestation
prepared by using GPS ot Total Station:

(vi). Copy of Survey of India Toposheet in 1:50,000 scale indicating location of the land identified
for creation of Compensatory Afforestation:
M. Mining Details
M-1. Details of Mineral Concessions

(i). Whether the forest land is aquired under Coal Bearing Areas Act: No

(a). Reference number of Letter of Intent for grant of mining lease.(approval letter of the State
Mines and Geology Department): No:DMG/MLS/AUC/C-2148/2018-19

(b). Date of issue of the Letter of Intent(LOI) for grant of mining lease: 06 Oct 2018

(c). Copy the Letter of Intent(LOI):

(d). Total area of the mining lease(in ha.): 60.66

(e). Area of forest land located in the mining lease(in ha.): 60.66
M-2. Details of Mining Plan

(i). Date of approval of mining plan: 16 Apr 2019

(ii). Approval authority: Indian Bureau of Mines

(iii). Copy of approval of mining plan:

(iv). Copy of approved mining plan:

(v). Nature of mining (underground/opencast): Opencast

(vi). Copy of the detailed land use plan in 1:4,000 scale prepared by using GPS or Total Station :
(vii). Copy of map of the outer boundary of mining lease area: View file
M-3. Details of prospecting undertaken to assess mineral reserves

(i). Whether detailed prospecting to assess mineral reserve in the lease has been undertaken: No
M-4. Details of extension (if any) of original prospecting licence issued in the past

(i). Whether detailed prospecting to assess mineral reserve in the lease has been undertaken: No
M-5. Brief details of prospecting activities undertaken in the mining lease :

(i). Detail of prospecting activity under taken in the mining lease: MECL is conducted the
exploration work for G1 level as per Minerals (Evidence of Mineral Contents) Rules, 2015 in the mining
lease.
M-5.1 Details of bore holes drilled for prospecting :
Bore holes drilled for prospecting
No. of Bore Diameters(in

No. of Bore holes (in Diameters(in
S.no holes (in non- inch.) non-
forest land) inch.) forest land
forest land) forest land
1 10 No.s - Core Bore holes 1.90 0 0
2 38 No.s - RC Bore holes 4 0 0
M-5.2 Estimated Reserve along with accuracy and confidence level
Estimated Reserve along with accuracy and confidence level
Estimated Estimated
% % % %
Reserve Reserve
Minerals accuracy confidence accuracy confidence
(million (million
(+ -) level (+ -) level
tones) tones)
Iron Ore 63.33 100 100 0 0 0
Details of approval under the Forest (Consevation) Act,1980 obtained for undertaking
M-6.
prospecting activities in the forest land located in the mining lease

(i).Whether approval under the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 for undertaking prospecting
activities in the forest land located in the mining lease have been obtained No
Details of approval under the Forest(Consevation) Act,1980

MoEF File Date of Area of forest land From To
S.no
No approval diverted(in ha.) Date Date
NIL
M-7.
Mineral wise details

(i). No. of minerals: One
Mineral wise details

Total Estimated
Estimated Estimated estimated mineral
Estimated
reserve in reserve Estimated annual extraction reserve
life
Minerals non forest in forest extraction(million during at the end of
of
land(million land(million tons.) mining lease mining
mine(Yrs.)
tons.) tons.) period(million lease(million
tons.) tons.)
Iron Ore 0 63.33 0.77 50 38.5 24.83
M-
7.1 Proposed use of the minerals proposed to be raised from the mining lease

(i). Proposed use of the minerals proposed to be raised from the mining lease: Captive

(a).Copy note containing details of the linked end-use Project:

(ii).Copy note containing details of the plan for the transportation of the minerals proposed to be
raised from the mining lease:
Additional information Details
Documents

S.No Documents
Remarks
1 FOREST BOUNDARY GPS

READINGS IN DEGREE.
DECIMALS
2 CA LAND GEO-REFERENCE
MAP
3 GPS READINGS OF CA
LAND IDENTIFIED
4 DHC-Bare minimum area

letter
5 DHC- CA LAND
Undertaking letter
6 DHC- NPV Undertaking
letter
7 CA LAND Suitability
certificate
8 GPS READINGS OF
DHC_CORRIDOR_SERVICE
ROAD
9 GPS READINGS OF
DHC_INFRASTRUCTURES
10 GPS READINGS OF
APPROACH ROAD A TO B
11 GPS READINGS OF
APPROACH ROAD R1 & R2
12 MSPL Reply letter for
shortcoming dated
10.08.2021
ANNEXURE NO. 4
LIST OF TABLES
SL.
PARTICULARS TABLE NO.
NO.
1 Meteorological data A to C
Test Report of Air Quality October, 2021 1 to 12
2 November, 2021 13 to 24
December, 2021 25 to 36
3 Statistical Air Quality Report 37
4 Water Test Report As per IS 2296 38 o 40
5 Water Test Report As per IS 10500 41 to 45
6 Noise Level Data 46
7 Soil Analysis Report 47 to 49
8 Test report of Free Silica (Quartz) 50

ANNEXURE NO. 5
ANNEXURE NO.6
~?
State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority-Karnataka

(Constituted by MoEF, Government of India, under section 3(3) of E(P) Act, 1986)
No. SEIAA 8 Misc 2019 Date:13.05.2019

TRANSFER OF ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE
Preamble:
Attention is invited to the Environmental Clearance granted by the Ministry of
Environment and Forests, Government of India vide letter No. J 11015 40 2007-Lk.II (M)
dated 14.03.2008 regarding expansion of Swamymalai Iron ore (ML area 60.71 Ha) from
1.5 MTPA to 5.0 MTPA at village Dharmapur, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District to Shri H.G.
Rangan Goud.
The Director of Department of Mines and Geology vide letter No.
DMG/MLS/AUC/’C’-2148 2018-19 2990 dated 6.10.2018 have granted Letter of Intent to
M s MSPL Limited for grant of Mining Lease of “Sri H.G. Rangan Gouda, ML No. 2148”
Block in Dharmapur village, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District over an extent of 60.66 Ha area
of forest land through an e-auction process conducted to pursuant to the orders of Hon’ble
Supreme Court in Writ Petition (C) No. 562 of 2009.
MIs MSPL Limited vide letter dated 1 1th February 2019 have requested for transfer
the Environmental Clearance of Narasimha Iron Ore Mine vide ML No. 2148 (old name
Swamymalai Iron ore) from the earstwhile lessee Shri H.G. Rangan Gouda in their favour.
The State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority, Karnataka have
considered the request made by M/s MSPL Limited during the meeting held on 2” March
2019 in the light of provision for “Transferability of Environmental Clearance (EC)” under
para 11 of the Notification No. S.O. 1533(E) dated 14th September 2006 amended from time
to time and noted the following:
i. The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Government of
India vide Notification No. 5.0. 3977 (E) dated 14th August 2018 have
brought all mining leases of < 100 ha of mining lease area in respect of non-
coal mine lease under “B” category activity and hence are to be considered by
the State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority.
ii. The MoEF vide Notification No. S.O. 4241 (E) dated 30th December 2016
exempted obtaining of ‘No objection” from either the holder of
Environmental Clearance or from the regulatory authority concerned while
transferring Environmental Clearance in cases of iron ore blocks cancelled in
any legal proceedings by the Government of Karnataka.
In view of the above facts and circumstances, the Authority decided to transfer the
Environmental Clearance issued vide E.C. letter No. J-1 l015/40/2007-IA.II (]
14.03.2008 in favour of M/s MSPL Limited in accordance with law.
Hence the order.
ORDER
Pursuant to the facts and circumstances traversed in the preambli.
Clearance issued in favour of Shri ItO. Rangan Goud, Housing Board’
Room No. 706, 7th Floor, 4th Gate, MS. Building, Bangalore -560 001 Phone : 080-2
\Nebsite: http://seiaa.kar.nic.in http://seiaa.karnataka.gov.in http://environmenl
e-mail: msseiaakarnataka~gmaiI.com
-2-
O~p.L&~1aV~thi Rilá’yam, Tilak Nagar, Conto’mnënt, Bellary 583104 by the Ministry of

-
EhVironmeht aqd Forests vide letter No. J-1.1~15I40/2007-IA.II (M) dated 14.03.2008 for
undertaking expansioii of mining of iron ore from I ~-5 MTPA to 5.0 MTPA on a lease area
of 60.71 Ha in Swamymalai Iron ore mine which falls under Kumaraswamy Reserve Forest
at Dharmapur village, Sandur Taluk, Bellary District stands transferred to MIs MSPL
Limited, Baldota Enclave, Abheraj Baldota Road, Hospete 583203 subject to the
following conditions in addition to the terms and conditions under which the prior
Environmental Clearance has beewgranted and for the same validity period
1. The transferee shall be abide by all commitments made by the earlier proponent and
honor them in the letter and spint.
2. The transferee shall comply all the terms and conditions traversed directly or
indirectly in the EC letter No J-l 1015 40 2007-IA.1I (M) dated 14.03.2008.
3. The transferee shall limit the mining lease area to 60.66 Ha instead of the original
lease area of 60.71 Ha.
4. The transferee shall undertake mining activity in accordance with the conditions of
CECv-the-tenderdocument-issued-by-the-Department of Mines & Geology, the
flulfiliment of all the conditions of Letter of Intent and the mining plan duly
approved-by thecompetent- authority.
5. The annual production and the extent of Mining lease area shall not exceed the limit
fixed by the Central Empowered Committee or fUrther orders issued by the CEC in
this regard and strict compliance of other conditions of the Environmental
Clearance. CEC guidelines and the R&R plan.
6. The transferee shall comply all orders, guidelines and additional conditions
imposed by the Hon’ble Si CEC and others with regard to
environment safety, R&R
(Vijayakumar Gogij
Member Secretary,
SEJAA
To,
MIs MSPL Limited,
Baldota Enclave, Abheraj
Hospete 583203.
Copy to:
(1) The Secretary, Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change, Indira Paryavaran
Bhavan, Jor Bagh Road, Aliganj, New Delhi- 110003.
(2) The Director, Department of Mines and Geology, Khanija Bhavan, Race course road,
Bengaluru 560 001.
-
(3) The Member Secretary, Kamataka State Pollution Control Board, Bengaluru.
(4) The APCCF, Regional Office, Ministry of Environment & Forests (SZ), Kendriya Sadan,
IV Floor, E & F wings, 17th Main Road, Koramangala II Block, Bangalore-560 034.
(5) Shri H.G Rangan Goud, Housing Board Shopping Complex, Opp. Leelavathi Nilayam
Tilak Nagar, Contonment, Bellary 583104.
(6) Guard File
VI

EIA Report MSPL Sandur Ballari 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

EIA Report MSPL Sandur Ballari 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EIA Report MSPL Sandur Ballari 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MES/EIA/Sec-2(b)&3(a) /22-23

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

Iron Ore Beneficiation Plant & Pellet

87 The consultants involved in the preparation of EIA- NABET Certificates of consultants

Chapter No Description Page No.

1.2 Identification of project & project proponent

1.2.2 Project Proponent & address

1.3.2 Location of the project

Photo.1.0 Plant Area Photo 1.1 Tailing disposal area

1.3.4.1 Forestry Clearance

1.3.4.2 Other Clearances

The chosen site is bounded with the features, as under:

9 Nearest airport JSW Airport 25 km

2.5 Schedules for Approval & Project Implementation

2.6 Technology & Process Description

TABLE 2.2: IRON ORE PROCESSING PLANT - FEED PARAMETERS

2.6.2 Main Plant Facilities:

FIG.2.1 IRON ORE PROCESSING BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM

Proposed Water Quantity

TABLE 2.4: IRON ORE PROCESSING PLANT - WATER REQUIREMENT

Parameter Make-up (KLD)

FIG 2.2. PELLET PLANT PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM

Pellet Design Parameters - Input & Output

2.6.2.4 Fuel handling and Utlizing system

TABLE NO 2.6 : QUALITY OF RAW MATERIAL FEED TO PELLET

Sl. Item Value

TABLE NO.2.9: PELLET PLANT - RAW MATERIAL

Iron Ore Utilization

2.7.2 Power Requirment

The requirement of Furance oil per day 60,000Kg/ Day

Employment during construction process shall be 1500 direct and indirect

3. Description of the Environment

Table.No.3.4 Environmental Monitoring Program

Table.No.3.5 Environmental Attributes & Frequency of Monitoring

GW10 Kodialli Bore water

3.5.1.2 MICROMETEOROLOGICAL STATUS

Fig.3.1 Monthly Rainfall for Sandur, Ballari District

Table.No.3.7 Meterological Data

17/11/2021 19.3 33.6 37.3 89.1 4.0 0.67

Windrose at site October, 2021 Windrose at site November, 2021

Figure No. 3.2B

3.5.3 Air Quality Data

3.5.3.2 FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

3.5.3.4 MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITION OF PM10 :

3.5.4 Noise Environment

3.5.5 Water Environment

3.5.5.4 Ground Water Sampling Stations

The parameters wise ground water quality is given in Annexure.No.4 enclosed

SL.No PARAMETERS Unit S5 S6 S7 S8

SL.No PARAMETERS Unit S9 S10 S11

Land use Pattern in 10 Km radius area arround the Project Area

3.6.2 Land use of plant area 26.44 ha

3.7 Biological Environment:

3.7.1 Study Region

Figure 3.3 Overview of core area and buffer area map

3.7.2 Tailing disposal land: Kalingeri

Biodiversity Analysis using index

Figure 3.6. IUCN categories showing threatened species categories